Home

FX3G Users Manual - Hardware Edi

1. 24VDC ge Sink and service i As for the details of 28 source power emergency stop input supply i operation see DESIGN o type 5 output i PRECAUTIONS at 5 Safety Precautions field 7 33 ree i n Se 24V DC 3 service power gc supply output Some special function units blocks do not have the power supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the Output extension same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit block When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the VOV 24V system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time Do not connect the 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply of the main unit and the input output extension unit 5 n ye v D gt o 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in 5 any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in with cach oiher Connect the Ov temai al y the main unit and extension units or earlier in extension 6 Some special extension units blocks do not have power E units than the main unit mina al Edo a is WIRING PRECAUTIONS in When using an external power supply turn it ON at the 3 i same time with the extension unit or earlier than the As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at aaa ee Y mS a safety Precautions field Zu When turni
2. 276 19 9 3 FXS em B mene cr A IM usa M Mele mU Lu UE A EE 277 A A 277 185329 RX3G 1DA BI erates Acai e dad le cd rl ced eut 278 o Ot nena een eg Rate etc a ei cee eaten en et a ee ne eee eee eR Lui eer 278 eo ipsa tta tes ss i SSes aS iade sas i lennch adnadedseosindwicane 279 M FX2N20P SU C is 279 16 5 Connector Conversion Ad alert AOS 279 E A III LE 279 19 52 EX2NSGINVEBG aranna naa a saeco hates ieee asain ias Punti deuda esed tess ec EN esa Steere 280 18 6 Interface Module roscas tarso 280 190 1 VILI t Cc CORN NE CER 280 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 281 195 Of EEE e E PU ne A DN EM LM MEME 281 A men ree en meet yates Mie ee mewn eee We enc eee ee en ee a ee ener 281 AZ Display S Witch SPECIIIGATOMS sisi it A A e Saige ved 281 LES ES PAN NAMES NOR T H cm 202 19514 ExternabiDIIfielisI LIS ses exco coc qae fes cbe o e epe vds oce ad Pe etae Yep cnet ee Roce eee esse eee 202 19 2 Istalladon and ISemowVval sud ite e ant ica 283 19 2 1 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together 283 19 2 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 284 19 35 gt umman of FUNCION Sisa soii G M M 285 19 4 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen ccooccccoccnccccnnconcnonononos
3. 7 1 iy 1 I l I I I I iy 1 I l I I I I li 1 WESTEN block extension block Special Connector conversion FX3G 40MT ES i FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EYT i adapters adapter X000 to X027 1 X030 to X047 E i i 7 i I La a I I iy I I I i 1 I Re 1 I d E Y020 to YO37 1 li Range of devices powered from I E main unit i a ta a ee A a a nm Selection of extension cable _ Determination of number of devices to be connected to extension unit extension power supply unit Refer to this chapter FX2N input output powered Extension devices for FX2N FX3U Series extension unit Extension power supply unit Input extension Special block function block FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16CCL M s I I I I I I I I I I I I I I X050 to X067 X070 to X107 Unit No 0 I T l E I I I I I I I I I I d The range of devices powered from the FX2N input output powered extension unit or the extension power supply unit iS La e mm um um um M UM NS uum e u um um m uM um M 1 The connector conversion adapter is required to use a special adapter 2 Included in the number of units connectable to the main unit when the input extension block including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER is used and the extension power supply unit is locat
4. Extension cable FXON 65EC FXON 30EC FX2N CNV BC indicates an M4 screw 3 Example of combination of installation on DIN rail and direct installation As shown in the following example when the main unit is installed on the DIN rail the extension devices connected with the extension cable can be installed directly in the enclosure 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 AH a H FX2N 16EYT FX3G Series main unit DIN rail 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 Extension cable FXoN 65EC FX2N CNV BC FXoN 30EC indicates an M4 screw 1 FX2N CNV BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail 97 UONnOnpoJjU N SOWeN ed pue sanjea OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneooods I al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis O uoneJn6ijuo N jndinondu Z O 2 2 Z O m uonejeisu BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail The main unit can be installed on a DIN46277 rail 85 mm 1 38 wide 8 4 1 Preparation for installation 1 Connecting extension devices Some extension devices must be mounted on the main unit before the unit is installed in the enclosure Mo
5. a 53 O 5 c d 0 ee How to connect connector FX2N 16EX C Connection face of connector The polarity is shown in the following table I 425 352 Seo TE o g 1 2 O 19 17 19 13 11 2 293 le 20118116114 y12 20 9491746194 4134511 295 of 2 o C S 2 Side B is for the higher input numbers Side Bp4 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 XO and side A is for the lower input numbers Side A f t X7 X6 X5 xa x3 X2 X XO Exe Side B X050 to X057 17 Side A X040 to X047 com zc og E 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 239 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points 16 6 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 16EXL C Product type FX2N connector type extension block for each application Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 16EXL C MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input
6. 9jesse2 Be sure that the power is OFF when removing the memory cassette 21 4 1 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are not used together N apeg IN The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever A Remove the tapping screws B in the right fig ure which fix the memory cassette 0008d 0008IN sr1 uononJjsu UJ s n d jeloeds Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws Grasp the detachment lever and pull it Grasp the detachment lever C and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette Remove the side cover Remove the side cover D in the right figure as shown in the right figure Caution The side cover is not attached when the memory cassette is installed under the top cover S of a 40 60 point type main unit Attach the top cover Attach the top cover E in the right figure as shown in the right figure 353 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 4 Removal 21 4 2 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are used together 354 The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever
7. a ill Bl a System image OK Close Select USB Built in port C24 CCIE Cont NET I CC Link Ethernet NET 10 H Accessing host station A display screen is the example of Ver 8 72A 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting 58 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series 5 4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series UONnOnpoJjU When monitoring circuits device registration etc or reading writing programs in an FX3G PLC from GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later using the transparent function by way of USB in the GOT1000 Series make sure to execute the following setting If the following setting is not provided a communication error occurs GX Developer Ver 8 21X or former GX Developer Ver8 22Y or later Not supported not available Setting shown below is required N SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee When using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series When using transparent function by way of OO Select RS 232C in setting shown below RS 232 in GOT1000 Series Set COM port and Transmission speed Sa i i E and set COM port and Transmission 39 When directly connecting GX Developer to on PC side I F Serial setting dialog box Speed 3 8
8. Input indicator lamps LED lamps B oou cono 00000000 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I 16 6 3 External dimensions ZA 352 Sas 225 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 32 Oo E O E E 15 pol esa mus LO O o O e Dc 2 Oe l OD 2 80 1 of ECCE FXw 16EXL C co e c E 3 o zi E 16 6 4 Example of wiring 17 1 Wiring on input side SOR Oo 5 Sink input OS S Z lt ae i External 5VDC TIL uni 00 Pay y UL j L EIN S S OV 4V XO 5 XO X1 X3 ais D LT AA TEO y TT main unit or 1 input output powered extension unit suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 241 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 242 How to connect connector Connection face of connector The polarity is shown in the following table A A A A Y 20118 16 14 12 204814614414211 Side B is for the higher input numbers Side B T X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 DO XT X0 204 side A and side A is for the lower input numbers Side ALS xz xe xe x4 X8 X2 X1 XO Exe siae B x050 to x057 Side A X040 to X047 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 7 FX2N 8
9. occccccccncccccnnccoccncnononnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 123 9 4 3 Example of source input common WiTiNQ occccoccncncccnnccononoconononononnnonnnnnnonnnnnnonononononononnninons 124 9 4 4 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit sink input common 125 9 4 5 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit source input common 126 10 Input Wiring Procedures 127 101 Before Starting Input VINO dad 129 1021 1 SINK AMAS e es 129 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type cccoooccccccoconcccoconccnononnonanonnonanonconanononnannncnnanenoss 130 10 2 1 Handling of 24V DC input eesssssssssessseeeeeee nennen nnnm nnne nnn nn n nnn nnne nnn nnns 130 10 2 2 Instructions for connecting input devicCesS oooonnccccconccnccnoonnnnnnnnccnncnnncnnnononcnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnncnnonannenos 131 10 2 3 Examples of external wiring sink input ccocoonccnccconncnnncnncncnnonnncnnnnononnnnnnnnnononononrrnnnononcnnnnnnns 133 10 2 4 Examples of external wiring source INpub cooonncnccconccnncnnononcconoconnnononccnnnnnnnnnnononrnnnnnnnncnnnnos 135 TS es XIV t amuaeaareaaatstoaes 136 10 3 1 Input SDOCITIC d CONS rol ob donat sonst a 136 10 32 Handing or T1600V AC INPUT odios 136 10 3 3 Examples of external wiring 100V AC input esses 137 10 4 Input Interruption IOOG to IDDD
10. ooccccococcncccocnncccoconconacononnocononnanonnonannnonnannnnnnannncnnananennananess 138 10 4 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration 138 1044 2 Cautions TOR Np t ICS TEU pO a cari 138 10 5 Pulse Catch M6170 to MOULS taa id wecanedeiaeiee 139 10 5 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals 139 105 2 Canons TOP pulse Calcomanias dido 139 10 6 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 140 10 6 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers oocccccccnnccncnnccncnnconcnnnoncnnnnnnonononononononononininons 140 10 6 2 Cautions for pulse width period measurement fUNC ION occcoocncoccncconnccocnncncnncnnnnnnanononnnnnanons 140 11 Use of High speed Counters 141 o AA o eed ean saab ecto 141 11 2 Types of Counting and Operations cccccoccnccconcnncconcnncnnncnonononennnnnnnnonnnrnnononcnnnnnnrnnonancnnnnnnanins 141 11 24 Types and irput signal OS tee cued coast obest eet ae eel ee a ret a dade 141 11 2 2 High speed counter device notations esses nennen nnn nnns 141 11 2 3 Cautions in connecting mating device ccccccccccssseccecceseeeccsessececceeueceeseusseeeessseeesseaeeseesaneas 141 11 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions occccocncccccnccccnnoccnnncncnnnncnonnnnnonnnnonnnnnonannnonnnnonnnnnn
11. 3 With built in ge 1 power Input output FX2N 7 supply powered extension unit Example of entry gt FX2N 48ER ES UL 4 WD Enter the specifications for the products to be added Enter the data for the input output extension blocks and special function blocks to be connected to the input output powered extension unit and calculate the current For data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 al seone JeJeudueg pue uoISJ9A Calculation of current consumption Power supply of built in power supply Me Classification connected Type output points classification 5V DC power 24V DC power units points supply mA supply mA pa o US m HE Number of Number of input a pa SEEEES eam p pac IENENS Pee AS Paw 1 pawxu pax pawx A xw PO Input output extension block 7 Enter the products connected to the input output powered extension unit SON IlUuf SON jndinondu uonejessu OO Calculate the totals cam 1 When connecting the FX3U 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest a E upstream unit to the FX3U 1PSU 5V is input output powered extension unit also enter the current 5 ej consumption and number of occupied I O points for the input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER S ES UL and FX2N 8ER that are connecte
12. User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement Oz FX2N 8EYT ESS UL a With cover Without cover 1 2 O c E FX2N 8EYT ESS z O POWER Output Rear line 7 O 6685 indicator extension 990 lamps connector LED lamps 1 3 rls lt Ej T c a cS wn D 6 I EE S29 292 FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 15 When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers Mam and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers S S ciae With cover Without cover 09 Output indicator 3 3 K lamps E E LED lamps Rear line extension Lower connector numbers 19 Output indicator z 3 E lamps B 3 LED lamps E 17 C um SOX oO S p NS Higher 2 numbers 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JOO ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisua 2 yoojg euw CO 249 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 3 External dimensions FX2N 8EYT ESS UL 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8EYT ESS O POWER oTo 12 3 0000 4587 0000 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 90 3 55 80 3 15
13. buttons to move the cursor to the keyword item then press OK to display the enable keyword Make Keyword screen valid 2 Press the OK button to enable the keyword Or to retain the keyword s canceled status press ESC OK gt Execute Button Operation Description ESC gt Cancel ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Disabled Disabled OK Enables the Keyword and returns to the menu screen 305 SJojuno mm peads yBIH Buum mano N 10 Buum OO Ses SNOEN I JE oD nV es Sy XE E 090 2 337 oo 2 0 5 Q mU gt Aog O c gt Oo 2 oO GGG 2 3 s S a e uda 490 UOISU9 X3 indinomdu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers Data transfers between the internal EEPROM memory and a connected memory cassette can be performed from the Cassette menu when the PLC is in a STOP state This menu is disabled however if a keyword is registered in the internal EEPROM In this case remove the memory cassette and use the programming tool to cancel the internal EEPROM s keyword Item Operation Description Cassette lt PLC Copies internal program memory EEPROM
14. Model name Description FX3G 5DM Display module that can be incorporated in FX3G Series main unit 3 1 6 Expansion boards Model name Description FX3G 232 BD For RS 232C communication FX3G 422 BD For RS 422 communication FX3G 485 BD For RS 485 communication FX3G 8AV BD For 8 ch Analog volume FX3G 2AD BD 2 ch voltage current input FX3G 1DA BD 1 ch voltage current output 3 1 7 Connector conversion adapter e Model name Description FX3G CNV ADP Special adapter connection conversion adapter FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 8 Special adapters Model name Description FX3U 232ADP MB RS 232C communication FX3U 485ADP MB RS 485 communication FX3U 4AD ADP 4 ch voltage current input FX3U 4DA ADP 4 ch voltage current output FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 50 to 250 C FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 ch platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 100 to 600 C FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 resistance thermometer sensor input FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 ch thermocouple K J type temperature sensor input 3 1 9 Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V Extension power supply 5V DC 1A 100 to 240V AC 3 1 10 Extension cables and connector conversion adapter Battery Memory cassettes Classification Description 4 0 65m xwexc 21 These cables are used to mount input ou
15. S2 230 LD gt Load Compare S1 gt S2 231 232 AND AND Compare S1 S2 233 AND AND Compare S1 gt S2 234 AND lt AND Compare S1 lt S2 235 236 AND lt gt AND Compare S1 S2 237 AND lt AND Compare S1 S2 238 AND gt AND Compare S1 gt S2 239 240 OR Compare S1 S2 241 OR gt OR Compare S1 S2 242 OR OR Compare S1 S2 243 244 OR lt gt OR Compare S1 2 S2 245 OR lt OR Compare S1 S2 246 OR gt OR Compare S1 gt S2 247 248 249 External Device Communication Inverter Communication 270 Inverter Status Check 271 Inverter Drive 272 Inverter Parameter Read 273 Inverter Parameter Write FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix B Instruction List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number Function FNC No Extension File Register Control 290 LOADR Load From ER 9jesse2 NO JOUJOJN m 22 BS o 294 RWER Rewrite to ER i lt i A 1 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later a D gs eo OB S17 uononJjsu 385 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Warranty Warranty 386 Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the re
16. The terminal layout in the main unit is shown below 4 7 1 Interpretation of terminal block layout Power supply terminals Input terminal 9 S X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17X21 X23 X25 X27 AL Y x0 x2 x4 X6 X10X12X14X16X20X22X24 X206 Output terminals l FX3G 40MT ES connected to COM5 Vacant terminal Do not use A yo yi v2 gt v4 vo E viata gt 24V pomofcom coma Y3 coma Y5 Y7 cov4Y11 Y 1 3 comelY 15Y 17 24V DC service Common terminal Output Partition power supply 4 points common terminal terminal Indication of output terminals connected to common terminal One common terminal covers 1 2 3 or 4 output points The output numbers Y connected to a common terminal are enclosed with heavy partition lines For transistor output source type COMO is Vr 4 7 2 FX3G 14MT TESE CL TN Txo x2 x4 x6 1 FX3G 14MT ES FX3G 14MR ES ovIvoIv1 vz vs va vs T av com cow oor cows oov cose FX3G 14MT ESS ES ov voTv1Tvz vs Y4 vs T zAvvopvipevzpvapvaeve T 4 7 3 FX3G 24MT 0O CE TSX x3 xe x7 SO SEE IL TN xo x2 x4 x6 X10X12X14 FX3G 24MT ES FX3G 24MR ES DAMIAN ve vq zav cow oon oore cois a ou Y7 Y T FX3G 24MT ESS DUNA RENACER zAvpvopvipvzpva v4 eva v7M1 50 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 4
17. gt O Ss O f O S SON HUN SON uonejeisu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneJedald ram Buum indu CO p 67 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output 6 3 2 Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used 1 Calculation of maximum number of input output points When CC Link master block is used the following maximum number of input output points can be connected Number of input Number of input output occupied CO input output points output points points 256 points A B C D E units F stations gt points points Total number of points obtained by edd number 2 Total number of t Number of points occupied by formula number of remote 1 0 oo input output points special function blocks stations x 32 points The number controllable on system is multiplied by 32 points regardless of the number of remote 1 0 points For details refer to Subsection 6 3 1 A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M B Number of input output points of input output E Number of input output points occupied by special function blocks powered extension units F Number of remote I O stations units connected to CC Link C Number of input output points of input output master extension bl
18. gt Number of added points Example When a 16 input and O output point extension block is connected to FX2N 32ELI the current of 1 0 the 24V DC service power supply becomes 150mA or less E z 75 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit 2 FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL AC power supply DC input type FX2N A8EL Example 32 160 mof e 16 238 18s 195 esos 210 260 210 veo llf eo 1o 385 335 285 235 185 125 85 35 460 1o 360 310 260 210 160 110 60 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Number of added points Example When a 32 input and 16 output point extension block is connected to FX2N A8ELT the current of 24V DC service power supply becomes 110mA or less Number of added points N N 16 00 O Input 2 AC power supply AC input type 1 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 24V DC service power supply is not provided AC power supply Output DC input type Input typ 4 v Example FX2n 48ER UA1 UL Kara Number of added points C2 N 00 E E A DEE is I AN 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Number of added points Example When adding 24 inputs to FX2N 48ER UA1 UL a maximum of 32 outputs are expandable Input Check the current capacity of the 24V DC service power supply based on the value shown
19. i Chapter 7 assignment blocks etc and unit No assignment procedure for special function blocks This chapter contains explanations for the panel layout and the procedures for Installation i i j Chapter 8 installing with DIN rail or screws and how to connect extension devices This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for preparing for wiring Power supply wiring Chapter 9 power supply specifications and instructions for wiring Input wiring This chapter contains explanations of the input specifications and instructions for Chapter 10 wiring High speed counter This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for using the high speed Chapter 11 counter examples of programming Olitout wiring This chapter contains explanations for the output specifications and instructions Chapter 12 for wiring Examples of wiring for each use This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring input output Chapter 13 devices for main uses This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for test operation and adjustment maintenance and error check items and measures to be taken upon Chapter 14 occurrence of error Test operation adjustment maintenance and error check 18 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 2 Extension devices Chapter 15 to Chapter 18 Input output powered extension units uononpou
20. 120 1 4 The expansion board and special adapters of a terminal block type have terminal blocks for Europe Applicable products Classification Model names Expansion Board FX3G 485 BD FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3U 485ADP MB FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP SPecalundaplets FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Electric wires Compliant electric wires and tightening torque Electric wire size Tightening stranded wire solid wire End treatment 0 3mm to 0 5mm Remove the coating of the stranded wire twist the core wires AWG22 to 20 and connect the wires directly Remove the coating from the solid wire and connect the wire Two electric wires 0 3mm AWG22 directly 0 3 mm to 0 5 mm Bar terminal with AWG22 to 20 insulating sleeve Refer to the following outline drawing of bar terminal One electric wire 0 22 to 0 25Nem e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve recommended product Al 0 5 8WH Phoenix Contact e Caulking tool CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Phoenix Contact CRIMPFOX UD 6 Phoenix Contact Treatment of electric wire ends Treat the ends of stranded wires and solid wires without coating or using bar terminals with insulating sleeve Treatment of stranded wires and solid wires without coating e Stranded wire solid wire Twist the ends of stranded wires tightly so that loose wires will not stick out al Do not solder plate the electric wire ends
21. 19 10 3 Changing the current time s Year from 2 digit format to 4 digit format The Year data displays as 2 digit value with a default This can be changed to a 4 digit display by the following programming PE rov ea It is also possible to set the current time with a sequence program Refer to the time setting special devices D8013 to D8019 section of the Programming Manual 301 SJojunoo mm peedg uDi e Buum mano N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA dh I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod jindinoandu Ql sun uoisuejx3 uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 suondo pue sun gt uoisuex3 Jayo OO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Keyword 19 11 Keyword Keywords registered at the PLC can be canceled from the Keyword menu When canceled all operations are enabled Registering or changing keywords is not possible at the display module The programming tool must be used in advance to register new keywords 19 11 1 Keyword types and levels Keywords can be entered in 2 ways 8 digit or 16 digit depending on the peripheral device in question Fora keyword 8 digit 2nd keyword 8 digit 16 digit input Processing is possible only with a peripheral device version co
22. 4 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches _ N re C Um 2 2 um E 23 MITSUBISHI E oS ES pe E 3 O eo MESEC FXoy 48ER UM o E A A AO ee eS jl O U U000000000 1 8 O eseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeee eel 252 up ummy Suo 210 8 27 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 a 9m 87 3 43 os 5 15 8 3 Terminal layout 19 ZE Eowpov xo xz x4 X6 po pepa T DX D2 8 3 sad IN Xt x3 x5 x7 xt xa x x7 x1 x3 x5 x7 o zd FX2N 48ER UA1 UL li vo v2 Y4 ve vojva V4 ve Yo Y2 YA Ye z com vi vs oow vs vz T Joos Ya Yspow Y5 v7 Foe v1 v3 vs v7 3 3 223 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog t
23. 9jlesse2 N JOUJOjN 0008a 0008W 1817 uoONASU UJ seoi eq jeroeds FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 22 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 3 Setting for Battery 22 3 Setting for Battery The battery is not incorporated in the main unit at shipment from the factory It is necessary to attach the optional battery if backup is required In addition the battery mode is set via a parameter 22 3 1 Attaching the battery The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example 1 Turn the power OFF gt m Ny Remove the top cover A in the right figure When the expansion board connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette is attached remove it Attach the battery Insert the battery connector B in the right figure of the battery Push the battery into the battery holder C in the right figure Set the battery cable as shown in D in the right figure 4 Attach the top cover When the expansion board connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette was removed in the step 2 attach it again 22 3 2 Setting the battery mode GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later The following setting using a parameter is required to use the battery Note that the battery does not back up the data if the following setting is not provided For the backup target data refer to Section 22 1 Onthe PLC system 1 tab on the FX parameter window check the check box Use Bat
24. O PLC PP communication error PLC PP comm err PC PP 15 18 I gt 3 Serial communication error 1 ch1 JYI rs E Serial communication error 2 ch2 Link error2 zUTJ RSI 2 ch2 1 3 v Syntax error Syntax error 3k r2 33 Circuit error Ladder error at I 2 c al Operation error Operation err ga I gt 5 a Special block error uny sa S9UBUAJUIE N Bunoouse qnoy pejewog jindinoandu Ql sun uoisuejx3 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 193 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 4 Error Code List and Action When a program error occurs in the PLC the error code is stored in special data registers D8061 D8067 and D8438 The following actions should be followed for diagnostic errors PLC Hue operation Contents of error Action code at error occurrence I O configuration error M8060 D8060 The head number of unconnected I O devic Example When X020 is unconnected 1102 BCD conversion value Ex ones EE M Device number 10 to 177 Unconnected l O relay numbers are programmed ample ee ae The PLC continues its operation Modify the program check 1020 P 1 Input X
25. An example of assignment of input output numbers X Y is shown below UONINPOJJU mua 1 Example of configuration N Connector Special adapter conversion Main unit FX3U 4AD ADP adapter FX3G 24MT ES FX3G CNV ADP Input output Special function extension block block FX2N 8ER FX2N 16CCL M SOWeN ed pue sanjea Input output Input powered extension 3 extension unit block FX2N 32ET FX2N 8EX U ge 52 2 Assignment of input output numbers S Input output numbers are assigned to the above example configuration as shown below X016 X017 X024 to X027 4 Unused numbers Unused numbers y C J J xootoxots je Connector Input output Special function Special adapter conversion Main unit FX3U 4AD ADP adapter FX3G 24MT ES FX3G CNV ADP extension block block FX2N B8BER FX2N 16CCL M al YOOO to YO11 PS Y012 to YO17 YO24 to YO27 et a Unused numbers Unused numbers D cin Um X030 to X047 2 X050 to X057 6 Input output Input oS powered extension eS extension unit block a FX2N 32ET FX2N 8EX o r Y030 to Y047 J ZS 7 1 3 Application of I O number label PE C The input output powered extension units blocks come with an I O number label ES Apply the I O number label to spaces on the enclosure see the following figure so that the input output numbers can be identified AHABSIAIL For X050 I O NUMBER LABEL JY818D25401B
26. Bui jddns Jamog ue uoneJedald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 70 The allowable extension to the main unit varies depending on used extension blocks as described below When connecting only the input output extension block Input output extension blocks of up to 32 points can be connected However when the extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V is used and the main unit is the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit make sure that the number of points including the input extension block including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER extended to the extension power supply unit does not exceed 32 When connecting the input output extension block and special function block Input output extension blocks of up to 16 points can be connected However when the extension power supply unit FX3u 1PSU 5V is used and the main unit is the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit make sure that the number of points including the input extension block including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER extended to the extension power supply unit does not exceed 16 Only 1 special function block can be connected When connecting only the special function block Up to 2 special function blocks can be connected When further extension is requi
27. D 8340 Y000 Current value register D 8341 Default O D 8342 Y000 Bias speed Default O D 8343 Y000 Maximum speed i D 8344 Default 100000 Y000 Creep speed Hips Default 1000 D 8346 Y000 Zero return speed i D 8347 Default 50000 Y000 Acceleration time DOPO Default 100 YOOO Deceleration time i SAS Default 100 D 8350 Y001 Current value register D 8351 Default O D 8352 Y001 Bias speed Default O D 8353 Y001 Maximum speed l D 8354 Default 100000 Y001 Creep speed i Default 1000 D 8356 Y001 Zero return speed i D 8357 Default 50000 Y001 Acceleration time uud Default 100 YOO1 Deceleration time meum Default 100 D 8360 Y002 Current value register D 8361 Default 0 D 8362 YOO2 Bias speed Default O D 8363 Y002 Maximum speed l D 8364 Default 100000 Y002 Creep speed id Default 1000 D 8366 Y002 Zero return speed i D 8367 Default 50000 Y002 Acceleration time uus Default 100 YOO2 Deceleration time td Default 100 i RS2 FNC 87 ch0 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 D 8370 Communication format setting D18371 i RS2 FNC 87 ch0 1 D 8372 Remaining points of transmit data due z RS2 FNC 87 ch0 1 D 8373 Monitoring receive data points UM D18374 D 8375 Communication parameter display ch0 D 8376 D 8377 Not used D 8378 374 Number and Content of register name D18379 ire otio Ao penn ee ee ak STX gt on Ser D 8382 Se ee onl ETX g
28. FX3G 40M a x e spxipo xe x XTX TS TS XT X21 X23 25x27 j L N X0 x2 x4 x6 xtoxtz xta xte x20 X2 X24 x26 FX3G 40MT ES FX3G 40MR ES ov Yo v1 v2 TY4 ve void viaria com Y 11 Y1 3 COM5 Y 1 5 Y 17 FX3G 40MT ESS ovIvoIv1 vzL TYa Ye ioy7y viavig zAvEvo evi Y3 vo v5 V7 aly SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO jonpoud 5 e O o c O et O 5 4 7 5 FX3G 60ML ESSE p pe pz UE SEUA pas ROS pap E LIN XO x2 x4 xe xtopci ta pre px2op22 x24 x2epao xs2 xoa pao xo x42 suoneouyioeds FX3G 60MT ES FX3G 60MR ES ov Yo Y1 Y2 v4 ve Jviolvi2 vi4lv19 fv20jv22 v24 v2 5 24v como com cone Y3 com Y5 Y7 comfv 1 1 13 coms 15 17 com y21 23 com Y25 Y27 vyg z 3g FX36 60MT ESS 83S 9o ov voTv1 v2 Tv4 ve viojv12 ma v2ojvz2 vea v2e a 24V VO V1 V2 Y3 V3 V4Y11 Y13 v5 Y 15 Y17 V6 Y21Y23 V7 Y25 Y27 oe EE 2 S F a G x ZE P 3 a S spp E o8 go O lt 8 oa E 3 91 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 1 Version Information 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 5 1 Version Information 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial number check method The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the name plate and on the front of the product 1 Checking the nam
29. Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case NCAUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS Q DAN G E R e Make s
30. Special data register D8300 and D8301 devices with first numbers specified are assigned as system information devices data register auxiliary relay The data register excluding special data register should be specified at the system information s system signal 1 and the auxiliary relay excluding special auxiliary relay should be specified at the system information s system signal 2 Both D8300 and D8301 have default settings of 1 When D8300 is 1 the screen saver function becomes effective after 10 minutes Refer to Section 19 14 to Section 19 18 for explanations of each system signal 1 System signal 1 specta Gat System Description Reference register Information ooo Device type to be displayed For specified device monitor function Section 19 14 D8300 KOO DLILI 1 Device No to be displayed Occupies DOO 2 Screen saver setting time Forced display Section 19 15 9 points poo 3 Device for display screen protect function Section 19 16 EE 2 System signal 2 register Information Gene N Operation button ON OFF button ON OFF Section 19 17 MA A48 Device for specifying the Monitor Test menu s current value and setting the value Section 19 18 display format hexadecimal or decimal Specified device monitor display status Section 19 14 MA A10 1o 14 19 13 2 System information setting program example The following is a program example in which the system information has been assigned to D50 to D54 a
31. This chapter contains explanations for the input output specifications external Chapter 15 dimensions and terminal layout for each product Input output extension blocks Chapter 16 2 Extension power supply unit This chapter contains explanations of specifications for the extension power Chapter 17 FX3U 1PSU 5V supply unit and external dimensions P Fa 39 F 7 SE n produis or Spera This chapter contains explanations for the external dimensions and terminal DO functions such as analog control Chapter 18 a ct layout For details refer to the manual for each extension device Da and communication a 3 Optional products Chapter 19 to Chapter 22 Go 37 This chapter contains explanation of the specifications external dimensions S a ASRA meaule mounting procedures and operating procedures for display modules FX3G 5DM SAPEI e 2 FX Series terminal blocks This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for wiring FX 16 32bELI TB Chapter 20 Memory cassette This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for the memory cassette Chapter 21 and the installation procedures 4 Battery This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for replacing the battery and Chapter 22 detecting battery voltage drop 9 O 4 Others Appendix A to Appendix B 8 o m o This chapter contains an explanation list of the special auxiliary relays M8000 to List of special devices M8511 and special data register
32. V NY V V V W V Input output powered Main unit extension unit block Transistor output source oM 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET ESS UL Output extension blocks do not have the terminals 172 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 3 Input output powered extension unit Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 1 2 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input output powered extension unit ur N 0 1A 50V S YE g ye ye ve 38 D diode is gt N necessary X061VX062VX063VX064VX065VX066VX067 0 JE YN 43 33 Ji X061VX062 VX063 v X064 v X065 v X066 V X067 3 E ye 48 ys 48 B B ZN AN N AN AN ZN AN AN Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET Transistor output sink p In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit e N c Y LO LO LO LO LO 0 1A 50V diode is gt y necessary X061VX062VX063VX064VX065VX066VX067 2 zs T V X061vX062vX063v X064v
33. see Cars FX2n 8EYT H power Output EN indicator 6566 lamps LED lamps Rear line extension connector 16 12 3 External dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8EYT H CD POWER O0UT0 1 2 3 OOOO 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 259 SJojunoo mm peedg uDi e Buum mano N 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I a o oD Dn SiS TE EN 090 2 5 O O S d Q mM US Aou O c 2oc 2 oO Ooc 2 3 S a op 17 yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 16EYS Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 16EYS MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already c
34. uonejeisu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneJedald ram Buum indu CO p 81 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 Examination of System Configuration 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 2 B Input output powered extension units blocks 82 No Type AC power supply type FX2N 48ET Type 1 Input output powered extension units input output Number of input output points points Number of input output points Types for addition of input output FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER FX2N 8EX Types for addition of output Four inputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYT input output points Output current mA 24V DC service power supply 5V DC power supply 7 i i 2 Input output extension blocks Current consumed mA 5V DC Internal 24V DC BEEN i Types for addition of input FX2N 8EX ES UL 100 150 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 3 C Special function devices 3 2 S Number of input Current consumed mA No Type occupied output 5V DC Internal 24V DC External 24V DC 28 EAD L 4 1 8 3 9 55 53 3 n wees Le 80
35. yoojg euw CO 165 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board
36. 5 Operation varies as shown below depending on the selected test subject a For contact forced ON OFF The contact ON OFF status is highlighted when OK is pressed Numeric value begins blinking Button Operation Description ESC Returns to the test subject selection screen Disabled Disabled OK Highlights the contact ON OFF status meaning the current value can not be changed b For current value change setting value change Use the buttons to change the value as desired then press OK to register the changed value Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the test subject ESC selection screen Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase Registers the current value or the setting value and returns to On the test subject selection screen 6 After the setting operation is completed return to the test subject selection screen where the ESC button can then be pressed to return to the monitor screen 294 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 3 Output Y auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M state S OI Forced ON OFF operations are possible for the output Y auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M 2 state S contacts si 3
37. Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product Connector RS 422 MINI DIN 8 pin female O 51 2 2 02 276 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 3 FX3G 485 BD oz External Dimensions amp Unit mm inches e MASS Weight 20g 0 05Ibs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws 1 2 for installation of board O Side cover El S Label for indication of link Y station number 2 types 3 Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type 1 3 Terminal resistance 3300 1100 built in SS oS cg Terminal Layout 2 I SISIS RIR Terminal resistance G D D D D setting switch BIAIB A 1100 OPEN 3300 O o D o Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod jdinoandu Q1 18 3 4 FX3G 2AD BD spun uoisuejx3 External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight 20g 0 O5lbs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product uda 490 UOISU9 X3 indinomdu C 51 2 2 02 Terminal block European type E U o D CD c Jo i lt UOISU9 X3 15 4 14 1 0 6 0 56 Terminal Layout OcQ t amp A EE 2 5 asm o D a B 5 poles Q
38. Boon NE uia qudd ni iE l NN network parallel link etc 6306 Continues Communication time out detected Check programs according to applications 1 3 6307 operation Modem initialization error Remote maintenance Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the 6308 N N network parameter error gt AT commands Ea 6312 Parallel link character error Wiring 2 2 6313 Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct wiring D 6314 Parallel link format error Parameter error M8064 D8064 aso o p 6401 Program sum check error LD 3 o 6402 Memory capacity setting error 2 2 6403 Latched device area setting error BE 6404 Comment area setting error 1 5 6405 Ups File register area setting error STOP the PLC and correctly set the parameters me operation r aa UCET tse Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction 50 2 6406 f TEO setting sum check error Sag O 6407 Special unit BFM initial value setting positioning instruction S setting error 73 6409 Other setting error 1 6 Syntax error M8065 D8065 om5 0000 eer Tr AX Incorrect combination of instruction device symbol and device d S9 6501 ee number 2 6502 No OUT T or OUT C before setting value 6503 No setting value after OUT T or OUT C Insufficient number of operands for an applied instruction 1 T Same label number is used more than once eom 4 int ti t f E O oe Stops Serie iE ApEn PURO a Quite
39. CNI Output Wiring X Wiring for q UUUUUUUUUDUU Various Uses 9 0 36 Unit mm inches 2 04 5 mounting holes youd ejou Buljunow 31 08 MITSUBISHI 4 COM3 1 3 COM 5 L MESEC F Xon 32ET TRANSISTOR UNIT COM1 1 3 COM2 5 150 5 91 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch Jt q FX2N 48ET ZN O pe e O Test Run Maintenance Troubleshooting Extension Units nD eb a D Ea a D gt O a D en DP a z e a im c a z Gm E D p a E gt E youd ejou Bununow S1 08 Fol E E F 0 S O o Bo gp 8 i 2 E gp t 2 2 la 3 E uN sr F N C o a O lt O c u 2 O E Ww aa CO ES co wa N N O Input Output q Extension Blocks 15 6 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ET Iw Extension Power Supply Unit O COM3 co e St E CN E O s cO d St E CN a Oo e co v1 Yao Ys v7 FX2N 48ET Units and Options CO Other Extension SY Display Module q O Terminal Block N 219 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 7 FX2N 32ES 15 7 FX2N 32ES 15 7 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the sam
40. ES ES E 7 wa 3 KES 83 KES 83 KES 83 KES LES 83 ES 83 83 e a Pe F oD 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 pS o 150 5 91 g 02 FX2N 48ET ESS UL 4 04 5 mounting holes I Unit mm inches 352 Cx jut C C zz O 5S E 20000000000 Bor a o og MITSUBISHI 270 g D LO gt E a O0 ym MELSECFXa 48ET O 5 sa UNIT co Dasa O UUUUUUUUOUU umm E ofc wa gt Y E AO Ooc 2 5 C S 21 73 15 4 3 Terminal layout gms SG FX2N 32ET ESS UL TE i sis ov xo xz xa xe XO xz x4 XE PL TNT gt pav xi x3 x5 xz a xa X6 x77 17 Sok CERE vo va Ya ve Yo 2L va ve gt V3 FX2N 48ET ESS UL 1 sspov xo X2 X4 Xe Xo X2 4 X6 XO X2 X4 X6 C NT pv xt x3 x6 X7 X1 x3 x6 x xi x3 X X7 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO FX2N 48ET ESS UL vo va va vel vo v2 Tv4 ve vo 2 Ya ve va vo va Yapvi ve vzFva Y YSEV3 YS v7 Y1 YS YS YT ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 213 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER 15 5 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit gt Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to
41. Main units FX3G 14MLI FX3G 24MO FX3G 60ML1 input output extension blocks FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER Numbers for added input output unit block To an added input output powered extension unit block input numbers and output numbers following the input numbers and output numbers given to the preceding device are assigned The last digit of the assigned numbers must begin with O When the input output powered extension unit is connected to the main unit input output numbers are assigned as follows e n the case of FX3c 14ML n the case of FX3G 24MUO X016 X017 Unused numbers X000 to X007 X010 to X027 X000 to X015 X020 to X037 Input output powered METRE Input output powered extension unit extension unit FX3G 14MT ES FX2N 32ER FX3G 24MT ES FX2N 32ER Main unit Y0OO to YOO5 Y010 to Y027 Y000 to YO11 Y020 to Y037 Y006 Y007 Unused numbers Y012 to YO17 Unused numbers e Inthe case of FX3G 40MO e Inthe case of FX3G 60MO X044 to X047 Unused numbers X000 to X027 X030 to X047 X000 to X043 X050 to X067 Input output powered Input output powered Main unit Main unit FX3G 40MT ES extension unit FX3c 60MT ES extension unit FX2N 32ER FX2N 32ER YOOO to YO17 Y020 to YO37 Y000 to YO27 Y030 to Y047 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y 7 1 2 Example of assigning
42. N 5 Response time The response time of the output relay from when the power is applied to the coil until the output contact is SOR turned on and from when the coil is shut off until the output contact is turned off is approx 10ms 2 6 Output current E At a circuit voltage of 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards a resistance load of 2A per point or an inductive load of 80VA or less 100V AC or 200V AC can be driven 00 gt For the life of the contact for switching an inductive load refer to Subsection 14 4 3 223 When an inductive load is switched connect a diode for commutation or a surge absorber in parallel with u this load zi DC circuit Diode for commutation AC circuit Surge absorber 1 9 Jg 7 Open circuit leakage current Because there is no leakage current even while output contacts are OFF the neon ball etc can be driven directly 3 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 153 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 3 External wiring precautions 154 1 Protection circuit for load short circuiting A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output 2 Contact protection circuit
43. One of the following problems may have occurred e Check the supply voltage Power of the specified voltage and currentis After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re apply Flashing not being supplied to the power supply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If no terminal improvement is obtained consult your local Mitsubishi Electric External wiring is incorrect distributer Internal error of PLC Ifthe power is not off check the power supply and the power supply route If power is being supplied correctly consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer e After disconnecting the cables other than the power cable re apply power to the PLC and check for changes in the state If no improvement is obtained consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer One of the following problems may have occurred The power supply is off Off External wiring is incorrect Power of the specified voltage is not being supplied to the power supply terminal The power cable is broken 14 5 2 ALM LED on off This LED is valid when the optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected using a parameter State of LED State of PLC Remedies On The battery voltage is low Immediately replace the battery Refer to Section 22 5 Off The battery voltage is higher than the value set with D8006 Ron For details on the battery refer to Chapter 22 189 SJojunoo mm peedg
44. The FX3G 24MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Remove the top cover A in the right figure and peripheral device connector cover B in the right figure from the front face of the main unit Attach the provided side cover C in the right figure as shown in the right figure Connect the connector conversion adapter to the pt option connector D in the right figure as shown in the right figure and fix it with provided M3 tapping screws E in the right figure Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem A YY TH lA ml A 4 LA HU Fix the connector conversion adapter F in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws E in the right figure to the main unit Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem WCA SR ue S 7 N U N NOS o AS 108 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 2 This paragraph explains how to connect the connector conversion adapter to the main unit The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example amp m Remove the top cover A in the right figure and peripheral device connector cover B in the right 2 figure from the front face of the main unit SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee zum Connect the connector conversion adapter to the option connector C in the right figure as shown in
45. after May 1st 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 2003 Standard EN50081 2 1993 Electromagnetic compatibility EN61000 6 4 2001 Generic emission standard Industrial environment EN50082 2 1995 Electromagnetic compatibility Generic immunity standard Industrial environment EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests EN61131 2 2003 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests Remark Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard e Radiated Emissions Mains Terminal Voltage Emissions Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard e RF immunity e Fast Transients ESD e Conducted Power magnetic fields Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard e RF Immunity e Fast Transients ESD e Damped oscillatory wave Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EMI e Radiated Emissions e Conducted Emissions EMS e Radiated electromagnetic field e Fast transient burst Electrostatic discharge e High energy surge e Voltage drops and interruptions e Conducted RF Power frequency magnetic field 15 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive 16 The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical const
46. gt Treatment using bar terminal with insulating sleeve 0 36 It may be difficult to insert the electric wire into the insulating sleeve e Bar terminal with insulating sleeve depending on the thickness of the electric wire sheath Select the Insulating sleeve Contact area electric wire referring to the outline drawing Crimp area Manufacturer Caulking tool E CRIMPFOX ZA 3 8mm Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX UD 6 Dm 0 32 bt 14mm 0 56 Tool Fortightening the terminal use a commercially available small screwdriver having a straight form that is not widened toward the end as shown right With straight tip 0 4mm 2 5mm Caution 0 02 A ar 0 1 If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm 0 98 Manufacturer Model names Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4 x 2 5 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 3 Grounding 93 Grounding UONINPOJJU Ground the PLC as stated below Perform class D grounding Grounding resistance 100 or less e Ground the PLC independently if possible If it cannot be grounded independently ground it jointly as shown below N Sn 9 PLC 5 3 n T BS oa Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Bes
47. settina 7 S3 PIS E CO gt aS eme e 97 Leave this unchecked 5 o ye a o o Default Check End Cancel BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 55 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 5 Cautions on write during RUN In FX3G PLCs write during RUN program changes in the RUN mode is enabled using the following programming tools gt For the operating procedure of and cautions on write during RUN refer to the manual of the used programming tool Programming tools supporting write during RUN Programming tool Remarks Ver 2 00A or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2N PLCs Ver 1 00 or later Ver 5 00A or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX1N PLCs Ver 1 00 or later GX Developer a TS Ver 8 72A or later upports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3G PLCs Ver 1 00 or later Ver 8 78G or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX3G PLCs Ver 1 10 or later Ver 2 00 or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2N PLCs Ver 1 00 or later FX PCS WIN l Vera DO or later upports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX1N PLCs Ver 1 00 or later Ver 2
48. suoneooods I al ues C uoneJn6ijuo N SON JUN SON jndinondu 5 n ye 2 D z o gt ue uoneJedald Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS C AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 O or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tight
49. 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose ON 1 2 OFF status is to be changed O Refer to Subsection 19 6 2 for monitor function operation B 2 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test 13 mode The device then begins blinking refer to figure at right SS To cancel the operation and return to the test subject selection 22 screen press ESC aa I 3 Use the buttons to move the blinking position to the device where a forced ON OFF is desired 258 zl To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press o p 62 m ESC tT Button Operation Description a ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the monitor screen 4 5 Moves in the lower device No direction for forced ON OFF subject selection m Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling E S D Moves in the higher device No direction for forced ON OFF subject S aS selection a Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling s 4 Press the OK button to highlight the contact s ON OFF status Return to the monitor screen press ESC Button Operation Description syoo g UOISU9 X3 indinoandu C ESC Returns to the monitor screen Moves in the lower device No direction for forced ON OFF subject selection Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling m Moves in the higher device No direction for f
50. 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Terminal resistor 2 resistors for standard cable 2 resistors for high performance cable Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screw for power supply terminal M3 5 screw for signal terminal The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 270 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 13 FX2N 32CCL oz 3d 8 External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches O 2 c o p ES FX2N 32CCL mo LO y O POWER vc LRUN LERR RD SD co D Q W 3 0000 00 5 3 13 E E e ca 0 ee wn D 6 MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs I e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws EE omo Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product c 2 x ops Terminal block M3 screws 32 or D The extension cable is already connected to the extension block amp 18 1 14 FX3u 64CCL IT1 U x O5 o c 53 oc 2 5 O External Dimensions Terminal Layout Sos cs 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 5 16 B Um Es 338 ae OBO LD LO cC Tc UE c3 e 2 S Q S O 0 E O 2 O E N Lu d rr oF 4 0 16 9 0 36
51. 10 uonejesu OO 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald FX n 16EX 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 ram Buum indu CO p 85 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks 7 2 1 Concept of assigning When power is turned on the main unit CPU automatically assigns the numbers 0 to 7 to special function blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit Unit numbers are not given to input output powered extension units blocks Special function blocks connected to main unit The numbers 0 to 7 are assigned to the special function blocks starting from the one closest to the main unit Products to which unit numbers are not assigned e Input output powered extension units FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ET etc e Input output extension blocks FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EYR etc Connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP FX2N CNV BC Expansion boards FX3G 232 BD etc Special adapters FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 4AD ADP etc Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 7 2 2 Example of assigning 86 Unit numbers are assigned to the special function blocks i
52. 2 yoojg euw CO 233 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 16 4 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EX ES UL With cover Without cover FX2N 8EX ES Rear line extension connector CD POWER PU Input indicator lamps LED lamps E A EL eae Sires El Elvas were e FX2N 16EX ES UL When an input X number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers With cover Without cover Input indicator E EZ 8 lamps aa LED lamps E aa e E 5 Rear line x extension Lower connector numbers FXa 16EX 5 Ge nog Input indicator E WE i8 lamps as jo LED lamps ES Higher numbers 234 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 16 4 3 External dimensions FX2N 8EX ES UL 2 04 5 mounting holes FX2N 8EX ES CD POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX2N 16EX ES UL 2 64 5 mounting holes 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch Unit mm inches 87 3 43 Unit mm inches 235 SJojunoo mm peads ybiH Buum ndno IN 10 buum OO
53. 2 Communication speed setting by GX Developer ze The communication speed can be set in the following position 38 Select Online gt Transfer setup gt PC side I F and double click the Serial icon S 3 In programming software not applicable to the FX3G Series Communication is executed at 9 600 or 19 200 bps 4 5 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special 3 adapter S When connecting peripheral equipment programming tool or GOT CPU direct connection by way of the FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD or FX3U 232ADP MB set the connection channel CH1 or CH2 as follows If the connection channel is not specified with the status below communication error may occur in the connected peripheral equipment For details refer to the Data Communication Edition Setto KO the special data register for communication format setting of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment CH1 D8400 or D8120 CH2 8420 Setthe communication parameter PLC system 2 of the channel connecting the peripheral equipment to Not set as shown in the window below jesoydued pue UOISIOA ueisa OD C FX parameter e Q lem a CH1 ES If the box is not checked the parameters will be cleared o Operate when the program is transfered to the communication board parameters and gt communication YD 9120 values in the PLC must be cleard upon program transfer
54. 8 o 139 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 6 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function 10 6 Pulse width Pulse period measurement function Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Four input points in the PLC main unit can be used for the pulse width period measurement function which enables measurement of the pulse width or pulse frequency in units of 10us gt For details on programming refer to the programming manual 10 6 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers Pulse width Pulse period Ring counter value for Ring counter value for Pulse width Input number Pulse period measurement rising edge falling edge Pulse period 2 measurement flag mode in units of 1 6us in units of 1 6us in units of 10us X000 M8076 M80800 D8075 D8074 D8074 D8077 D8076 D8076 D8079 D8078 X001 M8077 sr ae D8080 a D8082 D8085 D8084 X003 M8078 HU HU D8087 D8086 D8089 D8088 D8091 D8090 X004 M8079 M8083 D8093 D8092 D8095 D8094 D8097 D8096 1 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 2 The pulse width which can be measured is a minimum of 10u s and a maximum of 100s The pulse period which can be measured is a minimum of 20us 10 6 2 Cautions for pulse width period measurement function 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 X001 X003 and X004 can be used for high speed counter input interruption p
55. 8 6 5 Connecting method D connection of powered extension units blocks to main unit The procedures for connecting an powered extension unit block to the main unit are explained below Remove the extension device connector cover A in the right figure on the right side of the main unit Connect the extension cable B in the right figure from the extension block to be con nected right side to the extension device connector of the main unit e When connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension unit or FX3U 1PSU 5V connect the unit to be added right side and the existing unit main unit with the supplied extension cable Fit the extension device connector cover A in the right figure 110 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 6 Connecting method E connection of powered extension units blocks This subsection explains the procedures for connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension units z blocks or FX2N FX3U Series special function blocks Remove the top cover B in the right figure 2 of the existing unit block left side A in the RUE SE right figure u C 53 When connecting FX3u 1PSU 5V remove the top cover of p c o5 FX3U 1PSU 5V AS A SS SS 3 SS NS ag SES i gg ES S8 Connect the extension cable C in the above figure of the block
56. A Remove the tapping screws B in the right figure which fix the memory cassette Proceed to the step 3 when the memory cassette is not fixed with tapping screws Grasp the detachment lever and pull it Grasp the detachment lever D and pull it vertically to remove the memory cassette Attach the upper connector cover E in the right figure Fix the expansion board with the tapping screws F in the right figure provided for fixing the memory cassette Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3 x 8 shorter screws Do not use M3 x 16 longer screws removed in the step 2 because they may damage the main unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 5 Saved Data Content 21 5 Saved Data Content The following data is saved on the memory cassette Memory capacity setting 2 Memory capacity default setting 8k steps 2k 4k 8k 16k 32k steps Comment capacity apeg IN Parameters i File register capacity Modem initializing settings Battery mode settings RUN terminal settings RS RS2 instructions computer link function communication settings Program Positioning settings Memory Sequence programs User created sequence programs Max 3150 points Comments 0 to 63 blocks 1 block 50 points 500 steps Max 7000 points Programming tool a Comments and file
57. Ambient temperature C 22 4 2 Reading the date of manufacture How to read the battery lot number reference Nameplate Model name Connector LOT 4 4 Year Example 2004 L Month Example Apr Last digit of calendar 1 to 9 Jan to Sept year X Oct Y Nov Z Dec 22 4 3 Special battery low voltage device notification program example Prepare a system which allows constant external monitoring of the battery status using an indicator lamp etc M8005 M8005 O Y001 is output when a battery low voltage condition occurs Batt ery low voltage e M8006 Battery low voltage is latched e D8005 Battery voltage can be monitored 361 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 22 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 5 Battery Replacement 22 5 Battery Replacement Before replacing the battery Step 4 of the replacement procedure below must be performed within 20 seconds after step 3 or the memory content could be lost The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Turn the power OFF Remove the top cover A in the right figure When the expansion board connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette remove it Remove the old battery Extract the old battery from the battery holder B and disconnect the battery connector C Install the new battery gt For the installation procedure refer to Subsection 22 3 1 Attach the
58. An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Display module peripheral devices expansion boards and special adapters Connector conversion adapter extension blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS 19 1 Specifications 19 1 1 Applicable PLC Model name FX3G Series Applicability Ver 1 10 or later 19 1 2 Display switch specifications Item Specifications Display device Backlight STN monochrome liquid crystal display Green LED backlight Number of letters 16 letters half width character x 4 lines Displaed letters Alphabets Numbers Japanese character Language for menu display English Japanese Button 4 operation buttons OK ESC and 281 SJojunoo mm peads ybiH Buum mano N dh 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jndnoandu C yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 62 pel D lt O 2 e D N y
59. Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 suondo pue sun gt uoisuex3 sayo OO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 18 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display 19 18 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format The procedure for specifying a hexadecimal display format for current values which display at the Monitor Test menu explained below The display format is specified by the system information s system signal 2 MO O 8 ON OFF status The display formats which correspond to the ON and OFF statuses are shown in Section 19 13 below The display format should either be fixed as decimal or hexadecimal Switching between the two should be possible by an external operation Refer to Section 19 13 for system information setting 19 18 1 System information specifying a hexadecimal current value display format 1 System signal 1 System signal 1 is unrelated to this function 2 System signal 2 System Setting Display Information Content BD EU SU acres Timer T current value setting value counter C current value setting value data MA A 8 register D 16 bit 32 bit extended register R 16 bit 32 bit and extended file regis
60. Fitted to FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL and FX2N 48ER NS Accessories space 2 Extension cable 55mm 2 16 Optional extension cables FXON 30EC and FXON 65EC are available e input output number label 1 8 The terminal block uses M3 terminal screws Others Installation of the DIN46277 35mm 1 37 wide rail or screws suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 205 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 2 Power supply specifications 15 2 2 Part names 1 Front 1 Top cover 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 206 Top cover DIN rail mounting hooks 2 places Model name Input display LEDs red Terminal block covers Extension device connecting connector cover POWER LED green Output display LEDs red 4 Input display LEDs 5 Terminal block covers MITSUBISHI 29520254 e 6 Extension device connecting ep connector cover MELSECFXa 48ER 7 POWER LED h 2 DIN rail mounting hooks 3 8 Output display LEDs 3 Model name When adding this to the main unit connect the supplied extension cable or the optional extension cable to the connector under this top cover The input output powered extension unit can be installed on DIN rail 35mm 1 38 wide The model name of
61. Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ ON input Input ON current 3 5mA or more at 24V DC sensitivity current Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input Input signal form NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Sink input wiring Main unit Input circuit diagram 236 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C 16 5 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement Oz e gt 3 8 FX2N 8EX 2 With cover Without cover 4 2 O E FX2N 8EX POWER In ut Rear line eee uia extension a 5585 amps connector LED lamps 1 3 o E oe ee s I 358 SS c soe ob gt E FX2N 16EX 15 When an input X number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower input numbers mo and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher input numbers S 3 eae c With cover Without cover 2 Input indicator lamps LED lamps X eX IX 3 YX 2X OX Rear line extension connector FXa 16EX Input indicator lamps LED lamps IX LSX TEX LIX 0x XT OX S z 00000000 17 yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 4X Sx ex IX
62. MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction 20 9 1 Specifications Item Triac output input output l y i V AV U circuitry 0 015 CN1 connector o d pr CO sido Photo thyristor External wiring Load voltage 85 to 242V AC The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following Resistance M load 0 3A point value iun 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less oa Inductive 15VA 100V AC load 36VA 200V AC Min load 0 4VA 100V AC 1 6 VA 200V AC Open circuit 1mA 100V AC 346 leakage current 2mA 200V AC E Response time 2ms or less Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation Operation Activation of the photo thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel indicators Power 2 7W 112mA 24V DC consumption 1 In systems where frequent large load ON OFF switching occurs due to rush currents the root mean square current should be 0 2 A or less Example 0 4A 4 x 0 02 0 42 x 0 7 Y Maius MR a E HS 0 02 0 7 10 0 02 0 7 10 Sec Sec Sec 2 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 9 FX 16EYS TB 20 9 2 Internal circuit oz s7 TY o D 2 F A 3 3kQ gu r d paa 5 1 2 Photo O Photo J thyristor E thyristor 1 S 3 3 3kO i4 3 3kQ Photo al
63. S E a o uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 4 Program example2 when monitoring consecutive timers using operation keys In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to timer T The operation keys and in the display module are available to scroll device numbers TO to T10 during monitoring In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 M8002 l System information system No 1 is 83005 Set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse l l l System information system No 2 is poo set at M50 to M64 Sets the device type to Timer Resets the device number D51 Specified device monitor screen button ON displayed M56 M55 M59 eM NCP Specified device The timer number is scrolled using monitor screen the or button while the button ON displayed specified device monitor screen is M55 M56 M59 displayed AMA DECP E eese se numver is spec The device number is specified within the allowable range END E FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardw
64. This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an input output powered extension unit Remove the top cover A in the right figure on the left side of the input output powered extension unit Connect the connector of the provided extension cable B in the right figure to the extension connector of the unit block on the upstream side left side Connect the connector of the extension cable supplied B in the right figure to the extension connector of the input output powered extension unit to be added Fit the top cover A in the right figure Connecting method H connection of extension block to input output powered extension unit 112 This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an extension block to an input output powered extension unit Remove the extension connector cover A in the right figure on the right side of the input output powered extension unit NA V Connect the extension cable B in the right figure from the extension block to be added right side to the extension connector of the input output powered extension unit NN SSSSNSNSS MAUL e When connecting FX3U 1PSU 5V read input output powered extension unit as the unit When connecting FX2N Series input output powered extension unit FX3U 1PSU 5V connect the unit to be added right side and the existing unit main unit with the supplied extension cable or the optional extension cabl
65. YOO1 Positioning instruction M 8400 B activation M 8401 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send wait flag 4 M 8359 DEED UIS OU PESO COPS M 8402 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send request D8402 YOO2 Pulse output monitor M 8360 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 ON BUSY OFF READY M 8403 Receie completenida D8403 Y 002 Clear signal output function M 8361 Ah ig utput functi IMIB404 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 i Carrier detection flag YOO2 Zero return direction Data set ready DSR flag M 8363 YOO2 Forward limit MI8406 M 8364 YOO2 Reverse limit M 8407 Noticed M 8365 Y002 DOG signal logic reverse M 8408 YOO2 Zero point signal logic M 8366 1 e M 8409 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 i Time out check flag VBG 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when M 8368 Y002 Positioning instruction RS2 instruction ch1 is OFF activation M 8369 Y002 Pulse output stop command 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 368 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 SS Number and Correspond d 3 Operation and function ing special name D device RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 M18410 o M18420 Notused 2 M 8421 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send wait flag 22 UJ M 8422 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send request D8422 lt i RS2 FNC 87 ch2 1 M 8423 Receive complete flag ES RS2 FNC 87 ch2 passes Carrier dete
66. Yo vz va ve volv2 TY4 ve _ cov Y1 v3 oou vs v7 pone v7 Y3 cons vs v7 ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 221 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA 1 UL 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 15 8 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit gt Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications 100V AC Input Item FX2N 48ER UA1 UL Input points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form AC input Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC 10 15 50 60 Hz 4 7 mA 100V AC 50 Hz 70 or less when turned on simultaneously 6 2 mA 110V AC 60 Hz 70 or less when turned on simultaneously Approx 21 kQ 50 Hz Approx 18 kQ 60 Hz Input response Input ON current 3 8mA or more 80V AC time Input OFF current 1 7mA or less 30V AC Input signal current Input impedance Input response time Approx 25 to 30ms Input signal form Contact input Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on pa
67. adapter BD1 ETE Communication special adapter Only either one between the communication expansion board and the special communication adapter which requires the connector conversion adapter can be used 2 In the case of main unit 14 24 point type Ch1 is assigned to the communication expansion board FX3G 8AV BD included connected to the BD connector or the special communication adapter connected to the connector conversion adapter i Main unit i 14 24 point type BD connector h1 ch1 Connector Communication conversion expansion adapter BD board BD Communication special adapter Only either one between the communication expansion board FX3G 8AV BD included and the special communication adapter which requires the connector conversion adapter can be used 88 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 4 Station No Label of Expansion Board FX3G 485 BD 7 4 Station No Label of Expansion Board FX3G 485 BD UONINPOJJU The station No label is packed together with the FX3G 485 BD Place it in a position where it can be seen easily for simple reference as shown in the figure below N VY IT RRBINIL Network Station No JY818D63001A SOWeN ed pue sanjea OO MITSUBISHI zi Station 8 S 8 4 Co al UU when the memory cassette when the memory cassette 38 a is not us
68. c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 313 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 6 Monitor operation on specified device monitor screen The monitor operation on the specified device monitor screen is common for all devices It is not possible to monitor extension file registers ER and DER file registers D and index registers V and Z gt Refer to Subsection 19 14 5 for a display example of the specified device monitor screen Refer to Section 19 18 for the procedure used to display the timer counter and data register current values as hexadecimal values 1 Press the ESC button to return to the menu screen D1000 32767 Specified Selected Device Type Operation Description ESC Returns to the menu screen Disabled All devices except Disabled OK Disabled 19 14 7 Specified device monitor screen for monitoring Refer to Section 19 18 for the procedure used to display the current values as hexadecimal values 1 Data register D 16 bit extended register R 16 bit D1000 32767 Specified 2 Data register DD 32 bit extended register DR 32 bit D1001 1000 File register D 32767 The file register D current value cannot be directly monitored at the display module Specified 3 Timer T TN 0 1000 Specified 4 Counter C CO to C199 C 0 C
69. device Operation and function When M8030 set to ON LED on PLC is not lit even if low battery voltage is detected If this special auxiliary relay is activated the ON OFF image memory of Y M S T and C and present values of T C D special data registers and R are cleared to zero However file registers D in program memory and extension file registers ER in the memory cassette are not cleared When PLC is switched from RUN to STOP image memory and data memory are retained All external output contacts of PLC are turned OFF Refer to Programming Manual for details D8176 to D8180 Communication parameter setting flag for N N network setting When M8039 is ON PLC waits until scan time specified in D8039 and then executes cyclic operation D8039 To Executed at END instruction Step Ladder and Annunciator M 8040 Transfer disable M 80441 2 Transfer start M 8042 Start pulse M 8043 2 Zero return complete M 8044 2 Zero point condition M 8045 All output reset disable M 8046 STL state ON M 8047 STL monitoring enable M 8048 Annunciator operate M 8049 Annunciator enable While M8040 is turned ON transfer between states is disabled Transfer from initial state is enabled in automatic operation mode Pulse output is given in response to a start input Set this in the last state of zero return mode Set this when machin
70. o cococccoccncnccocncccncnnonnnonnnncnonnnonanncnnnnononenonanos 16 Caution for compliance with EC Directive oocccccccncccccnccocncccnnnccnnnnnncnononnnonnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnencnonnnos 17 1 Introduction 18 1 1 Introduction Kol UII TEE T T 18 1 1 1 Classification of major components in this manual ssseseeseeeene 18 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual c ccoonnnncccccccnnccnncnnncnnnnnncnnnncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnos 20 VAS LEiSEOP MAN Sa rae Oe cee a 21 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals c ccccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeesaeaeeeesaees 25 2 Features and Part Names 27 2 1 A a nose ad ctetu Mrs eA ere Mete eer Tere ee eee 2f 2 2 Names and Functions of PartS oocccocnccccncccncccnconcncncncnncnnnononnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnncnnrnnnnnennrnninaninos 29 22271 BOIL Palelus idi atu IU A aped 29 RS DM M IDE PIE LR M LL UM MALE s 31 3 Introduction of Products 32 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model NaMes cooocccccccnccncoccconcncnoncnnnconcnconnnnncncnncnonanonanonos 32 A O ATUM Di RT er 33 3 1 2 Input output powered extension units oooccccccncncccccncococononocononancnnonncnnonanononnnnnnnnanononancnenencnnnnnnos 34 3 1 3 Input output extension DIOCKS coni ot ertt ERU tt 35 31 4 Special tuncion bloCKS s o obedientie eld od dea Soit Ones locu uiae uos ieee Da L o ur a OR We eus patet 36 S TO DISHA MOA E AAA
71. oD Dn SiS TE EN 090 2 5 O O S d Q Iu ea O c gt Oo 2 oO Ooc 2 3 s a op 17 yu jddns Jamog UOISU9 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 229 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 16 3 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8ER Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8ER MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other e Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 8ER Input points 4 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Input form Sink Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input imp
72. position 4 Only the BD2 1st position and the BD2 2nd position can be used for connection Only one display module can be connected to the main unit 5 The display module cannot be connected when the memory cassette is connected to the BD2 1st position e n the case of the main units 14 24 point type 7 Main unit 28 2nd position 8 BD ge BD s 1st position 1st position Front panel Side Available connection position BD 1st position BD 2nd position uonejesu OO Model name Expansion board Connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP Memory cassette y Ses Display module j gU E EI 1 Can be connected in either position only one device can be at one time EE 2 The memory cassette cannot be connected when the display module is connected to the BD 1st 10 position d 3 The display module cannot be connected when the memory cassette is connected to the BD 1st 2 position 63 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Rules of System Configuration 6 2 Rules of System Configuration The system configuration must meet the following four requirements Number of input output points The total number of input and output points should be 256 or less in the whole system gt For details refer to 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points Number of input output point
73. presens comedo 9 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points syy 25 3 oa 10 E 3 35 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 4 Special function blocks For details of each product refer to the product manual 1 Analog control D pa Model name Description SA Analog input FX3U 4AD 4h of Voltage current input FX2N 2AD NES Voltage current input FX2N 4AD eh Voltage current input FX2N 8AD 8h Voltage current temperature thermocouple input FX2N 4AD PT 4h Platinum resistance thermometer sensor input FX2N 4AD TC ME Temperature thermocouple input Analog output FX3U 4DA 4ch Voltage current output FX2N 2DA p 2ch Voltage current output FX2N 4DA o4 Voltage current output Analog input output mixed FX2N 5A 4ch 1ch Voltage current input output Temperature control FX2N 2LC 2lops Temperature control resistance thermometer sensor thermocouple 2 Data link functions Model name Description Master for CC Link FX2N 16CCL M Connectable stations Remote I O station 4 stations Remote device station 8 stations Intelligent device station for CC Link EHE 1 to 4 stations occupied FX2N 32CCL Remote device station for CC Link 1 to 4 stations occupied FX2N 64CL M Master for CC Link LT 3 1 5 Display module
74. the interrupt program will not gt be processed until El FNC 04 permits the interrupts Timer interrupt I6OO disable M8057 Timer interrupt 1700 disable M8058 Timer interrupt BOO disable 4 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Error Detection M 8060 I O configuration error D8060 M 8061 PLC hardware error D8061 M 8062 Serial communication error ch0 D8062 noni Serial communication error 1 D8063 M ch1 M8064 58068 D8065 D8069 M 8065 Syntax error D8314 D8315 D8066 D8069 M 8066 Ladder error D8314 D8315 D8067 D8069 T M 8067 Operation error D8314 D8315 D8068 M 8068 Operation error latch D8312 D8313 M 8069 8 I O bus check 5 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON 6 Serial communication error 2 ch2 PLC is detected by M8438 f Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 8 When M8069 is ON I O bus check is executed FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M851 1 Number and name Operation and function Parallel Link Parallel link Set M8070 when using master station M 8070 Parallel link Set M8071 when using slave station M 8071 Parallel link MIEL ON when operating Parallel link M 8073 ON when M8070 or M8071 setting is incorrect Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Pulse widt
75. uonejesu OO Bui jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 3 Assignment of Communication Channels 7 3 Assignment of Communication Channels 7 3 1 Assignment of communication channels When the communication expansion board or special communication adapter is used the main unit CPU automatically assigns communication channels at the time of power ON The number of available communication channels varies depending on the main unit type Main unit 40 60 point type Max 2ch Main unit 14 24 point type Max 1ch 1 In the case of main unit 40 60 point type Ch1 is assigned to the communication expansion board connected to the BD1 connector or the first special communication adapter connected to the connector conversion adapter Ch2 is assigned to the communication expansion board FX3G 8AV BD included connected to the BD2 connector or the second special communication adapter connected to the connector conversion adapter Only between the communication expansion board FX3G 8AV BD included and the special communication adapter which requires the connector conversion adapter can be used Main unit 40 60 point type ch1 Communication expansion board FX3G 8AV BD included COBNSSEE conversion Communication special adapter Communication
76. 00 or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX2N PLCs Ver 1 00 or later FX PCS WIN E Ver 3 00 or later Supports write during RUN in the instruction and device ranges in FX1N PLCs Ver 1 00 or later Cautions on write during RUN Item Caution Program memories which can be written in RUN mode Number of GX Developer 256 steps or less after edition addition deletion including NOP program steps Ver 8 72A or later immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit which canbe e GX Developer written for Ver 8 70Y or 127 steps or less after edition addition deletion including NOP circuit change former immediately after circuit blocks except final circuit in RUN mode FX PCS WIN E Built in EEPROM and optional memory cassette whose write protect switch is set to OFF Circuit blocks in which labels P and I are added deleted or changed in edited circuits eo Circuit blocks in which 1 ms timers T246 to T249 and T256 to T319 are added in edited circuits Circuit blocks which cannot be written in RUN mode Circuit blocks in which the following instructions are included in edited circuits Instruction to output high speed counters C235 to C255 OUT instruction TBL FNC152 instruction 56 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability Item Circuit blocks
77. 1 Installing methods The PLC can be installed by the following two methods 1 Installing on DIN rail he PLC can be installed on a DINA6277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide he PLC can be easily moved and removed he PLC is installed higher by the height of the DIN rail For details on the procedures on mounting and removing the DIN rail refer to Section 8 4 2 Direct installing with screws The PLC can be installed directly in the enclosure with M4 screws For the mounting hole pitch refer to Section 8 5 8 3 2 Cautions in examining installing method Refer to Section 8 2 1 Cautions when FX2N 8AD is used When the system is laid out in two stages do not mount FX2N 8AD at the top of the second stage or FX2N CNV BC cannot be installed directly 8 3 3 Examples of installation 1 Example of installation on DIN rail 1 a enn 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 FX3G Series FX2N FX2N 16EX 16EYT main unit DIN rail o 2m aue 047 04 to 0 08 Extension Eus FXoN 65E FX2N CNV BC FXON 30EC FX2N FX2N DIN rail 16EX 64CL M r indicates an M4 screw 1 FX2N CNV BC can be installed directly in the enclosure but cannot be installed on the DIN rail 96 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure 2 Example of direct installation 1 to 2mm 0 04 to 0 08 FX3G Series main unit
78. 123 kinds 2 a Standard mode 0 21us instruction S Basic instructions o Processing Extension mode 0 42us instruction speed 3 Aplica instructions Standard mode DOHSIRSEUCHOR 5 Extension mode 1 2us instruction m D 1 Extension combined i28 pointsarless o d number of input points 3 Total points 1 2 lt 3 total number of pointsis amp gt ev 2 Extension combined 128 or less a 128 points or less Number of input umber of output points output points 4 Remote I O number of points CC Link 128 points or less 6 3 dS fete nD ee 256 points or less oe points a Q Input output Input relay X000 to X177 5 3 The device numbers are octal relay Output relay Y000 to Y177 S EEPROM keep M384 to M1535 1152 points M1536 to M7679 6144 points i 0 01 to 327 67 sec 1ms accumulating type e on delay EEPROM keep T246 to T249 0 001 to 32 767 sec 100ms accumulating type E EEPROM keep T250 to T255 6 points 0 1 to 3 276 7 sec Coo ss points 0 01 to 327 67 sec Auxiliary relay SON Iluf SON uonejesu OO yndjngandu Available as analog timers 32 Variable analog potentiometers VR1 D8030 P nD VR2 D8031 o o IUD CO to C15 16 points Counting from O to 32 767 a For general Counter TET 1 0 its up EEPROM keep C16 to C199 184 points Counting from 0 to 32 767 O Q 47 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External
79. 15 mounting hole pitch FX 16EYT C OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 40 1 58 How to connect connector FX2N 16EYT C Connection face of connector The polarity is shown in the following table A o9 419 511 20118 16 14 12 20 8 4614414211 Side B is for the higher input numbers and side A is for the lower input numbers Exe Side B X050 to X057 Side A X040 to X047 Side B gt OM Y7 Vo V5 V4 v3 v2 YT YO Side A _ coMLY7 Ye Ys YA v3 YZ Y YO 257 SJojunoo mm peedg uDi e Buum mano N 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I zm oD Dn SiS X EN 090 2 5 O O S d Q mM US Aou O c 2opc 2 oO Ooc 2 3 S a op 17 yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 12 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output 16 12 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output 16 12 1 Product specifications 258 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications gt Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Item Product type Rated voltage Item MASS Weight Other Item Output Points Connection type Output unit type External power supply Output circuit insulation Indication of ou
80. 156 instructions D 8464 M8464 D 8465 M8465 YOO1 Clear signal device specification DSZR FNC150 and ZRN FNC 156 instructions YOO2 Clear signal device specification 2 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON D 8466 M8466 375 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN 22 m E 0008a 0008W sr uononJjsu WwW seoi eq jeroeds FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 When analog expansion boards are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance with the position of connected analog special adapters Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column gt For details refer to the Analog Control Edition Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8279 Operation and function Number FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD Combate Ver 1 10 or later Ver 1 10 or later Versions 1st expansion board M 8260 Output mode switching M 8261 Not used M 8262 Not used M 8263 Not used M 8264 Output hold mode M 8265 Not used M 8266 Not used M 8267 Not used M 8268 Not used M 8269 Not used 2nd expansion board M 8270 Input mode switching Ch1 Output mode switching M 8271 Input mode switching Ch2 Not used M 8272 No
81. 4 Output Specifications ccoocinciinncoba ii seendebadenedseacbeedeaadsacdea 45 2441 REV OU AA A a 45 44 2 Transistor OM DU cs la is 46 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 4 5 Performance Specifications ccoooccccocnccccnnccocnnocnnnnonononnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnos 47 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories InstallatiON oooccccoonccccooocnnconononcnnanoncononcnnnnnos 49 AO MOITDL UNAS a E AAA A ean rud d Uus 49 e NE ay OU a 50 4 7 1 Interpretation of terminal block layoUt ooooocccccconconccnnoconcnnnncnnnononnnonnonnncnnnnnnrnnnnononrnnnonnnnnnnnnnos 50 Ad PRAGA Vi 50 ASS EA LA a io 50 ATA FX A eee ane ee cee ee 51 AS ERAS OO a a HEP 51 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 52 S EB Version os AAA ODE 52 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial number check Method oocccccccnnccoccnccoccncconcncnocnnnnnnnnonononononnnononenenonenenonos 52 91 2 WersiON Ceci Metodo dal 53 5 1 3 Version upgrade MIST Vicio 53 52 Programming T OOMAD DIICADIICY erra a e vat 54 5 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tOOI occccocccccocnciconncnconncnconcnnonnnnnononononnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnos 54 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable ooocccccooocnncccnnncnnnonnnconnnnnonnnnnos 54 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programmin
82. 422 converter 3m Half pitch 14 pin lt gt D SUB 25Pin PARE 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter D SUB 9Pin lt gt D SUB 9Pin F2 232CAB 1 E ES SIS ES FX 232CAB 1 3M For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter FX3G 232 BD SALE FX3U 232ADP MB Half pitch 14 pin lt gt D SUB 9Pin Fx 232CAB 2 F5 sa nm For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter FX3G 232 BD ee FX3U 232ADP MB RS 422 cable D SUB 25Pin MINI DIN 8Pin FX A22CABO 2 For connection between RS 232C RS 422 converter and FX3G programming port RS 422 FX3G 422 BD 1 5m MINI DIN 8Pin lt gt MINI DIN 8Pin a OABQ El 4 11 For connection between FX 30P and FX3G programming port RS 422 FX3G 422 BD 1 The following USB cables are applicable Model name Description MR J3USBCBL3M USB cable 3m 9 10 GT09 C30USB 5P USB cable to transfer personal computer data USB A plug 3m 9 10 3 2 3 Converters and interface Model name Description RS 232C RS 422 Converters RS 232C RS 422 converter high speed type Communication speed Applicable to 9 600 to 115 200 bps FX 232AW RS 232C RS 422 converters FX 232AWC Communication speed Applicable to 9 600 19 200 bps FX 232AWC H 1 When the programming software is not applicable to FX3G the converter is applicable only to 9 600 or 19 200 bps 40 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of
83. 5 gs M To D8030 The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of the timer TO SE il The setting range in this example using TO 100ms timer is from 0 to e ge 25 5 sec S 5 2 Use example 2 of variable analog potentiometer 16 The current value of VR2 multiplied by 10 is used as the set value of a timer mm BOO M8000 SS MUL D8031 K10 DO The value of D8031 is multiplied by 10 and stored in DO T B eee eae eases The current value of VR2 multiplied by 10 is used as the 1 i set value of the timer T1 NR The setting range in this example using T1 100ms timer 3 1 is from 0 to 255 sec E 2 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 185 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection This PLC does not incorporate consumable parts that are factors in the reduction of service life However the output relays points of contact and batteries option have a limited life expectancy 14 4 1 Procedures for checking model name The model name of the main unit can be checked on the nameplate on the right side After extension devices are connected the nameplate cannot be seen Check the model name in the following places When the top cover is re
84. 5 minutes Use this program as a reference when other time settings are specified In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 D8300 1 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse N Z D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 a MOV D53 Sets the screen save time 5 minutes 316 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function The display screen protect function prevents accidental operation by restricting the display module functions The display screen protect function is enabled when no keyword is registered The display screen protect function s protection level is specified in the system information system signal 1 DO O 3 Refer to Section 19 3 for display module function Refer to Subsection 19 11 5 for the keyword cancel procedure Refer to Section 19 13 for system information setting 19 16 1 System information display screen protect function 1 System signal 1 S Siam Setting dme Content Function Restriction Summary Information Level All functions except the top screen time display and top screen specified device monitor functions are disabled DO0 3 The following functions are disabled monitor test s test function contrast setting time cha
85. 5mA 24V DC 2 8 Input impedance 4 3 KQ E Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less mps A O Input response time Approx 10ms S S L Q0 No voltage contact input ses Input signal form Sink NPN open collector transistor s a Source PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation ma Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Sink input wiring Source input wiring syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N Input circuit diagram yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 211 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL 212 3 Output specifications transistor output type Item FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL Output Points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit type Transistor source output External power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5A point 0 5A point The total load current per common terminal The total load current per common terminal should be the following value Resistance load should be the following valu
86. 91 When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits 327 Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions e Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions Connect the memory cassette and expansion board board securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions e Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and the FX Series terminal block Battery and memory cassette Connect the memory cassette securely to the appropriate connector Loose connections may cause malfunctions Installing the cassette in a raised or tilted posture can also cause malfunctions 3 WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Reference Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Make sure to cut off all phases of
87. A tates E tu ba s tal cU 36 3 1 0 EXPANSION DOA GS canoa caia A 36 3 1 7 Connector conversion adapter coooncncccoccnccccconcconcncnoncncnoncncnnnnnnononcnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnnonenonnnnnnns 36 9129 Special AUADICIS Secs caesar ee a dt ler sciri 37 3 1 9 Extension power SUD DIY WIA acs i tens A ARA AAA AA AA 37 3 1 10 Extension cables and connector conversion adapter Battery Memory cassettes 37 3 1 11 FX Series terminal blocks cables and connectors cccccocccccccoccconcconcnnnnonnncnnnonnononcononcnnnonnancnnnos 38 A etse Rete o Onn ee oe eis Dei ae Eia M LA eae One qui 38 31 19 POWeT SUDDIV UA xe er a a Les i Oe a LIE 38 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program COMMUNICATION cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeas 39 SA Programming SOOM ERE REESE SEU REM 40 2 2 2 GOMMUNICAION cables aio aded odes ida 40 3 2 3 Converters and Interface cies a deseada 40 3 2 4 The accessing path to the FX3G from CC Link Network occccoooonccccccocccncconocccncononcnonononconnnnnoncnnnos 41 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units 42 4 1 Generic Specifications erminni a i E a e ea a e ia a ainean 42 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance tesSt ocoonnccccncconcccoccnconcnonanonnnnnnononos 43 4 2 POWwer Supply SPECIHCAUONS srian E A 43 4 aput o PEC CAMAS od bases 44 4 3 1 24V DO Input SINK SQUICO nt e la did 44 4
88. AC 50A max 5ms or less 200V AC 24V DC service power 9 400mA supply 9 1 This item shows values when all 24V DC service power supplies are used in the maximum sa configuration connectable to the main unit and includes the input current 7 or 5mA per point 23358 l l l ns 2 When input output extension blocks are connected the 24V DC service power changes the current 59 oO consumed by the point number of the block connected For details on the 24V DC service power supply refer to Subsection 6 5 1 0 3 a 43 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 3 Input Specifications 4 3 Input Specifications The main unit input specifications are explained below 4 3 1 24V DC Input sink source The input numbers in the table indicate the main unit terminal numbers X010 or more means the numbers from X010 to the largest number that the main unit has The input numbers for FX3G 14ML1 ES are X000 to X007 For details on input and source input refer to Subsection 10 1 1 Specifications Item FX3G 14MLI FX3G 24MLI FX3G 40MLI FX3G 60MLI Number of input points 14 points 16 24 points 36 points 40 Input connecting type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink source Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 X000 to X007 3 3KO Input impedance Input signal X000 to X007 7mA 24V DC ON input X000 to X007 4 5mA o
89. Ambient temperature C 2 a Capacity of built in power supply of built in power supply Number of Connectable I O adn Classification connected Type 5V DC power Power supply BENDUM occupied points units supply mA Ww lw FM DC points m 8 8 Os With built in Extansion FX3U 1PSU 5V power supply power supply unit Enter the specifications for the products to be added al O seone Jejeuduag pue uoISJ9A Enter the data on the input output extension blocks and special function units blocks to be con nected to the input output powered extension unit and calculate the current For the data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type 7 refer to Section 6 8 Z5 O p Capacity of built in power supply Number of co Power supply Sumber or Power supplv for I O occupied 3 et Classification connected Type 5V WW power Pply A a classification internal 24V DC points P units a mA mA points Pe no ll Input output extension CO MEM block Fx2N O A products om Ta E i v i unit Special 3 function peu qp Maine LES ANA i y II E O LLL T MIS uonejeisu OO Enter the BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneJedald ram Buum indu CO p Calculate the totals 79 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Un
90. BCD decoder 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ESS PLC 7 segment display Transistor output Source La 10 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder 174 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions 2 Input output powered extension unit Oz Example of program e M8000 SEGL D100 YO20 4 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input output powered extension unit O O S 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output lt z Input output powered extension unit 2 E FX2N 32bET 2 ED FX2N A8ET D Transistor output sink JAJA bh I 0 1 2 3 i D ON s23 225 92 e 0 o9 10 eO ES e peJeMod jdnoandu Q1 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder sun uoisuejx3 s 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit 90 UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C 7 segm
91. C254 OP 2 phase 2 count input C252 C253 C254 C255 32 bit bi directional counter None 1 When using multiple high speed counters make sure that the sum of used frequency does not exceed the overall frequency For details on the overall frequency refer to Section 11 7 142 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers 11 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers The high speed counter numbers are allocated to the input terminals X000 to X007 as shown in the following table The input terminals not allocated for high speed counters can be used as general input terminals 11 4 1 Allocation table 12 O U Up count input D Down count input A A phase input B B phase input E R External reset input S External start input Q E z x Input allocation pom EM 0505 o 00 02 sz ew paa X D co MEN imnasoto C YY NEM ma 99 l NEN I EN 0 b y 358 coc NENNEN SELL 532 A io NN cuo A O O w NE A O 1 0 15 cv A 5 0 DS 1 phase 2 count Ea iio mt o cameo MA O 5 oo A 5 3 5 WM 7 HANS c A O S A m N C1 N 490 UOISua x3 jndnoandu C 2 phase 2 count input Le Ld L um as 00 MEM AA OO e o oo OO a
92. Current timer A9 0 d o og t bt bt o d dg d d V Clock setting Current VP o gd P Po P dg bt bt g gg E gt C lock sel El ng 111 17 01 10 2008 2 23 59 59 Wed 10 1 2008 23 59 594Wed The default Year display is a 2 digit value indicating the Western calendar year Current time E a A P o d P P A t te e PC lock setting FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 10 Clock Menu Current Time Setting 19 10 2 Displaying the current time 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ClockMenu item then press OK to display the selection screen shown to the right mC ur ent Pu mez To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Clock setting 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Current time item To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 3 Press the OK button to display the current time To cancel the operation and return to the selection screen press 2 digit display ESC Button Operation Description 01 10 08 ESC Returns to the selection screen 23 59 59 Wed Disabled Disabled OK Returns to the selection screen 4 digit display 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the selection screen 5 Press ESC to return to the menu screen 01 10 2008 23 59 59 Wed
93. Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications Item Performance 32 bits up down C200 to C219 For general Counter CT its up down EEPROM keep C220 to C234 1 phase 1 count input in both directions 20 points Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 15 points C235 to C245 32 bits up down EEPROM keep 1 phase 2 count input in High speed both directions counter 32 bits up down EEPROM keep 2 phase 2 count input in both directions 32 bits up down EEPROM keep For general 16 bits DO to D127 128 points 6 For EEPROM keep 16 bits D128 to D1099 972 points 2 b bia D1100 to D7999 6900 points l Data register 16 bits 32 bits when j Can be set as file registers in units of paired File register Maximum 7000 EEPROM keep 500 points from D1000 in the program P area EEPROM using parameters For special 16 bits D8000 to D8511 512 points For index VO to V7 jointe 16 bits Z0 to Z7 p T Extension For general TEET register 16 bits Stored in the EEPROM built in the main ERO to ER23999 24000 points unit or stored in the EEPROM in the memory cassette when the memory cassette is used For branching of JUMP and PO to P2047 2048 points For CJ instructions and CALL CALL instructions SOUS Input interruption 10000 to 1500 Timer interruption 600 to 1800 3 points Nesting For master control NO to N7 For MC instruction
94. ES UL ESS Ov XO x2 x4 xe Xo X2 XA X6 PLN gavpxi xo x6 x7 x xo XS x7 vo vz va vel vol v2 v4 ve coi v va oou vs v oon YA Ya ooi Ys Y7 FX2N 48ER ES UL 1 sspov xo X2 XA XG XO X2 XA XG XO X2 X4 XE C NT EAv xt x3 XS x7 X1 x3 x6 x xi x3 X x7 FX2N 48ER ES UL Yo v2 vavel vo v2 va ve vo v2 va ve pons cows Y vs oou vs v7 Joona v3 v3 cons vs v7 Y1 Y3 YS YT 210 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL oF 15 4 4 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring El Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring a 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 Jo Buum OO S9sf snoueA 2 Input specifications for sink input and source input Item FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL Input points 16 points 24 points I Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw azn Input form sink source 3 5 Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 B3 5 Input signal current
95. Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Calculate the total number of input output points UONINPOJJU Total the number of points counted in Steps 1 2 and 3 and check that it does not exceed 128 points maximum number of input output points Maximum number of Number of input output points Number of input output occupied input output points points NO oo 39 Sg Q Maximum number of gt T Each special function unit block points controllable on i l used for FROM TO instructions 3 system Total number of input output points of input occupies eight input or output output powered extension units and input output points zc extension blocks cS A Number of input output points of main unit D Number of remote I O points of FX2N 64CL M 9 B Number of input output points of input E Number of special function blocks output powered extension units C Number of input output points of input 4 output extension blocks 8 When CC Link master is used count the remote I O points 2 When CC Link is used the total number of input output points of the remote l O stations connected on the network and the number of input output points calculated in the previous step are 256 or al less OPS 1 FX2N 16CCL M CC Link master TE Calculate the number of remote l O points connected on the network in the following step mo
96. For details refer to Section 9 2 Wire the power supply terminals Connect the power supply to the terminals L and N Provide the power supply circuit with the protection circuit shown in this subsection gt For details refer to Section 9 4 Wire the ground terminal at a grounding resistance of 1000 or less Class D Connect a class D ground wire to the terminal For details refer to Section 9 3 and Section 9 4 Wire the input X terminals For a type 24V DC input type common to sink source input select sink or source input by the fol lowing connection Forsink input connect the 24V and S S terminals For source input connect the OV and S S terminals Connect sensors and switches to the terminals gt For details refer to Chapter 10 Wire the output Y terminals Connect loads to the terminals gt For details refer to Chapter 12 Removal and installation of quick release terminal block Removal Unscrew the terminal block mounting screws both right and left screws evenly and remove the terminal block Installation Place the terminal block in the specified position and tighten the terminal block mounting screws evenly both right and left screws Tightening torque 0 4 to 0 5 N m Pay attention so that the center of the terminal block is not lifted 115 seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A UONnOnpoJjU N SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug
97. J Eo ESTER ER EAE E n Fuse 24V DC 340 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 4 External wiring precautions oz 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits e A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Fuse Terminal block Buum mano N 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads 13 An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in the terminal block It is lt lt recommended to use inductive loads with built in protection circuits When using loads without built in d protection circuits insert an external contact protection circuit etc to reduce noise and extend the product aS life s 1 DC circuit Connect a diode for commutation parallel to the load The diode for commutation must comply with the I inductive load Han following specifications SES PLC output o2 eue contact Diode EU Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage for commutation 2 2 Q Forward current Load current or more 2 AC circuit 1 9 Connect the surge absorber combined CR 293 components such as a surge killer and spark killer inductive load 2 30 etc parallel to the load ss Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber
98. L and N terminals in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 3 Connect the 24V terminal in the case of sink input or the OV terminal in the case of source input to the S S terminal on the input extension block 122 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Examples of External Wiring 9 4 2 Example of sink input common wiring UONINPOJJU An example of sink input common wiring is given below When connecting input output powered extension units blocks carefully check the signal names on the terminal block because the sink and source input type units blocks and the sink input type units blocks vary in signal names on the terminal block Sink and source input type AC power supply of Ta N um Special adapter grounding ze 5V 0V 24V p zS Qm E oni Breaker a Power supply ON 3 PL a o MC 3 8 MC E S Sink and E Emergency Source i l TOM E stop input type 24V DC 4 service co power 4 amp 4MC MEN MC E supply si output o Class D grounding 5 Class D DC AC 25 L grounding Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals 6 os Em
99. LI EIS MISC lake During programming each instruction is checked If a syntax La than once oo operation error is detected modify the instruction correctly Sa 6505 Device number is out of allowed range 2 6506 Invalid instruction 6507 Invalid label number P 1 8 6508 Invalid interrupt input I oco o m Ex 30 6510 MC nesting number error E ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 195 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Circuit error M8066 D8066 0000 moe No error 6610 LD LDI is continuously used 9 times or more 6611 More ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 6612 Less ANB ORB instructions than LD LDI instructions 6613 MPS is continuously used 12 times or more 6614 No MPS instruction 6615 No MPP instruction No coil between MPS MRD and MPP or incorrect combination Contents of error Action 6616 Instruction below is not connected to bus line STL RET MCR P I DI El FOR NEXT SRET IRET FEND or END STL MC or MCR can be used only in main program but it is used elsewhere e g in interrupt routine or subroutine 6617 6618 Invalid instruction is used in FOR NEXT loop i es STL RET MC MCR I interrupt pointer or IRET This error occurs when a combination
100. M8179 in setting program ch2 creating M8179 in setting program 366 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M851 1 Number and name Counter Up down Counter Counting Direction M 8200 M 8201 M 8202 M 8203 M 8204 M 8205 M 8206 M 8207 M 8208 M 8209 M 8210 M 8211 M 8212 M 8213 M 8214 M 8215 M 8216 M 8217 M 8218 M 8219 M 8220 M 8221 M 8222 M 8223 M 8224 M 8225 M 8226 M 8227 M 8228 M 8229 M 8230 M 8231 M 8232 M 8233 M 8234 High Speed Counter Up down Counter Counting Direction M 8235 M 8236 M 8237 M 8238 M 8239 M 8240 M 8241 M 8242 M 8243 M 8244 M 8245 C234 Operation and function When M8LILILIis ON the corresponding CLILILI is changed to down mode ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation When M8000 is ON the corresponding COOO is changed to down mode ON Down count operation OFF Up count operation Corres ponding special device Corres Rumen ang Operation and function ponding name special device High Speed Counter Up down Counter Monitoring M 8246 C246 M 8247 C247 M 8248 C248 When CODO of 1 phase 2 M 8249 C249 input or 2 phase M 8250 C250 2 input counter is in down PLY ULT mode the corresponding Mi ss 91 M8000 turns ON i M 8252 C252 OFF Down count operation E M 8253 C25
101. Menu Display Language Setting 198 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting The language used at the display module menus is specified at the LANGUAGE menu The language setting procedure is described below All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in English When the menu display language is set to Japanese please convert the screen messages to their Japanese translations Refer to Section 19 20 for the Japanese and English display character correspondence table 19 8 1 Changing to Japanese menus The procedure for changing from English menus to Japanese menus is described below 1 Turn the PLC power on Following a brief title screen display 1 5 seconds the top screen time display or a specified device monitor screen is displayed 2 Press the ESC button when the specified device screen is displayed Press the OK or ESC button when the time is displayed Then the menu screen shown on the right appears Four lines out of the whole menu are displayed at one time on the menu screen 3 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the LANGUAGE item then press OK to display the display language selection screen To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Title screen MELSEC F FX3G Series Ver 1 10 y Approx 1 5 secs Top screen Time display 01 10 08 23 59 59 Wed or
102. O CON S FX2C l O CON SA 533 CC Link master Abbreviation of FX2N 16CCL M a 2 D Cp om Remote device stations Abbreviation of FX2N 32CCL S o Intelligent device stations Abbreviation of FX3U 64CCL Peripheral devices Generic name for programming software handy programming panel HPP and indicator Programming tool Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel HPP 1 0 Programming software Generic name for GX Developer and FX PCS WIN E 2 GX Developer Generic name for programming software packages SWLID5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E FX PCS WIN E Abbreviation of model FX PCS WIN and FX PCS WIN E programming software packages El 25 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Abbreviation a 1 Description generic name Handy programming panels Generic name for the following models HPP FX 30P FX 20P FX 20P E 26 Generic name for the following models FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H Abbreviation of FX 485PC IF RS 232C RS 422 converters RS 232C RS 485 converters Indicators GOT1000 Series GOT 900 Series GOT A900 Series GOT F900 Series Generic name for GT15 GT11 and GT10 Generic name for GOT A900 Series and GOT F900 Series Generic name for GOT A900 Series Generic name for GOT F900 Series Manuals FX3G Hardware Edition Abbreviation of FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Pro
103. OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 IU I D d ms co Bi O O zol lt S o 137 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 4 Input Interruption 10077 to 1505 10 4 Input Interruption 1000 to 1500 The PLC main unit is provided with an input interruption function and has six interruption input points Make sure that the ON duration or OFF duration of interruption input signals is 10us or more X000 X001 X003 and X004 or 50us or more X002 and X005 For details on programming refer to the programming manual 10 4 1 Allocation of pointers to input numbers input signal ON OFF duration Interrupt pointer Input number Interruption on Interruption on Interrupt disable control ON or OFF duration of input signal leading edge trailing edge X000 1001 000 M8050 10us or more X001 1101 1100 M8051 X002 1201 1200 M8052 50us or more X003 1301 1300 M8053 10us or more X004 1401 1400 M8054 X005 1501 1500 M8055 50us or more 10 4 2 Cautions for input interruption 1 Non overlap of input numbers The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers Example When the input interrupt pointer 1001 is used X000 is occupie
104. OX 2X 9X Sx EX IX bz ma Co jeX jeX eX dX 2X OX suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 237 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EX C When an input X number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers With cover Without cover Input indicator lt lamps LED lamps xo 11 xo KARA x2 3 13 x2 xa 4 14 xs Connector type 00000000 0 Rear line extension connector anil T x5 6 16 x5 x6 7 17 X6 Terminal arrangement X7 8 18 X7 p 9 19 B NOOR com o Input indicator lamps LED lamps CLU Ls r1 00000000 IES E 16 5 3 External dimensions FX2N 8EX Unit mm inches FX2N 8EX O POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch UU 43 1 7 FX2N 16EX 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches T LO bx eo O co mounting hole pitch 238 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EX C OQ I cS 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches co D a A E E 12 Te E co AS E PX 16EX C oc
105. Pe Input filter value of X000 to X007 i Battery voltage present value A Default 10ms Example 3 0V adjustment D 8021 m Default 2 7V in units of 0 1V D 8022 a a Writes from system ROM at power M8006 voltage detection ON D 8023 B level D 8024 Not used Djso D 8025 D 8026 D 8009 Minimum input device number of 24V DC failed input output powered extension unit M8009 D 8027 li device in which 24V DC has failed Index Register Z0 and VO 1 D8003 becomes the undermentioned content D 8028 Value of Z0 Z register X D 8029 Value of VO V register Type of memory Protect switch value 3 The values of Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 are stored in D8182 to 02H EEPROM memory cassette OFF D8195 OAH EEPROM memory cassette ON 10H Built in memory in PLC 370 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and Correspond Content of register ing special name device Analog Volume and Constant Scan Value of analog volume Pies VR1 Integer from O to 255 i Value of analog volume Pie VR2 Integer from O to 255 i 018032 o D8038 D 8039 Default O ms in 1 ms steps Writes from system ROM at power Constant scan ON M8039 duration Can be overwritten by program Stepladder and Annunciator D 8040 ON state number 1 D 8041 ON state number 2 D 8042 The smallest numbe
106. Product Specification do 211 154 2 External GIMEMSIONS usibus basi desta ees bce bai s bdusstu olaa 213 1525 3 Terminal la OL cis iri aic dece ra cs ooo Qi a dec ac H E abes 213 15 5 EX2N 32ER FEX2N249I TI s ds ses qe nba PR SERA DER ii 214 15 94 polo eo o IC HLIDEIIS s cemercidaeondsa or qaod eo daa EE uoo do coe bebo etse tas caecbe eode a a aT 214 15 5 2 External GIMEMSIONG scu eoi eost sich heat acea oes cun tenes Eh chen ete une aum r E 216 5 09 terminal OU C T 216 15 5 T X2N 92E T EEX2NSAOET oido aaa sine 217 15 54 Product SDeelllCaliORS 2 6 utate a cee uoo eek a a aD LLL O 217 15 6 2 External amenas ION Sit ion 219 19 08 39 Termal lavo daa ico 219 IO T A E O SS 220 152751 Product SpecitiCaliODs s a doo c 220 15 7 2 External aimehslofis a da 221 159 4 3 Termine AY A A AR 221 19 9 EX2N dOEREUA VUD olus tit eet o orta i m TR e par te e a c c e ett 222 15 8 1 Product specifICallOris AS 222 15 8 2 External dimensions ccccccsecccneeccsseeceueeceueeceucessueeseueessueeseeesaeeesaeessaeessaeesusessueessageeseesesaes 223 15 9 9 Terminal VOLL asusta sad a ads 223 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 224 QN UMD T 225 15 151 Product COMMUN ON sree secte caesar tee ares adele oer Ente tamen ous te Lies bes cona qa cera Pee Lot ide PL aes 225 As AAA e EE E E gu 225 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output oocccccooccccccoccnconoccncononcnconanonnos 227 16 21
107. Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program 3 2 4 The accessing path to the FX3G from CC Link Network The FX3G which is connected to the FX3U 64CCL can be accessed via CC Link from QCPU Q mode master local station when GX Developer Ver 8 78G or later is used Accessing permits write and read verify carry out device batch monitoring and complete device test From the master station local station of the QCPU Q mode the FX3G Series main unit can be accessed The communication path of CC Link is illustrated as follows UONINPOJJU N 1 The path when accessing from the master QCPU Q mode station UT a D 22 Zz DD 30 D v nD a Direct coupling de jonpoud uononpoJu FX3G main unit FX3u 64CCL suoneooods I al 2 The path when accessing from a local ACPU Q mode station seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A acru 2 master Q mode station CC Link etc Direct coupling wasis OD uoneinByuoy local station jnd noandu Ni SON HUN SON uonejesu OO Bui jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 41 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 1 Generic Specifications 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal Layout Main Units This Chapter explains the spec
108. S B Rear line E El E extension Lower E connector i numbers B E 13 09 Output indicator SIE o ig lamps eB sz E LED lamps SOE ea 52 P Z l Higher 14 N numbers TE Oo MEL O 2 25 7 2 16 13 3 External dimensions 293 235 gag c 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches zl FXan 16EYS 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 17 CC Um 530x D 40 1 58 Sa mo gt Oo oa lt 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 261 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 17 Extension Power Supply Unit User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 1 Outline 17 Extension Power Supply Unit DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output contr
109. Section 4 7 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 Input Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION uononpoJu N Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO positioning limits zx 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off a 3 Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be Ere disabled S External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be 4 disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure
110. The list of numbers of input output points is shown in Section 6 8 Count the input output points of the remote l O stations connected on FX2N 64CL M network Add the number of remote I O points to the number of input output points from the main unit and input output powered extension units blocks calculated in the above step gt For the remote I O point calculation method refer to the FX2N 64CL M manual Count the number of input output occupied points of special function blocks The number of occupied input output points per unit is 8 The number of occupied input output points of each type of device can be obtained by the following formula or from the list shown below gt For a list of occupied input output points refer to Section 6 8 E Number of occupied aie og Number of points per unit input output points units 8 points points Total number of Each special function block m Number of special function blocks eS i i occupied input Number of special function used for FROM TO instructions panes blocks dps output points occupies eight input or output points Observe the following instructions when using the following products e FX2N 16CCL M CC Link master When more than one master station is connected a remote l O station cannot be connected to the 2nd and following master stations e FX3U 64CCL Only one FX3U 64CCL unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6
111. User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 4 FX3U 4AD PNK ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout e MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws rs l 2 10 e Accessories Manual supplied with product Q o od so poles Terminal block European type wo lt 09 09 oy olo S DOF O E JE 15 1 0 6 5 17 6 0 7 poles 18 2 5 FX3u 4AD TC ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 24 MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22Ibs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 10 Accessories Manual supplied with product poles Terminal block European type 98 3 86 mounting hole pitch 15 1 0 6 5 17 6 0 7 poles 274 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 6 FX3u 232ADP MB OI External Dimensions 2 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 80g 0 18lbs Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in 12 width or screws O Accessories Manual supplied with product A e Connector RS 232C E y D SUB 9 pin male co e E 13 23 eg 7 92 I Terminal Layout En 1 CD DCD SER a 2 RD RXD FE 11
112. User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program Communication UONINPOJJU EN m RS 232C RS 422 cable e Connection cabling ge Connection cabling for Peripheral device connector encon deves 2 FX 232AWC H RS 232C d RS 422 umn a D 22 Zz DD 30 D v nD a jonpoud uononpoJu j Special adapter FX3u 232ADP MB 6 FX3c CNV ADP RS 232C suoneooods I al Expansion board UU lt DOC 53 2 RS 232C 3S y Ug FX 232AWC H ze F 5 FX3G 422 BD RS 232C x RS 422 6 SS MITSUBISHI gt a gS du freeeemememesessseipen gs FX 20P CABO E No Shape of connector or combination with cable No Shape of connector or combination with cable 2 O PA Fx 422CAB0 E F2 232CAB 1 FX3G 232 BD D SUB 9Pin RS 232C P al D SUB 9Pin e O e EI X 232CAB 1 FX3G 422 BD MINI DIN 8Pin RS 422 z PA Fx 422CAB0 I F2 232CAB 2 6 FX3G CNV ADP FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H F Half pitch 14Pin a Peripheral device connector USB m EjFX 232CAB 2 MINI B connector female USB2 0 S PA Fx 422CABO E F2 232CAB Peripheral device connector RS 422 FX 232AW FX 232AWC FX 232AWC H MINI DIN 8Pin 9 D SUB 25Pin EF2 232CAB 1 9 Expansion board connector zo 3 Ss eos 2 oz SE ia EJFX 20P CABO FX3U 64CCL CC Link c
113. V NV WV V V W WV W V NV WV V 1A 5 diode is he Ee RR a pe necessary 8 2 E ZR MERO E UC TE i uri md L Input output powered extension unit Output extension block Transistor output Source 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET ESS UL Output extension blocks do not have the terminals 168 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN 3 Input output powered extension unit Oz Example of program 27 BO D a M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input output powered extension unit O O S Digital LE us 25 switch of 5o BCD 23 AL A ZA A IN A ZA AN IN A A A IN A ZA AN P 04A50V OO AL 0 1A 50 e e te 14 a to oa necessary 338 8 S a COM X060 X061 X062 X063 X064 X065 X066 X067 225 oo First input group Input output powered E extension unit Transistor output sink rli 1 5 COm1 Y050 Y051 Y052 Y053 md See 235 ses c 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and ou
114. X065v X066v X06 7 o N eo Se co co co o s S Y V Y Y Y Y Y Y pus Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N A8ET ESS UL Transistor output source KR ME 173 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH O O S 10 BuutM Ses snoueA I dE OD nV es Sy TE EN Nw 2 gt 5 oo S D Q I1 U ea O c gt Oo 2 oO O a E 2 3 S E a op ma 490 UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions 134 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 13 4 1 When SEGL instructions are used This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 4 digit 7 segment display 1 Main unit Example of program M8000 SEGL D100 YO10 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ES Transistor output sink je 10 Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in
115. X3 When connected to the FX2N 16EX C Lower numbers Higher numbers 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 w O 5 Q 77 pel e lt O o c D yoojg jJeuiuJe 331 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 3 Terminal Layout 3 FX 16EX A1 TB MITSUBISHI FX 16EX Al TB AC 100V INPUT POWER Lower numbers d 7 FX 16EYR TB La LL s casga BEETLE Lower numbers Higher numbers 24 0 2 Com 4 6 jcoM2 o 2 com3 4 6 coma 332 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 4 Installation Work 11 20 4 Installation Work os Refer to Section 8 1 for installation location 43 20 4 1 Installation 12 2 Turn OFF all power supplies connected to the PLC E input output devices and terminal blocks Q 3 Align the top side of the DIN rail mounting groove 13 refer to Fig 1 at right with the DIN rail sz Press the product onto the DIN rail refer to Fig 2 at a right 2 14 20 4 2 Removal 358 32 Turn the power supply OFF d 15 Disconnect the wiring and input output cab
116. a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required e O IU I D d ms co Bi O joe pem lt S o 3 In the case of source input wiring short circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S S terminal and the OV terminal of the main unit 4 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 135 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 100V AC Input 10 3 100V AC Input 10 3 1 Input specifications Main units of a 100V AC input type are not available Select the input for the input output powered extension units blocks gt For the specifications on input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 gt For the specifications on input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 10 3 2 Handling of 100V AC Input 1 Input terminal When voltage of 100 to 120V AC is applied between the input terminal and COM terminal the input terminal is turned on The input display LED lights Do not connect the COM terminal of an AC input type input output powered extension unit block with the COM terminal of a DC system 100 to 240V AC 100 to 120V AC 2 Input circuit The primary input circuit and the secondary input circuit are insulated with a photocoupler There is a delay of approx 25 to 30ms in response to input sw
117. and two FX3G 422 BD units FX3G 422 BD GT1020LBL 5V DC type FX3G 422 BD GT1020LBL 5V DC type Avoid continuous use of two GT1020LBL 5V DC type units uonejeisu OO Itis not allowable to connect a device such as GOT which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of the RS 422 port in the 40 point 60 point type main unit and two FX3G 422 BD units 3 channels in total at the same time BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneJedald ram Buum indu CO p 65 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Output Points 6 3 1 Calculation of number of input output points To obtain the total number of input output points count the input output points of input output powered extension units blocks and the input output occupied points of special function blocks The number of remote I O points on CC Link network must be excluded Total the number of input output points on the main unit and the number of those on the input output powered extension units blocks To obtain the total number of input output points count the input points X000 and more and output points YOOO and more of the main unit and input output powered extension units blocks The number of input output points of each type of device is shown on the list below
118. as shown in the right figure Top cover S 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA Caution Display module cannot attach in the top cover S side of a 40 60 point types main unit I 358 15 Install remove the display module 293 230 Attach the display module to the main unit as shown in the 3g right figure arrow 2 37 16 Remove the display module while pressing and holding the 22a display module fixing hook B in the figure on the right as TE shown in the right figure arrow 2 2E m yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 suondo pue sun gt uoisuex3 Jayo OO Q 62 pel D lt O 2 e D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 283 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 2 Installation and Removal 19 2 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 284 The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example Attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter to the main unit For the attachment method refer to Chapter 8 Caution Make sure to attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter before the display module The display module cannot be attached to the expansion board connector conversion adapter attached on the top cover S side of the 40 60 point type main unit Remove the upper connector cover A in the right figure
119. block covers Input display LEDs red Extension device connecting connector cover Operation status display LEDs Output display LEDs red Model name abbreviation DIN rail mounting hooks The year and month of production The peripheral device connector variable analog potentiometers and RUN STOP switch are located under this cover The signal names for power supply input and output terminals are shown Mount the expansion board and memory cassette under this cover Mount the expansion board display module memory cassette and battery under this cover The covers can be opened for wiring Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running the unit power is on When an input terminal X000 or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights Connect the extension cables of input output powered extension unit block or special function block to the extension device connecting connectors under this cover FX3U Series extension devices and FX2N Series extension devices can be connected For details on the extension devices refer to Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 and Section 18 1 The operation status of the PLC can be checked with the LEDs The LEDs turn off light and flash according to the following table gt For details on the operation status refer to Section 14 5 LED name Description POW On while power is on the PLC RUN On while the PLC is running Flashing when a program error occurs ERR Lights whe
120. checks and displays the results Button operation Section 19 7 A LANGUAGE selects the menu display Selects either Japanese or English as the menu display language Button operation Section 19 8 mo language ES D 62 Contrast Adjusts the contrast 5 to 10 default setting O Button operation Section 19 9 Display Displays the current time Button operation eod ClockMenu _ dh I Setting Sets the current time Button operation Eod 3 2 a E 5 S 3 a Keyword The currently specified keyword can be canceled Button operation Section 19 11 23 5 Cassette Allows data transfers between the internal EEPROM and the o D Button operation Section 19 12 zn Memory cassette transfer memory cassette a Non menu functions 1 5 oe Deu See moniter Displays the monitor test screen for a specified device at the top Requires program Section 19 14 mu function 2 2 5 D Displays the screen saver if key operation is not given for specified 3 aS O Screen saver function period of time Requires program Section 19 15 o Ec c amp 2 Display screen protect function enables all tuncttons promong change tes TINGIONS Ang Requires program Section 19 16 7 protects the top screen time display ee PUNOI eer Allows monitoring of operation button ON OFF status Peace pro Ea Section 19 17 1 6 information or monitor T Changes the display format of the current values and setting B Hexadecimal current value 2
121. counter C235 to C255 Pulse catch M8170 to M8175 SPD instruction Check to make sure the pulse output destination is not being driven by another positioning instruction The number of times an applied instruction is used in the program exceeds the specified limit The write protect switch of the EEPROM memory cassette was set to ON when data was transferred to the EEPROM memory Check for the correct connection of extension cables This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the program or check the contents of the operands used in the applied instructions Check whether the specified buffer memories exist in the counterpart equipment Check for the correct connection of extension cables Check the cable connection between the programming panel PP programming device and the PLC e Check for the correct connection of extension cables 1 The unit number 0 to 7 of the special function unit block error is put in O 199 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum indno IN a 10 Buum OO S O c o c o D o uny sa Bunoouse qnoy S9UBUAJUIE N peJeMod jdnoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 indinomdu C mundo j yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting
122. dE a OO pamm 8 8 9 i parao O mem A RI O AS E 4 CC Link LT 2 1 The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network Number of remote I O stations x 32 points al 2 The following number of points is added according to the products connected to the network DU Total number of input output points of remote I O stations 29 3 When analog special function blocks FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA are connected to an input output 23 powered extension unit FX2N 32bEL or FX2N A48ELI the following limitation must be taken into consideration When the blocks are connected to the main unit this limitation is not applied The total current consumption of the analog special function blocks FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA should be less than the following current values Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N 32bELI 190 mA or less Total current consumption of blocks connected to FX2N 48EL1 300 mA or less wa s s uonenByuos 6 8 4 D Extension Power Supply Unit N D Number of input Current consumed mA 53 No Type occupied output CE points 5V DC power supply Internal 24V DC Sg ZE P 1 The ambient temperature restricts the output current For details refer to the derating curve in Section 6 7 uonejeisu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneJedald ram Buum indu CO p 83 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input
123. demand send processing M 8128 Computer link ch1 D8127 On demand error flag D8128 Computer link ch1 D8129 On demand Word Byte M 8129 changeover RS FNC 80 instruction Time out check flag 3 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or RS instruction is OFF Positioning PLSY PLSR instruction M 8145 YOOO Pulse output stop command M 8146 YOO1 Pulse output stop command YOOO Pulse output monitor patar BUSY READY Y001 Pulse output monitor Lass BUSY READY i Inverter Communication Function 18150 Inverter communication in 4 Metas execution ch1 eie M 8152 Inverter communication error ch1 D8152 Inverter communication error latch M 8153 4 ch1 D8153 M 8154 Not used M 8155 Inverter communication in 4 DIOE execution ch2 ewe M 8157 4 Inverter communication error ch2 D8157 Inverter communication error latch M 8158 ch2 D8158 M18750 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 365 9jlesse2 NO Alowa mm 22 5 a 0008d 0008IN sr1 uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 N Correspond Correspond umber and i Number and i Operation and function ing special Operation and function ing special name a name device device Advanced Function
124. equipment connecting screw holes1 2 places 10 9 Connect a programming tool PC to program a sequence gt For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 Connect a programming tool to program a sequence gt For details on applicable peripheral devices refer to Chapter 5 To stop writing batch of the sequence program or operation set the switch to STOP slide it downward To start operation run the machine set it to RUN slide it upward Two variable analog potentiometers are built in Upper side VR1 Lower side VR2 Connect the expansion board and memory cassette to the connector Connect the expansion board display module and memory cassette to the connector Connect the optional battery to the connector This holder accommodates the optional battery These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with Screws These holes are designed to secure the expansion board and memory cassette with Screws When the terminal block covers are open 1 1 Power supply terminal 2 Terminal block mounting screws 3 Input X terminals 4 Output Y terminals 5 Terminal cover 30 1 M SS AMES SIRS eS S RS RS ES ES ES ES RS RS R 59 LIES RS d bm rr A Xo v Connect the power supply to the main unit If the main unit must be replaced loosen the screws slightly loosen th
125. for inductive loads An internal protection circuit for the relays is not provided for the relay output circuit in the extension blocks It is recommended to use inductive loads with built in protection circuits When using loads without built in protection circuits insert an external contact protection circuit etc to reduce noise and extend the product life 1 DC circuit Connect a diode in parallel with the load The diode for commutation must comply with the following E a Inductive load specifications PLC output Item Guide contact Diode Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times the load voltage for commutation Forward current Load current or more 2 AC circuit Connect the surge absorber combined CR components such as a surge killer and spark killer etc parallel to the load Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the load being used Refer to the table below for other PA Inductive load specifications PLC output Item Standard contact Surge Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF absorber Resistance value Approx 100 to 200Q Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON Limit of normal simultaneously an external interlock should be provided rotation Normal for interlocking the PLC s internal pro
126. gt PLC 0008q 0008W S17 uononJjsu WwW seoi eq jeloeds A memory cassette program is written to the PLC s internal EEPROM memory Required condition The PLC must be stopped Install the memory cassette on the main unit Setting the PROTECT switch to ON on memory cassette s rear face prevents accidental overwriting of memory cassette program Refer to Section 21 3 for the installation procedure Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC Turn the PLC power ON Raise the memory cassette s eject lever al MITSUBISHI WR LED o 32L gt PLC 6 ee WR key 10 32L PLC Press the WR key 1 time OFF ON O PROTECT Sw I 1 I The WR LED lights and a preparation status is established Tocancel press the RD key Press the WR key again Writing is executed and the WR LED blinks t takes several seconds to write data to the built in EEPROM The WR LED flickers while data is written Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Writing is completed when the WR LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cassette from the PLC Refer to Section 21 4 for the removal procedure 357 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 8 Operation Precautions 21 7 2 Reading RD 3
127. indicator lamps 5 LED lamps 17 Syp E To PE Higher 3 Q lt lt numbers dl lt 18 OCO 2925 NO ono D 2 o gt g i 2 o D ey gt m UJ 9 o 255 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output FX2N 16EYT C When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on side B will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Without cover Output indicator lamps LED lamps Da 00000000 FX n 16EYT C Output indicator lamps BS 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 TO LED lamps 16 11 3 External dimensions Side Side Connector type Rear line extension connector PA vale 16 V5 Terminal arrangement Y7 8 18 Y7 com 9 19 CON EJES FX2N 8EYT 2 04 5 mounting holes FX2N 8EYT O POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch oTo 1 2 3 0000 4567 OOOO FX2N 16EYT 2 4 5 mounting holes 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 256 Unit mm inches Unit mm inches FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output FX2N 16EYT C 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 80 3
128. input Main unit 2 For C244 X010 C244 starts counting immediately when the input terminal oa X006 turns on while X012 is on The count input terminal is X000 The setting for this example is the data of the oe m IST EH ou E m indirectly designated data register D1 D0 X012 M e C244 can be reset by X011 on the sequence For C244 Bor X001 is allocated as the external reset input The counter uu resets immediately when X001 turns on The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or The RERO ES DLRI up count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 Count input External reset External start input input Main unit Example of operation The above counter C235 operates as shown below X010 Up count Down count Up count X011 Reset input A X012 Start input X000 Count input 4 9 4 C235 9 2 Current 1 1 value Q 0 0 i o E 1 23 3 When output has 4 z 4 operated 6 5 5 3 C235 output contact NY FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters C235 is set to the up count or down count mode through interruption by the count input X000 When the current value increases from 6 to 5 the output contact is set and when the value decreases from 5 to 6 it is reset The current value increases and decreases regardless of the operati
129. input terminal is X001 C249 can be reset on the sequence by X011 For C249 X002 is allocated as reset input When X002 turns External start on C249 is immediately reset Down counting input input Men in im The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be ia id cd monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 Main unit ON Down counting OFF Up counting 145 sjajuno pasds ybiH Buum mano N 10 Bum OO Ses SNOEN I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 pejowog indinoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 ma syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters 11 5 3 2 phase 2 count input 146 These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters Mni of program 2 For C251 e While X012 is on C251 counts the operation of the input terminals X000 A phase and X001 B phase through interruption s K1234 While X011 is turned on the counter is reset when RST instruction is executed I 19 When the current value ex
130. item where the cursor is blinking 286 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 5 Menu Structure 19 5 Menu Structure T Title screen MELSEC F FX3G Series Operation keys OK Press the OK button lt ESC _ Press the ESC button Ver 1 10 Buum mano N A The button are used to move the cursor and switch between display l screens Y Approx 1 5 secs Top screen Time display ah Menu screen 1 3 Eon P Monitor Test _OK mD 16bit iE 01 10 08 ESC _ ESC DD 32bit cg 23 59 59 Wed T P C E R 16bit 14 Switched by system information setting DR 32bit 3 FA l1 ER 16bit EE Specified device monitor screen DER 32bit 88 X X010 34567 Y 15 M 38 T S 25S Specified 382 C Display example uda P ErrorCheck ErrorCheck No errors 490 UOISU9 X3 indinoamdu C C Um B LANGUAGE LANGUAGE Se 5 o 25 Japanese oS FP English 00 KF Contrast suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO P ClockMenu Q 62 pel D lt O 2 e D KF Current time Clock Setting 2 yoojg euw CO 287 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 5 Menu Structure Display example 2 Keyword The Keyword is not set Display example gt gt Cassette _OK Memory Cassette lt ESC_ BRB Cassette PLC Cas
131. light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 3A point 2 Resistance load The total load current per common terminal should be the following value Max load e 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less 4 3 15VA 100V AC 30VA 200V AC Open circuit leakage current 1mA 100V AC 2mA 200V AC S Min load 0 4VA 100V AC 1 6VA 200V AC o E ims or less 9 Response time ON OFF 10ms or less I uny 1S9 Output circuit configuration eoueua ure N O c D 62 p o o gt gt Q A common number applies to the of COML peJewog jndinogindu 15 7 2 External dimensions spun uoisuejx3 2 44 5 mounting holes s Unit mm inches R sd UJ IT 5 23 9 3 ES ES 8 S S3 EE E EJE s TT OUO a Qo amp Toe con xo xe Tx x D O A poer zar SS E ooooo0o000 2 2 0 MITSUBISHI 3583888386 gt 3S EASA e rower LO 5 T e e d t 9 D es 91234567 O O MELSECEX 32ES OUTS OGD OOO00 si 55888884 co I O 47 comi Y1 PY loom Ya y Icom YT Ty Toomal ysl YT Oo UUUUUUUUUUU 59 693169 63 6316931693169 69 63 C31 631 63 O E i C um 9 ES 9 9 ES lOlS 9 69 69 89 69 ra 2 07 cx zD A D z H 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch 9 0 36 gs 150 5 91 87 3 43 S 00 15 7 3 Terminal layout EL owl xo xz x4 xe xO x2 xa X6 PN pas ps x7 xi xo Xe x7 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO
132. lt switch of BCD 1 8 0 1A 50V LN NY NM W V NV NM W V NV W V V NM WV W oco diode is TFT A AAA EFT oy ARAGAO FH al ER o x 8 Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ESS ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 167 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN 2 Main unit input output powered extension unit block Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When the main unit and a transistor output sink type input output powered extension unit block are used 100 103 Digital switch of BCD 0 1A 50V diode is necessary IN A AN ME A T E E E Y ae ee E E A lap a ne p LR d d T 2 24 Input output powered extension unit Output extension block Transistor output sink 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET Output extension blocks do not have the terminals 2 In the case of source wiring When the main unit and a transistor output source type input output powered extension unit block are used Digital 100 103 switch of BCD 0 4A ov V NV N W
133. module the function cannot be operated for the input relays X The forcible ON OFF function can turn on or off the devices only for one scan While the PLC is running the function is substantially effective in clearing the current values of the timers T counters C data registers D index registers Z and V and extension registers R and in controlling the SET RST circuit and self retaining circuit The operation to forcibly turn on timers is effective only when the timers are driven by the program The results of forcible ON OFF operation performed while the PLC in the stopped state or performed for devices not used in the program are retained However the results of the operation performed for the input relays X are not retained because the relays refresh input even while the PLC is in the stopped state They are updated according to the input terminal conditions gt 2 Since the current values may be changed according to MOV instruction in the program and the operation results the most recently obtained values are retained 3 Only display modules can change the current value by the extension file register test function 4 Change of timer and counter settings The settings of the timers T and counters C can be changed only when the timers are driven by the program 14 3 3 Program modification function The sequence program can be transferred while the PLC is running or in the stopped state as sho
134. mounting hole pitch FXan 16EYT 250 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output oz 16 10 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR 1 3 Product type FX2N extension block lt lt Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit d 0 ee 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44Ibs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block I Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number 3 5 z The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation gee o2 3 Output specifications Relay output type Ei Output Points 16 points 9 Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws A el 3 Output type Relay 2 d O External power supply 250V AC 30V DC or less E Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation a Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2A
135. od 55 2 17 87 3 43 5 e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws OCO e Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Bee e Terminal block M3 screws for power supply terminal CC Link connection terminal ap M3 5 screws for CC Link connection terminal block mounting screws black 2 The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 1 9 o E 2 yoojg euw CO 271 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 15 FX2N 64CL M External Dimensions 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2n 64CL M 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch ico ic EE 4 0 16 43 1 7 e MASS Weight 0 15kg 0 33lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product The connector for CC Link LT interface is on the front face of the product The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 272 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 Special Adapters 18 2 1 FX3U 4AD ADP External Dimensions Term
136. of instructions is incorrect in the entire circuit block or when the relationship between a pair of instructions is incorrect Numbers of FOR and NEXT instructions do not match Modify the instructions in the program mode so that their No NEXT instruction mutual relationship becomes correct 6619 6620 Stops 6621 6622 6623 6624 6625 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level exceeded operation No MC instruction No MCR instruction STL instruction is continuously used 9 times or more 6626 Invalid instruction is programmed within STL RET loop MC MCR I interrupt pointer SRET or IRET 6627 No STL instruction Invalid instruction is used in main program interrupt pointer SRET or IRET No P or interrupt pointer No SRET or IRET instruction STL RET or MC MCR instructions in subroutine SRET programmed in invalid location 6628 6629 6630 6631 6632 FEND programmed in invalid location 196 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC OT Error operation 5 Contents of error Action m code at error a occurrence 2 Operation error M8067 D8067 o0 CC 12 No jump destination pointer for CJ or CALL instruction Label is undefined or out of PO to P4095 due to indexing 2 6701 Label P63 is executed in CALL instru
137. output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 16EXL C Input points 16 points Connection type Connector terminal block Input form TTL level Input signal voltage 5V DC 5 Input signal current 40mA at 5V DC maximum Input impedance 2 2kQ ON input ON Low 1mA or more sensitivity current OFF High 0 4mA or less Input sensing ON Low 1 5V DC or less voltage OFF High 3 5V DC or more OFF ON 1ms 1 ms 0 5 ms Input response HighLow time ON gt 0FF Low High 1ms 1 ms 0 5 ms Input signal form TTL input Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input External unit Input circuit diagram 240 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 Points 16 6 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement Oz When an input X number is assigned 8 points on side A will be used for the lower input numbers and 8 BS points on side B will be used for the higher input numbers With cover Without cover 1 Input indicator Aj B lamps xo 1 11 Xo LED lamps xs 4 14 Po ooa cono 00000000 0 Buum mano N Rear line extension connector xa ys 15 xa xsl e 16 x5 xe 7 17 xe Terminal arrangement X7 8 18 X7 9 19 FXan 16EXL C a
138. pitch FXen 2LC oh j Fass OL C Um ES 2 4 0 16 x 2 55 2 17 ES o E e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product EEE Terminal block M3 screws asm The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 2 o 2 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 269 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 11 FX2N 8AD External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 44 5 mounting holes pr Lt ER 3 q Y 2999 99 99 eO MO ZO MITSUBISHI FX2n 8AD CES 67 2 64 E mounting hole pitch 75 2 96 8 0 32 75 2 96 MASS Weight 0 4kg 0 88lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 5 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 18 1 12 FX2N 16CCL M External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch o m 2 o E z 75 2 96 mounting hole pitch e MASS Weight 0 4kg 0 88lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm
139. product 293 Terminal block M3 5 screws 2 3 18 5 Connector Conversion Adapter 4 6 TH 18 5 1 FX3G CNV ADP TE External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs 4 7 Accessories Four M3x8 tapping screws T for installation of adapter 3 3 Side cover oS Manual supplied with product El suondo pue shun xg 194IO ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisua 2 yoojg euw CO 279 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 6 Interface Module User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 5 2 FX2N CNV BC External Dimensions e MASS Weight 40g 0 09lbs n Unit mm inches ACUNUN O Installation Screws only 18 6 Interface Module 18 6 1 FX 232AWC H External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs Accessories Manual supplied with product Connector RS 232C D SUB 25 pin female RS 422 D SUB 25 pin female MITSUBISHI EU POWER mm PE o E 28 zo ox o m FX 232AWC H 80 3 15 280 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 1 Specifications FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS DANGER Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation
140. registers can be created in the memory by setting them in the parameter memory capacity 00080 00081 S17 uoONASU W sao1nag jeiroeds gt File registers 0 to 14 blocks 1 block 500 points 500 steps Sequence program Extended file registers ERO to ER23999 24000 points GX Developer 1 The maximum number of points for the memory capacity comments and file registers can be specified when the FX3G programming tool is selected The maximum number of points cannot be specified when a programming tool other than the FX3G is selected 355 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 6 PROTECT Switch 21 6 PROTECT Switch 21 6 1 PROTECT switch setting Reading from and writing to memory cassette operations can be performed by using the programming tool I MITSUBISHI Because sequence programs are written by an electronic format a special of ROM writer and ultraviolet eraser are not required m The PROTECT switch must be turned OFF to enable writing E IT T Switch 21 6 2 PROTECT switch operation 1 Preparing the operation tools Set the PROTECT switch knob by using the tip of a pair of tweezers a precision screwdriver or a tool with a tip width of approx 0 8mm 0 04 Shape of tool tip Good Do not use objects with round tips as the round tip can easily slip off the switch knob possibly
141. resulting in an incorrect setting Tool tip Bad Switch operation procedure As shown in the figure below the switch knob can be pushed or pulled When setting the switch do not set it in an intermediate position Switch setting Push tool directiori Switch Switch case Pull knob gt direction OFFeON OFFeON 21 6 3 Precautions when setting and using the switch 356 Leaving the switch knob at an intermediate position for an extended period can cause an equipment failure FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 21 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function AJOws 9jesse2 The FX3G EEPROM 32L loader function WR and RD key operation is explained in this section Program transfers reading writing are possible between the memory cassette and the PLC s internal EEPROM memory The loader function is enabled while the PLC is stopped N apeg IN e When the display module is connected data can be transferred from the memory cassette by performing the data transfer procedure in the display module It is not possible to transfer data from the memory cassette by performing the data transfer procedure in the memory cassette For the data transfer method in the display module refer to Chapter 20 21 7 1 Writing WR 32L
142. routines with higher priority using external signals whose minimum ON duration or OFF duration is 10us X000 X001 X003 and X004 or 50us X002 and X005 The timer interruption function is also provided Refer to 10 Input Wiring Procedures in this manual and Programming Manual Pulse width period measurement function Supported in Ver 1 10 or later The width period of pulses from input terminals X000 X001 X003 and X004 of the main unit can be measured in units of 10us Refer to 10 Input Wiring Procedures and Programming Manual 27 5 a Q Q c 2 o 2 SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneooods I al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A ues C uoneJn6ijuo jndingandu i SON HUN SON uonejesu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneJedald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 1 Major Features Pulse output function When output terminals in the transistor output type main unit are used pulses open collector outputs of up to 100kHz can be output simultaneously to 3 axes YOOO YOO1 and Y002 1 2 axes YOOO and YO01 in 14 point and 24 point type main units Using a number of instructions programming is simplified Refer to Positioning Control Edition Various positioning instructions Refer to Positioning Control Edition Instruction Descript
143. setting value is displayed as 291 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum nding IN 10 buum OO Ses SNOEN I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 suondo pue sun gt uoisuex3 sayo OO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 292 4 Counter C 1 2 3 4 9 6 d Display Content Device No Contact image ON E OFF Blank Reset image ON E OFF Blank Count direction display UP count H DOWN count Blank 32 bit up down counter and high speed counter only Current value Setting value When not using it in a program a setting value is displayed as 5 Input X Output Y Auxiliary Relay M State S 1 2 Display Content Device No at beginning of line Input X and output Y 8 points per line Auxiliary relay M special auxiliary relay M and state S 10 points per line ON OFF status ON Last digit of device No OFF 5 6 1 2 1 2 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 19 6 4 Test mode operation There are 3 types
144. the corresponding device if the device number is set outside the allowable range The table below shows the device type to be displayed in accordance with the numeric value written in DOO If any numeric value outside the range from 1 to 10 is written in DOLD the specified device monitor function is disabled Value stored in DO O Device type 1 Input X 2 Output X 3 Auxiliary relay M 4 State S 5 Timer T 6 Counter C 7 Data register D 8 Data register DD 9 Extended register R 10 Extended register DR others Not used 2 System signal 2 System Information Description Request Edit of displayed device data MAA ON Enables the test function OFF Disables the test function and enables only monitoring MA A 1 Edition completion response MA A 4 ESC key status MA A 5 key status MA A 6 key status MA A 7 OK key status Specified device monitor display status MA A 9 ON The specified device monitor screen is displayed OFF Any screen other than the specified device monitor screen is displayed 1 Turns ON after completion of a test operation for a specified device monitor or when the OK or ESC key operated To turn OFF the request edit of a specified device monitor is turned off or it is turned off in the user s program 310 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 2 Differences between s
145. the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications sink input Item FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER Input points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3 kO Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Input signal form Sink input wiring Input circuit diagram 214 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER 3 Output specifications relay output type Item Output Points Connection type Output unit External power supply Output circuit insulation Indication of output operation 2A point The total load current per common terminal should be the following value e 8 output points common terminal 8A or less Resistance load Max load Inductive load Open circuit leakage current Min load OFF ON ONOFF Resp
146. the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock GUI S2fcty Precautions ED Read these precautions before using CAUTION ees Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product e Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 1009 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 92 When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits 114 Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions 128 Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following 152 precautions 155 Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product 160 The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual 161 Tightening torque should be between 0 5
147. the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of your device TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION When transporting the FX3G Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable during transportation The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifications Section 4 1 Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation verify the operations of the PLC 178 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 2m
148. the right figure and fix it with provided as M3 tapping screws D in the right figure E C 4 Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 N m l 3 Sos Fix the connector conversion adapter E in the 6 right figure with provided M3 tapping screws a D in the right figure to the main unit 32 e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem lt Q lt A ad 7 S T 33 2 ZE uonejeisu Bui jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 109 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 4 Connecting method C connection of special adapter When connecting the special adapter it is necessary to attach the connector conversion adapter before the special adapter using the method described in the preceding subsection Slide the special adapter connecting hooks A in the right figure of the main unit e When adding a special adapter to the special adapter that has been connected to the connector conversion adapter read connector conversion adapter as special adapter This applies to the following steps Connect the special adapter B in the right figure to the connector conversion adapter as shown in the right figure Slide the special adapter connecting hooks A in the right figure of the connector conversion adapter to secure the special adapter B in the right figure
149. thyristor 1 3 thyristor zs LIL10 to O7 Lower numbers AAO to A A7 Higher numbers g lu absorbers are connected to each output no 1234 004 5 6 7 4401 2 3 AA4 5 6 7 dh I AZ 338 AV bi A AY AVAL AY 52 SD 8 8 a URE Oo c 225 sas eG om 2 g Surge absorbers are connected to each output 000 1 2 3 004567 440123 44456 7 PLC output No sy ojg UOISU9 X3 indinomdu C Photo coupler power supply yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 un o z Q 77 D lt o ex e D yoo g jeuiuJe 347 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 Terminal Block 20 9 FX 16EYS TB 20 9 4 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output 2 Micro current load The PLC s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn off C R absorber When connecting a very low current load of 0 4VA 100V AC or less or 1 6VA 200V AC or less please connect a surge absorber parallel to the load Terminal block Micro current load Surge Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is veges suitable for the load being used Refer to the table below for other specificati
150. time The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 125 ue uoneJedald Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring 9 4 Examples of External Wiring 9 45 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit source input common This example shows a source input wiring common including the extension power supply unit Sink and source input type para 400 122400 Special adapter grounding 2 5V O0V 24V T IEEE Breaker Power supply ON FEE 4 Sink and MC source E Emergency input type 24V DC service Input extension power MC MC block supply mm dr 5V 0OV 24V output Special function block 5V oV 24V eum rrr pM rr a Class D Extension power supply unit EN grounding Power supply for loads to FX be connected to PLC output terminals l As for the details of emergency stop operation see DESIGN PRECAUTIONS i at Safety Precautions field Wiring precaution a OE Grounding and power cables should be positioned Sink and Input extension to exit the unit from above as shown in the figure source UI a input ES Groundi
151. time for Ch3 nea time for Ch3 ae time for Ch3 me time for Ch4 men time for Ch4 me time for Ch4 D 8298 Error status status Error status status Error status status Error status D 8299 Model code 1 Model code 2 EU code ia oa Model code 10 380 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 Operation and function FX3U 4AD PNK ADP LES analog special adapter Number 3E o3 o os Ch1 temperature IDEM measurement data 2 2 Ch2 temperature D 8281 es measurement data D D D 8282 Ch3 temperature lt measurement data D 8283 Ch4 temperature measurement data Averaging time for Ch1 poe 1 to 4095 T EE Averaging time for Ch2 eo Geo 1 to 4095 C Averaging time for Ch3 el e 1 to 4095 Sg Averaging time for Ch4 rcd 1 to 4095 B D 8288 Error status 5 D 8289 Model code K11 zi 2nd analog special adapter al Im 6 D 8290 Ch1 temperature E measurement data D 8294 Ch2 temperature measurement data D 8292 Ch3 temperature measurement data D 8293 Ch4 temperature measurement data Averaging time for Ch1 Deu 1 to 4095 Averaging time for Ch2 Sed 1 to 4095 Averaging time for Ch3 DONO 1 to 4095 Averaging time for Ch4 irr 1 to 4095 D 8298 Error status D 8299 Model code K11 381 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix
152. to be con 4 nected right side to the existing unit block A in the above figure 3 e When FX2N Series input output powered extension units or FX3U 1PSU 5V units are connected connect o the unit to be added right side and the existing unit left side with the supplied extension cable 5 Fit the top cover B in the above figure 333 8 6 7 Connecting method F connection of extension cable and FX2N CNV BC a This subsection explains the procedures for connecting an extension cable and FX2N CNV BC to the 6 extension cable of the powered extension unit block nui Separate the case of FX2N CNV BC into two 25 pairs as shown right S To separate the case use a precision flathead screw 7 driver a Slightly insert the tip of the screwdriver into the part A 28 shown in the right figure and the hook B in the right fig o ure will come off 4 places 2 Connect the extension cable on the upstream side C in the right figure uonejeisu Connect the extension cable on the down stream side D in the right figure 9 syy Fit the upper cover E in the right figure B ee and the lower cover F in the right figure a and press down the upper cover until it is 10 hooked 3 111 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 8 Connecting method G connection of input output powered extension unit 8 6 9
153. type suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue yoojg euw CO 225 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 1 Outline 226 3 For output extension Sink common Source common AAA AAA eee Model usc Number Common Toss Number Common fm yp of points system yp of points system Relay output type Dedicated to sink output only Dedicated to source output only FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output SF 16 2 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring z Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring El 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8ER ES UL lt lt Product type FX2N extension block a c d Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit c S 62 D 62 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8ER ES UL 1 4 MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs AZ The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 5 Other e Ac
154. unit OO The priority is set to each extension block to be connected and required to judge the possibility of 33 extension to the main unit The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to T the connection position S When the extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V is used and the nearest upstream unit to the extension power supply unit is the main unit the priority should be considered also for input 4 extension blocks including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER extended to the extension power M supply unit 2 Priority 3 Priority High Priority Low Output extension FX2N 8ER ES UL Input extension AA aia block FX2N 8ER block 5 gt gt gt Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 ES Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for all extension blocks in turn starting from the extension block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1 Consider that 16 input output points are provided in each of the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER Eight output points have higher prior ity over 8 input points Refer to the preceding subsection for judgment about the possibility of extension to the main unit Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible 7 Check using the quick reference matrix shown below whether the number of points whose exten 33 sion is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added using the 24V DC serv
155. width Pulse period measurement function D 80744 D 80754 D 80764 D 8077 D 80784 D 80794 D 80804 D 80814 D 80824 D 8083 4 D 80844 D 8085 4 D 8086 4 D 80874 D 80884 D 808974 D 80904 D 80914 D 80924 D 80934 D 8094 D 8095 4 D 8096 4 D 80974 Error Detection Refer to Subsection 14 6 3 for details Correspond ing special device Content of register 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN M8068 M8065 to M8067 Operation error step number latched Error step number of M8065 to M8067 eared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON eared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 22 F 3 ink Parallel link error time out check time 500ms Lower X000 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6us unit Lower X000 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6us unit X000 Pulse width Pulse period 10us unit Lower X001 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6us unit Lower X001 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6us unit X001 Pulse width Pulse period 10us unit Lower x003 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6us unit Lower x003 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6us unit X003 Pulse width Pulse period 10us unit Lower X004 Ring counter value for rising edge 1 6us unit Lower X004 Ring counter value for falling edge 1 6us unit Lower 1x004 Pulse width Pulse period 10us unit 0008d 0008IN sr1 uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds
156. 0 Output Y wiring connection or add the appropriate unit block e 1st to 3rd digits Device number Ath digit I O type 1 input X O output Y Example When 1020 is stored in D8060 Inputs X020 and later are unconnected Serial communication error 2 M8438 D8438 0000 BELLE No error 3801 Parity overrun or framing error 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 Continues 3807 operation 3808 3812 3813 3814 3820 PLC hardware error M8061 D8061 0000 WIEN No error 6101 RAM error Communication character error Communication data sum check error Inverter communication computer link and programming Communication data format error Ensure the communication parameters are correctly set according to their applications NN network parallel link etc Communication time out detected Check programs according to the applications Modem initialization error Remote maintenance Ensure modem power is ON and check the settings of the AT commands Parallel link character error Wiring Parallel link sum error Check the communication cables for correct wiring Command error N N network parameter error Parallel link format error Inverter communication error When memory casette is used make sure that the memory cassette is installed correctly 6102 6103 6104 Operation circuit error I O bus error M8069 ON Powered extension unit 24 V failure M8069 ON Check for the correct connection of e
157. 0 O ges m External External wiring wiring Load voltage 5 to 30V DC 1 6 0 5A point 1A point OS Resistance The total load current of resistance loads per common The total load current of resistance loads per common A S terminal should be the following value terminal should be the following value 5 e v 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less 4 output points common terminal 3A or less a ax load 12W 24V DC 24W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value be the following value 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or less 24V 4 output point common terminal 72W or less 24V Inductive load N So Open circuit 2 p 0 1mA 30V DC Os leakage current S Res orrFOoN 0 2ms or less 24V DC 0 3ms or less 24V DC ponse time OFF gt 0N 1 5ms or less 24V DC 4ms or less 24V DC Output element s 00 258 ON voltage S d Circuit isolation Photo coupler isolation T zi n operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel indicators poner NM 2 7W 112mA 24V DC 1 consumption D 5 w O 5 Q 77 pel e lt O o E D 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC yoo g jJeuiuJe 343 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 20 8 2 344 Interna
158. 00 Series Applicable This series is subject to the following restrictions when connected using unsupported standard monitor OS communication driver or option OS Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in the FX1N and FX1NC PLCs The list editor function for MELSEC FX is not available When using the list editor function for MELSEC FX upgrade the standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS to the version compatible with the FX3G PLC Check the applicability of other items in the GOT manual F940WGOT Not available The following restriction applies when connected F940GOT F940 Handy GOT Not available Contents of restrictions SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud ep O D e O A et o 2 o Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges F930GOT K Not available and program sizes available in the FX1N and FX1NC PLCs F920GOT K A gt For applicable models refer to the GOT manual 6 ET 940 Not available For connection using the 2 port interface function refer to Section 5 5 D a D 3 uoneJn6ijuo N The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges FX 10DM SETO Not ilabl Sheroliabie and program sizes available in the FX1N
159. 1 Specifications I T Eg Item Relay output 9220 O m Dw Ras 33 Oo ES Input output circuitry 1 5 CN1 mos Connector side gee 53 OS ne External wiring ses c amp Load voltage 250V AC or less 30V DC or less 2A point Max Resistance load The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value 1 6 load e 4 output points common terminal 8A or less zm Inductive load 80 VA 238 n Min load 5V DC 2mA Reference value E Open circuit leakage current Response time Approx 10ms 4 7 Circuit isolation Mechanical isolation com Operation indicators Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel oF QD Power consumption 1 92W 80mA 24V DC E O 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 w O 5 Q 77 pel e lt O o E D yoojg jJeuiuJe 339 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 2 Internal circuit poo 1 2 3 004 5 6 4401 2 3 444 5 6 7 za rearea es Tos 2 10712 E 14 16 E 19 12 9914 STE ODO to 007 Lower numbers AAO to A A7 Higher numbers 20 7 3 Example of output external wiring OOO to 007 Lower numbers A AO to A A7 Higher numbers id oo00 1 2 3 004 567 4401 2 3 444 5 6 7 Relay power supply Cres NI 5 leal cues a 5 T ps EHA _2 Teon aTe
160. 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF Incorrect connection of the power supply terminal contact of the DC input wire and power supply wire or 12 short circuiting of output wires may result in serious damage O Before applying power check that the power supply and ground terminals are connected correctly and input 3 output devices are wired properly 3 The dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance test of the PLC should be measured in accordance with the following procedures 1 3 1 Remove all input output wires and power supply wires from the PLC 2 Connect a crossing wire to each of the PLC terminals power supply terminal input terminals and output terminals except the SS ground terminal ea For the dielectric withstand voltage test of each terminal refer to the generic specifications for the product refer to Section 4 1 cS 3 Measure the dielectric withstand voltage and insulation resistance between each terminal and the ground terminal D Dielectric withstand voltage 1 5kV AC or 500V for 1min The terminals vary in dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance 500V DC 5MQ or more 14 1 2 Connection to built in programming connector RS 422 uny sa S9UBUAJUIE N Bunoouse qnoy 1 When connecting a peripheral device Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device At connection align the positioning mark between the cable and the main un
161. 2 Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 224 262 326 GUI S2fety Precautions AO Read these precautions before using 2 INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Reference e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 90 Failure to do so may cause electric shock 326 CAUTION a Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air Cl2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions e Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly to avoid failure or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Terminal block DIN rail DIN rail ony Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block and FX2N FX3U Series special DIN rail or direct mounting extension block special adapter Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Loose connections may cause malfunctions
162. 20 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 i Communication format setting Computer link ch2 iia Station number setting i RS2 FNC 87 ch2 1 D18422 Remaining points of transmit data MOTA RS2 FNC 87 ch2 1 D 8423 Monitoring receive data points di D 8424 Not used D 8425 Communication parameter display i ch2 pieza Computer link ch2 D 8427 Specification of on demand head device register Computer link ch2 D 8428 Specification of on demand data ae M8429 length register RS2 FNC 87 ch2 computer link D 8429 ch2 Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch2 PRESS Header 1 and 2 Default STX j RS2 FNC 87 ch2 id Header 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 ii Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch2 ego Terminator 3 and 4 i RS2 FNC 87 ch2 eae Receive sum received data RS2 FNC 87 ch2 ea Receive sum calculated result i D 8436 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Send sum Dj T Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Correspond Content of register ing special device Number and name Error Detection Error code for serial communication 2 D 8438 error 2 ch2 M8438 RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 D 8439 Operation mode display ch2 Error Detection D18440 t D18448 D 8449 Special block error code M8449 DIS450 o Djs Positioning D460 to D463 DSZR FNC150 and ZRN FNC 156 instructions Y000 Clear signal device specification DSZR FNC150 and ZRN FNC
163. 24V DC sink source input transistor source output N UT Oo 22 Zz VO 30 D v nD a and output points Number of input output points Connection Model name Total number Number of Number of Input type Output type Fm of points input points output points AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input FX3G 24MT ESS Transistor source Terminal block FX3G 40MR ES 24V DC sink source Terminal block FX3G 40MT ES 24V DC sink source Transistor sink Terminal block FX3G 40MT ESS 24V DC sink source Transistor source Terminal block jonpoud uononpoJu suoneooods I al UU lt FX3G 60MR ES 60 64 36 40 24V DC sink source Terminal block JE 2 oQ29 FX3G 60MT ES 60 64 36 40 24V DC sink source Transistor sink Terminal block e SD oa FX3G 60MT ESS 60 64 36 40 24V DC sink source Transistor source Terminal block 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points 6 Ow S zh o 23 a N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 33 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 2 Input output powered extension units 34 The input output powered extension unit incorporates a power supply circuit and input and output terminals It is designed to add inp
164. 24V DC service power supply of input output powered extension units SOWeN ed pue sanjea Current consumed by input output extension blocks and special function blocks OO The current consumption is determined differently in the following cases a2 e Inthe input output powered extension unit 5V DC and internal 24V DC are supplied via extension cables It SB is necessary to calculate the current consumption Subtract the current consumption of the internal 24V DC z5 from the 24V DC service power supply p e The special function units blocks connected to the AC power type main unit or to the 24V DC service power supply terminal of the input output powered extension unit consume the external 24V DC Include 4 the current in the calculation of current consumption D When the terminal is connected with an external power supply the current is not included in the calculation S of current consumption a 6 8 1 A Main units al A lt A Input output Output current mA 5 m a5 3 No Type Number of input SUD 8 z 2 output points 24V DC service power supply m points a points AC power supply type ce si 24 32 14 16 10 16 400 7 FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 40MT ES 40 24 16 62 FX3G 40MT ESS 53 O P FX3G 60MR ES FX3G 60MT ES 60 64 36 40 24 FX3G 60MT ESS 1 Each number inside indicates the number of occupied points Use numbers inside when calculating the total number of input output points
165. 286 TISA T A o A 286 194 2 T p Screen UME display o ee ia 286 TIAS Monu SCS OM A A E A AAA A AS 286 190 Meni ST CU o 287 190 Monitor Test ModE ida a a a Di lied 289 19 61 Relevant CCV ICOS ii id ia ad e aie le 289 19 5 2 MoORhItOr Mode ODE ra ii A Ni 290 19 6 3 Monitor screen and status display in 291 1964 Les Mode ONO lla T ig a a ge SM I LM 293 19 65 Test mode operatorn OCS EE E T to 296 Lo UA o GECE OE tiet zO de ee tr reer Cer reer etree rere 296 19 8 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting ooocccocooncncococcnncnnncnnonancconanonnnnanonnnonanonnos 297 19 81 Changing TO Japanese MEUS a an aly 297 19 8 2 Changing to English MenuS ooocccccccocnnncconoconoconononnnnnnnnnononncnnnnnnncnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnenss 298 19 8 3 D8302 changes by program and related Aevices ccococcccconncoconccnccnncncnnncnnconcncnnnnonnoncnnnnnnennns 298 TO HC OTnWdeboou ecc DI DUE RM Due C E E LIEN xc dh ee Cee 299 19 10 Clock Menu Current Time etnia Do RR a NU dap uude btc rue dis duis 300 19 10 1 Clock setting Procedure os dr ert ioci 0e oo e oo RP DE UR Ie reet dcin E icut a eeizewende adel te Tud 300 19 10 2 Displaying the current Ime sai deg omega fotu vau survie nica duse sos le 301 19 10 3 Changing the current time s Year from 2 digit format to 4 digit format 301 10 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents LM Y GY
166. 2L lt PLC Programs are read from the PLC s internal RAM memory to the memory cassette Required condition The PLC must be stopped and the PROTECT switch must be OFF Install the memory cassette on the main unit Refer to Section 21 3 for the installation procedure e Verify that the PLC power is OFF then install the memory cassette on the PLC MITSUBISHI Set the PROTECT switch to OFF oral 6 Turn the PLC power ON RD LED 70 Lene E 1 Jz OFF N Raise the memory cassette s eject lever RD key TO O Press the RD key 1 time The RD LED lights and a preparation status is established Tocancel press the WR key Press the RD key again Reading is executed and the RD LED blinks e t takes several seconds to read data from the built in EEPROM The RD LED flickers while data is read Remove the memory cassette from the main unit Reading is completed when the RD LED goes off After turning the PLC power OFF remove the memory cassette from the PLC then turn the PROTECT switch ON Refer to Section 21 4 for the removal procedure 21 8 Operation Precautions 358 Tapping screws provided for fixing the memory cassette Two types of longer and shorter M3 tapping screws are packed together with the memory cassette Read carefully the installation method described in Section 21 3 and use the proper type Number of available units Only one
167. 3 ON Up count operation E M 8254 C254 M 8255 C255 18256 o M18250 Analog Expansion Board Refer to Appendix A 3 for details M8260 to M8269 1st expansion board M8270 to M8279 2nd expansion board E Analog Special Adapter Refer to Appendix A 4 for details M8280 to M8289 1st special adapter 5 M8290 to M8299 2nd special adapter 1 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 2 st expansion board becomes an expansion board connected to BD connector of main units 14 24 point type or BD1 connector of main units 40 60 point type 3 2nd expansion board becomes an expansion board connected to BD2 connector of main units 40 60 point type 4 Connected analog special adapters are counted from the main unit side Real time clock data lost error M 8312 MIT to BO M 8329 Instruction execution abnormal end 5 Backed up against power interruption and automatically cleared when M8312 itself is cleared or when the clock data is set again 367 E o3 o os 0008a 0008W sr uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Correspond Correspond Number and A i Number and Operation and function ing special Operation and function ing special name devico vame device Positioning RS2 FNC 87
168. 3 Cautions in registering keyword 1 Cautions in registering keyword The keyword limits access to the program prepared by the user from peripheral devices Keep the keyword carefully If you forget the keyword you cannot operate the PLC online from the programming tool depending on the type of the programming tool and the registered keyword 2 Caution on using a peripheral device which does not support the second keyword and customer keyword Sequence programs in which the second keyword and customer keyword are registered cannot be all cleared using the programming tool GX Developer whose version is earlier than Ver 8 72A 3 Non resettable protect function When the non resettable protect function is set the protect function cannot be reset 201 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum mano N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA O c D nN p o o gt ES Q peJeMod adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 jd noandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems o
169. 5 16 17 00000000 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 MITSUBISHI MELSEG ME av POWO C O O C O RUNO ERRO ALMO FX3G FX3G 40M OUT 012394567 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PERF 1 00000000 1 AAA CC wu l 1 o io vis ore A A X October Y November Z December Year Example 2008 Last digit of year T Month Example Oct 1 to 9 January to September 52 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 1 Version Information 5 1 2 Version check method In FX3G PLCs users can obtain the PLC version information by monitoring special data register D8001 decimal number D8001 p D E PLC ype ang T Er Version information Example Ver 1 00 version PLC type Example 26 FX3G PLC 5 1 3 Version upgrade history FX3G Series performed the following upgrade Manufacturer s Version Contents of version upgrade serial number 86 Ver 1 00 June 2008 From first version e Supports following 15 instructions FLT FNC49 VRRD FNC85 VRSC FNC86 ECMP FNC110 EMOV FNC112 EADD FNC120 ESUB FNC121 EMUL FNC122 EDIV FNC123 ESQR FNC127 INT FNC129 IVCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 IVWR FNC273 e Supports connection of following expansion boards FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD e Supports connection of display module FX3G 5DM e Supports of the inverter communication function
170. 5 3932 332 2 For monitoring of up count down count counting direction of 1 phase 2 count input and 2 23 gt n O phase 2 count input counters o C246 M8246 H UE C247 M8247 Dc 225 1 phase 2 count input C248 M8248 o a E O C249 M8249 S 5 C250 M8250 i n i countin own countin C251 M8251 j 1 6 C252 M8252 cms 2 phase 2 count input C253 M8253 o oc MT C254 M8254 SS e C255 M8255 3 For switching high speed counter function N Device No Description Reference com 2 0 M8388 DC or changing higm speed counter Changes the function of high speed counter La function Do M8392 Function Function switching devices devices Switches the function of C248 and 253 the function of C248 and C253 Subsection 11 8 2 S M8395 A switching devices A the function of C254 Subsection 11 8 2 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 149 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 8 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 11 8 2 Function switching switching of allocation and functions of input terminals When the counters C248 C253 and C254 are combined with the following special auxiliary relays the allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed Program the special auxiliary relays just before the counters Counter No Function switching method Details of cha
171. 5 elo 3 SD TXD 88 315 9 8 4 ER DTR E gt 7 5 SG GND 15 o 2 J6 6 DR DSR 7 Not used lt 93 8 Not used 2 56 9 Notused ses SR 18 2 7 FX3u 485ADP MB 16 oms External Dimensions See 6 nO 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 80g 0 18lbs 58 e Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws mundo Accessories Label for indication of link station number SOR Manual supplied with product 92 Terminal block European type S e Terminal resistance 3300 1100 built in 9S9 Suo p Lm Qo X E 5 Terminal resistance 1 9 setting switch z 3300 OPEN 2 1100 D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 275 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 Expansion Board 18 3 1 FX3G 232 BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight 20g 0 O5lbs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product Connector RS 232C D SUB 9 pin male 51 2 2 02 35 1 38 5 2 12 0 21 0 48 Terminal Layout 12345 O0O0O00O0Oo0o00O O00 0 6789 SD TXD DTR Not used Not used Not used Oo o0 000 0nNg9 ep Q Q Z 18 3 2 FX3G 422 BD External Dimensions Unit mm inches e MASS Weight 20g 0 05Ibs
172. 50V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2A point Resistance load The total resistance load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less Max load 80VA Inductive load gt For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference values OFF ON Approx 10ms Response time ON OFF Approx 10ms DC power Output circuit configuration supply unit 16 2 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement Input numbers X are assigned to the upper four points and output numbers Y are assigned to the lower four points With cover Without cover FX2N 8ER ES O POWER Input indicator lamps LED lamps Output indicator lamps LED lamps Rear line extension connector 228 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 16 2 3 External dimensions oz o D 2 44 5 mounting holes Unitmm inches 2 O FX2N 8ER ES a O moO O POWER LO O ig OD o zi 5 Q e E S ala E o 5 5 Q E c 2 D 6 I Ex
173. 52 Without cover X X J tA THNO9 vA ZA T 0A KN gale 0000000 E E E Ejea as 00000000 o lt lo lt N lt O lt lt os lt o lt N ele E Y US Rear line extension connector Lower numbers Higher numbers O 48 ES ELS am ES EE o N O am ES a FE Re l O N FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 16 10 3 External dimensions oz gt 3 8 FX2N 8EYR a 2 44 5 mounting 4 9 i O lt c z amp FX2n 8EYR Saw O POWER LO O c 5668 Lo oO 00 3 13 E SS 23 cg s I FX2N 16EYR oLa 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches C 32m Ras 33 PES o 8 5 a oS a 1 5 o m mM US Co Eh DONIS 5 FE c 3 oe O 2 5 c c a 17 yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 253 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external w
174. 62 O gt lt o o D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 277 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 3 Expansion Board User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 3 5 FX3G 1DA BD External Dimensions e MASS Weight 20g 0 05Ibs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Manual supplied with product Terminal block European type Unit mm inches 51 2 2 02 Terminal Layout 4 fs BEE Ld 5 poles 18 3 6 FX3G 8AV BD External Dimensions e MASS Weight 20g 0 05Ibs Accessories Two M3x8 tapping screws for installation of board Side cover Trimmer layout label Manual supplied with product Unit mm inches 51 2 2 02 Trimmer Layout i ear i 278 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 4 Power Supply 18 4 Power Supply SF 2 18 4 1 FX2N 20PSU External Dimensions Terminal Layout 12 2 04 5 A E mounting holes o E O 8 13 moO s 2 33 e c 5o co lt ES Oe D m 2m 3 7 ajajaja E joe fene 14 gt 4 0 16 92 2 05 9 0 36 zs mounting hole pitch 75 2 96 53 60 2 37 E 3 5 MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs a e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws 1 5 Accessories Manual supplied with
175. 6601 Model FX P3 E Details of sequence program Expansion board Special adapters FX3G FX3u Including basic and applied instructions and various devices eAnalog FX3UC eCommunication LI separate H manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be He available in or after September 2008 User s Manual Analog Control Edition JY997D16701 Model FX3U U ANALOG E Details of analog special function FX3G FX3U blocks and analog special adapters FX3UC separate manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be As for FX2N Series refer to individual available in or after September 2008 manuals Options User s Manual Data Communication Edition luses eDisplay module JY997D16901 Model FX U COMMU E eMemory cassette eBattery Details of simple link between PCs parallel link computer link no FX protocol communication and separate programming communication manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be available in or after September 2008 Manuals supplied with product User s Manual Positioning Control Edition JY997D16801 Model FX3U U POS E Details of wiring instructions and FX3G FX3U operations of positioning functions in FX3UC PLC main unit Each product comes with the installation manual or the User s Manual except the input output powered extension units blocks Installation manual The part names installation procedures and specifications are s
176. 6EYR ES UL 1 3 Product type FX2N extension block lt lt v Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit Sc 0 ee 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44Ibs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block I Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number 338 The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation gee 25 3 Output specifications Relay output type 3 Item FX2N 16EYR ES UL 1 Output Points 16 points 9 Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws A el 3 Output type Relay 2 d O ges External power supply id De ecu S 5 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards ar Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2A point The total resistance load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less Resistance load Max load e 8 output points common 8A or less 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 1 T Open circuit leakage current R S d x So Min load 5V DC 2mA reference values e mo OFF ON Appr
177. 9 and D8280 to D8299 Appendix A 4 2 Special data registers D8280 to D8299 Operation and function FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT W ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP 1st analog special adapter D 8280 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch1 Cur RETE nuu Siu emper measurement data measurement data D 8281 Input data Ch2 Output data Ch2 Cne temperature Cne temperature measurement data measurement data D 8282 Input data Ch3 Output data Ch3 Ome enpera Cae ae re measurement data measurement data D 8283 Input data Ch4 Output data Ch4 ale ES measurement data measurement data Prae time for Ch1 Did time for Ch1 Bap time for Ch1 uu time for Ch2 m time for Ch2 uu time for Ch2 cce time for Ch3 vg time for Ch3 ae time for Ch3 Number versos time for Ch4 time for Ch4 a time for Ch4 D 8287 to 4095 b dud 1 to 4095 1 to 4095 D 8288 Error status status Error status status Error status status Error status D 8289 Model code 1 Model code 2 TA eo o Model code 10 2nd analog special adapter D 8290 Input data Ch1 Output data Ch Chi em beta Ute oni temporaire measurement data measurement data D 8291 Input data Ch2 Output data Ch2 E els measurement data measurement data D 8292 Input data Ch3 Output data Ch3 OS SS measurement data measurement data D 8293 Input data Ch4 Output data Ch4 Cie temperare A de measurement data measurement data Oe time for Ch1 nee time for Ch1 Piu time for Ch1 ee time for Ch2 nee time for Ch2 ae time for Ch2 re
178. 9 x et values for the timer counter data register extended register and Requires program Section 19 18 HL display setting i oc extended file register to a hexadecimal display format x 1 There is no test function for Input X 2 A sequence program is required to enable a hexadecimal display of the timer T counter C data register file register D 16 bit 32 bit extended register R 16 bit 32 bit and extended file register ER 16 bit 32 bit current values So A Refer to Section 19 19 for the setting procedure o 2 3 When no setting is made within a program the screen saver function becomes effective after 10 n minutes Refer to Section 19 15 for screen saver function 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 62 pel D lt O 2 e D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 285 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 4 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the 194 Procedure for Accessing the Menu Screen from the Title Screen All operation explanations and display screen examples in this manual are in English When the menu display language is set to Japanese please convert the screen messages to their Japanese translations gt Refer to Section 19 20 for the Japanese and English display character correspondence table Refer to Section 19 8 for menu display language setting 19 4 1 Title scree
179. AC 4 5 2 FX Series terminal blocks mi gt For the applicable models refer to Chapter 3 Sr The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 SEE operations at 35VA c The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test a Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF 1 6 Load capacity Contact life S 58 0 35A 100V AC BRO 35VA 3 000 000 times Ss 0 17A 200V AC 0 8A 100V AC 80VA 1 000 000 times 0 4A 200V AC 1 7 1 2A 100V AC 120VA 200 000 times cum 0 6A 200V AC 22 S The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush EE overcurrent is shut down Please refer to the following measures regarding the inductive load For precautions on the main unit Input output extension units Input output extension block refer to Subsection 12 1 3 2 For precautions on inductive loads for the terminal block refer to Subsection 20 7 4 2 some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 187 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 M
180. B 20 6 2 Internal circuit W W Photo r 1 Photo coupler i 1 coupler Hu 0 m 1 m 1 Photo Photo coupler coupler OOo toWU3 O04 toL1L17 AA0t0AA3 AA4to AAT7 O00 to 0017 Lower numbers A A0 to AA7 Higher numbers 20 6 3 Example of input external wiring PLC input No LILO to L1L13 0014 toL 1L 7 AAO0toAA3 AA4to AA7 Photo couple i power supply Amred eam leare Top Saja ajaja ajaj Y 100 to 120V AC 24V DC 338 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 FX 16EYR TB OF The FX 16EYR TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor 2 Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output 1 2 e The applications shown below are not supported B Unsupported Applications E Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction pulse outputs absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output 13 PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction lt lt CON Time division inputs Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Eu Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction cg D 62 20 7
181. B Unsupported Applications E High speed processing High speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instruction Time division inputs Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction 1 3 Other Absolute current value read ABS instruction E O 5 m m m o 20 6 1 Specifications SE D 62 Item AC Input Type I 3238 s25 225 E CN1 100V S3 Input output circuitry Connector AC el amp side a Terminal block 1 5 External wiring ds M OO Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC 10 15 50 60Hz o y l 4 7mA 100V AC 50Hz Sas Input signal current 6 2mA 110V AC 60Hz E gt nnutinbedance Approx 21kQ 50Hz ui gt Approx 18kQ 60Hz 1 6 A inm 3 8mA 80V AC or more E nput sensitivity 23 OFF 1 7mA 30V AC or more 2g Response time 25 to 30ms o amp Input signal format Voltage contact Circuit isolation Photocoupler isolation Input operation display No input LEDs equipped with 24V power supply LED indicator 1 7 Power consumption 1 2W 48mA 24V DC Lu d f 2 0 1 This response time does not include the response delay at the PLC zu O a c 2 3 9W 160mA 24V DC is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C S lt 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 w O 5 Q 77 pel e lt O o E D yoojg jeuiuJe 337 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 6 FX 16EX A1 T
182. B Instruction List Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions Appendix B Instruction List Appendix B 1 Basic Instructions Mnemonic Function Contact Instruction Initial logical operation contact type NO normally open Initial logical operation contact type NC normally closed Initial logical operation of Rising edge pulse Initial logical operation of Falling trailing edge pulse Serial connection of NO normally open contacts Serial connection of NC normally closed contacts Serial connection of Rising edge pulse Serial connection of Falling trailing edge pulse Parallel connection of NO normally open contacts Parallel connection of NC normally closed contacts Parallel connection of Rising edge pulse Parallel connection of Falling trailing edge pulse Connection Instruction Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions Serial connection of multiple parallel circuits Parallel connection of multiple contact circuits Stores the current result of the internal PLC operations Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations Pops recalls and removes the currently stored result Invert the current result of the internal PLC operations Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse Mnemonic Function Out Instruction OUT Final logical operation type coil drive SET SET Bit device latch ON RST RESET Bit device OFF PLS Rising edge pulse PLF Falling t
183. Changes for the Better e MITSUBISHI i PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS MEUS EC GUI S2cty Precautions NN NND Read these precautions before using Before installation operation maintenance or inspection of this product thoroughly read through and understand this manual and the associated manuals Also take care to handle the module properly and safely This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories gt DANGER and ACAUTION Q DAN G E R Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight CAU TIO N personal injury or physical damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by NCAUTION may also cause severe injury In any case it is important to follow all usage directions Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Reference e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock ci
184. Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses SE DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower O O S positioning limits S 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off o8 Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be ec disabled D 62 External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled I External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case a 2 Note that when
185. D Procedures for handling the 8 ch analog input special with JY992D86001 function block to be used also for thermocouple 09R608 User s Manual product input 22 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals code a Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special E FX3U 4AD ADP PO a User s Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series product l User s Manual Analog Control Edition Suela Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature 2 pp FX3U 4AD PT ADP sensor input special adapter um with JY997D14701 i mo User s Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series 25 product E User s Manual Analog Control Edition 28 Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature o zi m FX3U 4AD PTW ADP JY997D29101 sensor input special adapter i rm User s Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series P User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Supplied FX2N 4AD PT Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt100 temperature with JY992D65601 E 38 User s Guide sensor input special function block ae product cg Supplied EX 3U AAD PNK ADP Procedures for handling the 4 ch Pt1000 Ni1000 E with JY997D29201 User s Manual temperature sensor input special adapter product Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch thermocouple input 4 PP FX3U 4AD TC ADP s
186. E C ts directly t ees NEVIS EX2N 16EX C sink input 32 input points PLC input output 1 FX2N 16EYT C sink output FX 32E TB 32 output points terminals 1 3 or 16 input amp 16 output points FX 16EX A1 TB 2 EE A 100V AC input type FX2N 16EX C sink input 4 5 O gt FX 16EYR TB O Relay output type FX2N 16EYT C sink output 24V DC 80mA a 5 m FX 16EYS TB ENEMIES Triac output type FX2N 16EYT C sink output PIR P zi EXAGEYT H TB 3 16 Transistor output sink FX2N 16EYT C sink output 24V DC 3 sp type 112mA c 2 1 225 P EO E 1 A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C 83 The current consumption is shown in the table below Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption 1 5 FX2N 16EX C 24V DC 112mA ae n See 2 The applications shown below are not supported 225 Oo c Unsupported Applications E gt nl ee High speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instruction i processing 4 6 TAE viso Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction inputs ee ey Oo 20 Other Absolute current value read ABS instruction a B S m 35 3 The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction batch data positioni
187. ED lights Input impedance RUN terminal setting X000 to X017 up to the largest input number in the main unit of the main unit can be used as RUN input terminals by setting parameters 1 X000 to X007 in the FX3G 14ML1I main unit and X000 to X015 in the FX36G 24ML main unit For the functions of the RUN terminals refer to Subsection 14 2 1 Input circuit Function of input circuit The primary and secondary circuits for input are insulated with a photocoupler and the second circuit is provided with a C R filter The C R filter is designed to prevent malfunctions caused by chattering of the input contact and noise from the input line There is a delay of approx 10ms in response to input switching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON Change of filter time X000 to X007 have digital filters and the filter time can be changed in increments of 1ms in the range from 0 to 15ms through special data register D8020 When 0 is specified for the time the input filter values are set as shown in the following table Input number Input filter value when 0 is specified X000 X001 X003 X004 10us X002 X005 X006 X007 50us FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 3 Input sensitivity The PLC input current and input sensitivity are shown in the following table When there is a series diode or resistance at the input contact o
188. EJ 4 i 9 4 6 9 9 6 9 Units mm inches Accessories Input output No labels terminal block arrangement cards No Remarks 1 CN1 connector 5 2 CN2 connector Present at FX 32bE TB Present at FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB 3 Operation indicator LED FX T6EYT H TB 4 POWER LED Present at FX 16EX A1 TB 5 CN2 terminal block M3 5 screws Present at FX 32E TB 6 CN1 terminal block M3 5 screws 7 Nameplate 8 DIN rail mounting groove DIN rail width 35mm 1 38 9 DIN rail mounting hook 330 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 3 Terminal Layout 20 3 Terminal Layout QE 1 FX 16E TB When connected to the FX2N 16EYT C _7 MITSUBISHI FX 16E TB 1 2 O E l O dede 2 Arrate o zi O sz O gt c oQ 0 ee di P Qo MITSUBISHI FX 16E TB ARRE dh I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 2 FX 32bE TB When connected to the FX2N 16EYT C Lower numbers Higher numbers peJeMod jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 indinomdu C a CES UU 9j E Higher numbers yu jddns Jamog CN1 UOISU9
189. EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input 16 7 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL Product type FX2N extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 8EX UA1 UL Input points 8 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Input form AC input Input signal voltage 100 to 120V AC Input signal current 6 2mA 110V AC 60Hz 4 7mA 100V AC 50Hz Approx 21kQ 50Hz Approx 18kQ 60Hz ON input Input ON current 3 8mA 80V AC or more sensitivity current Input OFF current 1 7mA 30V AC or more Input impedance Input response time Approx 25 to 30ms Input signal form Voltage contact Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input 100 to 120V AC Photocouple
190. Edition 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation s 4 6 External Dimensions Weight Accessories Installation uononpou The external dimensions of the main unit are explained 4 6 1 Main units N 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches S WEN Hed pue sanjea X21 X23 X25 X27 X22 X24 X26 00000000 0123456 7 OO jonpoud zy a O e Q p o 2 Y14 Y16 Y15 Y17 E O a O lt D G 5 O E Co N co N co UU W1 mounting hole pitch Series W mm inches W1 mm inches MASS weight kg Ibs suoneouioeds FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 14MO FX3G 14MT ES 90 3 55 82 3 23 0 50 1 10 Ibs FX3G 14MT ESS 5 FX3G 24MR ES lt FX3G 24MO FX3G 24MT ES 90 3 55 82 3 23 0 55 1 21lbs 3 2 t ZET FX3G 24MT ESS 83S a FX3G 40MR ES a FX3G 40MO FX3G 40MT ES 130 5 12 122 4 81 0 70 1 54 Ibs FX3G 40MT ESS 6 FX3G 60MR ES ae FX3G 60MO FX3G 60MT ES 175 6 89 167 6 58 0 85 1 87 Ibs S pi FX3G 60MT ESS S 1 Accessories S Dust proof protection sheet Manual supplied with product 7 2 Installation z5 35mm 1 38 wide DIN rail or Direct installation with screws M4 x 2 oS 3E zc P gt e v D s FE 338 oz 38 lt 5 a 5 O Z 49 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 7 Terminal Layout 4 7 Terminal Layout
191. FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3G x x MT ES Where xx indicates 14 24 40 60 FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP from April 1st 2007 from December 1st 2007 from November 1st 2008 FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G EEPROM 32L FX3G CNV ADP FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD FX3G 5DM from December 1st 2008 FX3G MR ES Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 from March 1st 2009 FX3G x MI ESS Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 Standard Remark EN61131 2 2003 Programmable controllers Equipment requirements and tests Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EMI Radiated Emissions Conducted Emissions EMS Radiated electromagnetic field Fast transient burst Electrostatic discharge High energy surge Voltage drops and iterruptions Conducted RF Power frequency magnetic field FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Models from July 1st 1997 FX2N x ER ES UL Where x x indicates 32 48 FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL from August 1st 1998 from August 1st 2005 For the products above PLCs manufactured FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 8EX ES UL MELSEC FX2N series manufactured FX2N Xx X ET ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL before March 31st 2002 are compliant with EN50081 2 EN61000 6 4 and EN50082 2 from April 1st 2002 to April 30th 2006 are compliant with EN50081 2 EN61000 6 4 and EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000
192. Information Operation button ON OFF information can be monitored at the system information system signal 2 MA A 4 to MA A 7 while the PLC is running Various applications of this function are described below Refer to Section 19 13 for system information setting 19 17 1 Various applications 1 Operation button function checks The programming tool can be used to monitor the system information s system signal 2 operation button ON OFF information to verify that operation buttons are functioning properly 2 Specified device monitor function device changes Devices handled in the specified device monitor function can be changed over by using both the specified device monitor display status and operation button ON OFF information in the system information system signal 2 Refer to Section 19 14 for the specified device monitor function setting procedure 19 17 2 System information operation button ON OFF information 1 System signal 1 System signal 1 has no system information related to this function 2 System signal 2 System Information Status Description ESC button is pressed MA A 4 ESC button is not pressed button is pressed button is not pressed button is pressed MA A 6 button is not pressed OK button is pressed MA A 7 F OK button is not pressed MA A 5 321 SJojunoo mm peads ybiH Buum mano N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA dh I
193. M8076 M8080 M8077 M8081 M8078 M8082 M8079 M8083 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Memory Information D 8101 0 BCD converted PLC type and 1 value f system version a FX3G sici n 1 00 PLC D 8102 i 16 16K steps 32 32K steps D 8103 to D 8108 Number of special function blocks i connected 371 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and Correspond Content of register ing special name device Output Refresh Error D 8109 Y number where output refresh M8109 error occurs DE RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 RS FNC 80 instruction and D 8120 computer link ch1 Communication format setting D 8121 Computer link ch1 i 8 Station number setting RS FNC 80 instruction 2 D16122 Remaining points of transmit data MAE RS FNC 80 instruction 2 D 8123 Monitoring receive data points menes RS FNC 80 instruction ples Header lt Default STX gt RS FNC 80 instruction ee Terminator lt Default ETX gt i Disiza Computer link ch1 D 8127 Specification of on demand head device register Computer link ch1 D 8128 Specification of on demand data gites M8129 length register RS FNC 80 instruction computer D 8129 link ch 1 Time out time setting eT Latch device 2 Cleared whe
194. N 0 CV 1000 Specified C200 to C255 CN CV 1000 Specified 314 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 5 Input X Output Y Auxiliary Relay M State S X010 34567 Specified M1000 34567 Specified 19 14 8 Test operation on specified device monitor screen To perform the test operation on the specified device monitor screen it is necessary to turn ON MA A in the system information system signal 2 The device test operation is same as the operation in the monitor test mode Refer to Subsection 19 6 1 for the operation method 315 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum mano N 10 Buum OO Ses SNOEN I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 suondo pue sun gt uoisuex3 sayo OO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 15 Screen saver function 19 15 Screen saver function The screen saver function displays the dedicated screen to prevent burning of the screen when a key operation is not given for the specified time in the display module For the screen saver function set the screen save
195. N N Network M8160 LE M 8161 1 8 bit process mode M 8181 Not used M 8162 High speed parallel link mode E M 8182 M 8163 i M 8183 Data communication error M 8164 Master station Data communication error M 8165 Not used M 8184 Slave station No 1 MIE Top MI8185 Data communication error M 8167 Slave station No 2 SMOV FNC 13 instruction Data communication error 1 is HEX data handling function Lo dde Slave station No 3 E Metz Data communication erro D8218 4 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN AVE SAONO A 2 Applicable to RS FNC 80 ASCI FNC 82 HEX FNC 83 M 8188 Data communication error and CCD FNC 84 instructions Slave station No 5 Data communication error Pulse Catch oho Slave station No 6 M 8170 Input X000 pulse catch B IM 8190 Data communication error M 8171 Input X001 pulse catch Slave station No 7 E M 8191 Data communication in execution M 8172 2 Input X002 pulse catch M 8192 M 8173 Input X003 pulse catch MIS193 M 81 74 3 Input X004 pulse catch M 81 94 M 8175 Input X005 pulse catch M 8195 ot use M 8176 M 8196 Not used M 8177 M 8197 3 Cleared when PLC switches from STOP to RUN M 8198 i M 8199 5 Communication Port Channel Setting Parallel link channel switch OFF ch1 ON ch2 N N network channel switch 4 4 The channel is specified by either creating or not creating M8179 in setting program ch1 not creating
196. NGUAGE language selection screen j To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time as eee display press ESC English 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to English To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Moves the cursor upward Moves the cursor downward OK Registers the selected display language and returns to the menu screen 3 Press OK to register the selected display language and return to the menu screen 19 8 3 D8302 changes by program and related devices Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302 A Language setting of 1 is specified at factory default D8302 changes by user program can also be specified D8302 1 Current Value Display Language When the display language is set to Japanese KO Japanese M8002 Other English 1 Latch device 298 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 9 Contrast 199 Contrast The liquid crystal display contrast setting is specified at the Contrast menu Selections made at this menu are saved at D8302 A contrast setting of 0 is specified at factory default 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Contrast item then press OK to display the contrast Contrast adjustment screen To cancel the oper
197. NO 0 APA PE e o ER E E E CO a LE esee nei R IS 302 19 13 1 Keyword tyDes arid levels sii A bes 302 19 11 2 Level specific restrictions screen liSt ococonccccconnccconnnoconnncconnnnnconnnononnnnnnonnnononnnnonananenoss 302 T9 11 9 ISe O E AAA a MUEKE Edd Rad da gb Cond bee A O na d uod du 303 19 11 4 Screens requiring keyword for ACCESS oocccccccooccncononconnonnnnnnnonnnoncnnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnrnnonennrnnnnnarins 303 19 1120 Canceling a KeyWord sca one Ere Ra ERE Ue ellos top ee ee Uo e need 304 1951145 Enabling a keyword vices airline Rola Dr sab E De TU bd et dai 305 19 12 Memory Cassette TTADsters ie Edu ca oa tae ead inda used cete acude Uds d deese 306 19 12 1 Transfer from internal EEPROM to memory cassette Cassette lt PLC 306 19 12 2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal EEPROM Cassette gt PLC 307 19 13 System Information Restrictions From PLC ooocccooccnccncccnnonoccnconononnnnononnnnanonnononononnanennnnanennos 309 LINES Y SISMO Mato iS s sae e usen bcn onse b ppc eds lao cn uai Gs eas Cue UdU E 309 19 13 2 System information setting program example ooooccccccocccnccnnocnnccconconnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnonancnnnos 309 19 14 Specified Device Monitor FUNCH ION ccoocccconcncccncnconcnnnonnnononnnnonnnonnnnnnonnnonnnnnnonnnononnnonncnnnonons 310 19 14 1 System information specified device monitor function ooocccccoccccnco
198. Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X Y If input output powered extension units blocks have been connected when the power is turned on the main unit automatically assigns the input output numbers X Y octal to the units blocks Therefore it is unnecessary to specify the input output numbers with parameters Accordingly it is not necessary to specify input output numbers using parameters It is necessary to assign input and output numbers in the following special function blocks FX2N 64CL M Concept of assigning 84 When the power is turned on input output numbers X Y are assigned in accordance with the following rules In the FX2N 64CL M input output numbers are assigned to connected remote input output stations For details on assignment refer to the FX2N 64CL M manual Input output numbers X Y are octal Octal numbers are assigned as input output numbers X Y as shown below X000 to X007 X010 to X017 X020 to X027 X070 to X077 X100 to X107 YO000 to YOO7 YO10 to YO17 YO20 to YO27 YO7O to YO77 Y100 to Y 107 Unused numbers Note that unused numbers which cause the difference between the number of occupied points and the number of effective points are generated when the following products are used
199. PASSES a y y3 9 39 Please wait 00 OO E ne Cassette PC XE eye PC pide d A y yjqyfi19 Please wait o o O TIJIRA 39073 Transfer Cassette lt PC completed Cassette gt PC 77099 49799 Transfer failed Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 325 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 Terminal Block DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER e Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also wh
200. PLC 58 1 GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later supports the FX3G Series 3 Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later 4 1 Select Online Transfer setup to open the Transfer setup dialog box 3 2 Double click Serial in PC side I F to open the PC side I F Serial setting dialog box 3 Select USB GOT Transparent mode Transfer Setup PC side I F m Serial CCIE Cont NET II CC Link Ethernet PLC USB NET 10 H board board board board board PLC side I F PC side I F Serial setting RS 232C include FX USB Aw FX3U USB BD USB GOT transparent mode CD lt 27 Lo Other C USB Built in port station i Mo specification O COM port COM 1 PLC direct coupled setting Time out Sec 110 C E Transmission speed 115 2Kbps onnection test PLC type C24 EEE NET II CC Link Ethernet S E m p U S B G OT BE System image transparent mode Co existence network route TEL FXCPU C24 CCIE Cont NET II CC Link Ethernet NET 10 H uoneinByuoy j OK Accessing host station SON JUN SON jndinondu A display screen is the example of Ver 8 72A 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting uonejesu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 59 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 5 Cautions on using tr
201. Product specifications a ad Rp dote LEE 227 16 2 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent occccoonccnncccnccnnonnnccnnnnnnnnnonnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnoncnnnns 228 16 23 EXtemalrdimensiOnS sii o oi ies 229 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output coooccccoccnccoccccoccnccoccnconcnoconcnonncnonononcnncnonononos 230 16 91 pelo Me o A DLE 230 16 3 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent occccoonccnnccncccnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononncnnns 231 16 33 EM Na IMEI a o bo lo 232 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input 233 16 4 4 Product SOCCIICATIONS elder 233 16 4 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent occccoonncnnccccccnncnnnccnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnanccnnns 234 16 4 3 External dimensions cccccceccccseecceceeceececeuceceueecaueceeueeceueceuaescueessacecsueesaasesaeeessesesaueessaeensaees 235 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C oocoocccoccccoccconccoocnconcncncnconcncnonnonnnonnnnoncncnnnnoncnconnnnnonos 236 1625 1 ProductspeciiCallOllS cua e oe AA 236 16 5 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent occccoonncnnccncccnnonnncnnnnnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnononnnnnns 237 16 553 ExterhabdimerisloFpiS riesen ade 238 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 16 6 FX2N 16EXL C 5V DC Input 16 POIN S ooccccocccccccncccccncco
202. R FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET FX2N 32ET 4 2 Classification FX2N powered extension unit O Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC S Allowable supply voltage range 85 to 264V AC Rated frequency 50 60 Hz E Power fuse 250V 3 15A 3A 5 x 20mm 0 79 250V 5A 54 x 20mm 0 79 100V AC Up to 40A 5ms or less Rush current 00VAC i 1 3 200V AC Up to 60A 5ms or less lt lt Power consumption 30W PF 90OW 38VA 35W 45VA a c d nm ion extension 24V DC 250mA or less 24V DC 460mA or less ES 24V DC service o When input output extension blocks are connected 24V DC service power is consumed by ower suppl p nnb With extension block them 14 gt For details refer to Chapter 6 Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw 3 D Item FX2N 48ER UA1 UL m5 Classification FX2N powered extension unit 2 2 Q Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC Allowable supply voltage range 85 to 264V AC Power fuse 250V 5A 5 x 20mm 0 79 mos Up to 40A 5ms or less TS Rush current Sue Up to 60A 5ms or less Power consumption 35W 45VA J 24V DC service power supply None Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw 1 6 S 23 15 2 1 Weight accessories etc 25 item FX2N 32ER ES UL ER FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ER EX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET mundo j MASS Weight 0 65kg 1 43 Ibs 0 85kg 1 87 Ibs 1 00kg 2 2 Ibs com Terminal protective cover 2 pcs 7
203. Remove the part B shown in the right figure SUBS using a snipper etc Caution Removal of the part B is not necessary when the connector conversion adapter is used together and the main unit is the 14 24 point type Attach the display module to the option connector of the expansion board connector conversion adapter Attach the display module to the option connector D in the figure on the right of the expansion board connector conver sion adapter while pressing and holding the display module fixing hook C in the figure on the right as shown in the right figure arrow 4 Remove the display module while pressing and holding the display module fixing hook C in the figure on the right as shown in the right figure arrow 4 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 3 Summary of Functions 19 3 Summary of Functions E The display module functions are summarized below A Displays the time indicated by the main unit s internal real time Subsection 12 Top screen time display Button operation clock 19 4 2 O Menu screen functions B Input 097 output Y auxiliary relay M state S timer T i Fi Monitor Test counter C data register D 16 bit 32 bit extended register R Button operation Section 19 6 o 16 bit 32 bit and extended file register ER 16 bit 32 bit monitor test function 1 3 ErrorCheck Performs error
204. Response time Output circuit configuration ON gt 0FF Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N extension block 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 0 2kg 0 44Ibs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transistor output type FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL 8 points 16 points Vertical terminal block M3 screws Transistor source output 5 to 30V DC Photo coupler insulation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5A point The total load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 0 8A or less e 8 output points common 1 6A or less 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 19 2W or less 24V DC e 8 output points common terminal 38 4W or less 24V DC 0 1mA 30V DC 0 2ms or less for 200mA at 24V DC 0 2ms or less for 200mA at 24V DC A common number applies to the LJ of V FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks
205. Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Examples of External Wiring 9 44 An external wiring example for the extension power supply unit sink input common O o This example shows a sink input wiring common including the extension power supply unit When adding an a input extension block check the signal name on the terminal block since the sink source type and sink type j differ from each there Sink and source input type AC power supply of 2 ee D 100 to 240V m grounding a 5U0V24V Special adapter zc E ae a ne ee Breaker ca sa Class D grounding Power supply ON 3 mu i Mc E S Sink and MC o Source Emergency input Mi stop type 24V DC 3 4 service Input extension power E block supply 3 output 4 Class D grounding 5 block oc Te 29 is o Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC E output terminals 6 Lo As for the details of emergency stop S operation see DESIGN as RN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions si field S Class D Pa Wiring precaution l grounding MN Grounding and power cables should be positioned apelante on a to exit the unit from above as shown in the figure T x mn RT oa vasi a v l jo 5VOV 24V E lt Gr
206. Ses snoueA I zm oD Dn SiS X EN 090 2 5 O O S d Q mM US Aou O c 2opc 2 oO Ooc 2 3 S a op 17 yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C 16 5 FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX and FX2N 16EX C 16 5 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C Product type FX2N extension block REN ne extension Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other e Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Input specifications Item FX2N 8EX FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N connector type extension Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws block Input form Sink
207. Specified device monitor screen example X010 34567 Specified A d OES o P A tt te Monitor Testz ErrorCheck LANGUAGE Contrast ClockMenu Keyword Cassette LANGUAGE Japanese o 7 meng ish 297 SJojunoo mm peads ybiH Buum mano N 10 Buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 peJeMod adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoo g UOISU9 X3 indinoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO ginpoy e dsiq 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 8 LANGUAGE Menu Display Language Setting 4 Use the buttons to move the cursor to Japanese To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Moves the cursor upward Moves the cursor downward OK Registers the selected display language and returns to the menu screen 5 Press OK to register the selected display language and return to the menu screen 19 8 2 Changing to English menus Refer to 19 8 1 Changing to Japanese menus for the access procedure from the title screen 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the LANGUAGE item then press OK to display the display LA
208. TSUBISHI 35333332 1 2217 E WASE FXA MER ang er Link suo msg PRO E UNO 3 29 E UE Input output powered IB Special function blocks oe Input output FX3U 4AD FX2N 16CCL M FX3U 4DA FX2N 32CCL FX2N 32ER ES UL FXsu 64CCL FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 2AD FX2N 64CL M FX2N 48ER UA1 UL FX2N 2DA FX2N 32ER FX2N AAD FX2N 48ER _FXon 4AD TC FX2N 4AD PT PARER FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A FX2N 32ET ESS UL To Network FX2N A8E T ESS UL E c FX2N 32bET 2N FX2N ABET Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V O Power supply unit The configuration is remote I O for CC Link PX2N 20PSU N Remote O WA FX Series terminal block 32 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names muda 3 1 1 Main units uononpou The main unit incorporates a CPU memory input and output terminals and power supply To establish a system at least one main unit is necessary FX3G C C M Incorporating power supply CPU memory and input output Series name num supply Input output type Connection on terminal block e R ES AC power supply 24V DC sink source input Relay output Total number of input Main anit e T ES AC power supply 24V DC sink source input transistor sink output e T ESS AC power supply
209. The following is a list of error messages which the system displays after an operation is performed 2 Relevant Menu Screen English Japanese Corrective Action This operation J 297 AE 1 2 e All menus is protected N 23y7 Cancel the keyword then attempt the operation again by the keyword Id 9574NA E t 9 N Mry74 No keyword has been registered The keyword HLTA TRY Keyword cannot be registered from the display module A is not set programming tool such as GX Developer etc is required Keyword to register keyword cota 4 0 N 7497 The entered keyword does not match the registered 1 3 keyword Verify the registered keyword then enter the Keyword lt lt correct keyword mz O gt e aniteries PLC is running RUNF197 A Stop the PLC then attempt the operation again dl 4 D Vidi nhi c e Pasos XEYALY Ma Turn the memory cassette s write protected status to i emory cassette transfer yy wiltesproteciad NIST A OFF then attempt the operation again 4 4 ao 71 5 15 Fatal error setting change For details refer to Subsection 19 19 1 ze occurred Nye4F17 Sag Memory cassette transfer s23 p 5c idis Rar Sans EY ACY NI Turn the PLC power OFF install the memory cassette 33 VIF tLT Ve i i HANE HE Jr v79VU7T4NVP then attempt the operation again E e Memory cassette transfer T The Keyword 74J EEPROM Remove the memory cassette restart the unit power 5 is set in the th Jj OFF gt 0N then use the prog
210. Tunit output Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main unit The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to the connection position from the main unit as shown below Priority Input extension Special function Output extension Special function Output extension Main unit block block block block block 8 points FX3U 64CCL 8 points FX2N 2AD 8 points Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 1 Priority 2 Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for all extension blocks in turn starting from a block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1 In this example due to the restriction two special function blocks only the FX3U 64CCL priority 1 and FX2N 2AD priority 1 can be connected to the main unit Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible Check using the quick reference matrix whether 8 input points and 16 output points whose exten sion is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added emm Number of gt added points 16 8 250 150 56 400 soo 200 zoo 5 0 8 16 24 32 gt Number of added points After 8 input points and 16 output points are connected the remaining current of the 24V DC service power supply is 50mA or less Accordingly it is possible to add 8 input points and 16 output points FX3G Series Programmable Co
211. User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 1 Self diagnostic function When the PLC s power is turned on its self diagnostic function starts automatically If there are no problems with the hardware parameters or program the PLC will start and the RUN command refer to Section 14 2 is given RUN LED is lit If any problems are found the ERR LED flashes or lights 14 3 2 Test functions Functions of the programming tool to turn on off the PLC devices and change the current values settings are effective or ineffective depending on the PLC status as shown below v Effective A Conditionally effective Ineffective em In stopped status Devices used in program A A Forcible ON OFF Devices not in use Y Change of current values of timers counters Devices used in program NE data registers extension registers extension file registers and file registers Devices not in use 3 3 Y When the program memory is the built in EEPROM J When the program memory is in the memory cassette Change of settings of timers and counters and the PROTECT switch is on When the program memory is in the memory cassette and the PROTECT switch is off 1 Forcible ON OFF The forcible ON OFF function is effective on the input relays X output relays Y auxiliary relays M state S timers T and counters C On the display
212. User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7 Troubleshooting gt For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 14 2 gt For the procedures on operating peripheral devices refer to the manuals for the peripheral devices gt For the phone numbers and addresses of Mitsubishi Electric System 8 Service Co Ltd refer to the service network at the end of this manual 14 7 1 Output does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 1 Output does not turn on Stop the PLC and forcibly turn the inoperable output on then off with a peripheral device or the display module to check its operation Check for troubles with external wiring e When the output operates The output may be turned off unintentionally in the program Reexamine the program Duplicate coil or RST instructions e When the output does not operate Check the configuration of the connected devices and the connection of the extension cables If the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension cables are acceptable the output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer 2 Output does not turn off Stop the PLC and check that the output turns off Check for trouble with external wiring For the procedures on running and stopping the PLC refer to Section 14 2 e When the output turns off The output may be turned on unintentionall
213. VA oS Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 z S gt For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 D Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference value OFF gt ON Approx 10ms Response time ON OFF Approx 10ms I eoueua ure N uny 1S9 O c D 62 p o o gt gt Q Output circuit configuration peJewog jndinogindu sun uoisuejx3 s A common number applies to the L of COML syoo g UOISU9 X3 indinoandu C mundo j yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 209 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL 15 3 2 External dimensions FX2N 32ER ES UL Unit mm inches 000000011 MITSUBISHI 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 90 3 55 MESEC FXov 32ER UVUUUUUUUDO 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch 150 5 91 00000000000 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch LEE I 319m Oc BY III LH YES 9 ES ES 9 63 9 69 69 69 9 69 69 69 E9 69 9 9 CAE IO SEED ekeke 172 6 78 mounting hole pitch 182 7 17 UUUUUUUUUUU 15 3 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ER
214. a E N C Um 1 When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program the input terminals and their associated 83 functions are switched OS For the function switching method refer to Subsection 11 8 2 S 11 4 2 Restriction of redundant use of input numbers 00 The input terminals X000 to X007 can be used for high speed counters input interruption pulse catch SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions and general purpose inputs Take care not to overlap the input numbers suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO For example when C251 is used X000 and X001 are occupied Therefore it is impossible to use C235 zi C236 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C252 and C254 input interruption pointers 1000 and 1101 pulse catch contacts M8170 and M8171 and SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions at the same time 1 9 o yoojg euw CO 143 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters 11 5 1 1 phase 1 count input 144 Examples of program 1 For C235 X010 e C235 counts the number of times the input terminal X000 Down count switches from OFF to ON while X012 is on up count e While X011 is on the counter resets when RST instruction X011 RST C235 Reset is executed X012 e The counters C235 to C245 switch to the down count or K5 up count mode by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 i Count
215. ach product refer to the external dimensions m Input output e powered 5 s Extension cable extension units S 2 FXoN 65EC 5 E es For the dimensions of each product H refer to the external dimensions gt 50mm 1 97 300mm 11 81 1 Include FX3U 1PSU 5V al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A 2 When an input output extension block or a special function block is connected at the top of the 2nd stage Special Connector Input output powered extension adapter e cOn don blocks AAA adapter wasis CO FX3G Series main unit UOISUS X4 UOISUS X4 uoneJn6ijuo j For the dimensions of each product refer to the external dimensions 53 DE ae gj fe p QQ Gea e 5 4 mis z5 Z Input output 1 cx c o 9g powered ij 83 8 Extension cable 15 extension unisi da A FXON 65EC UN 0 e 9 Sr aa For the dimensions of each product refer to the external dimensions 300mm 11 81 terio odia dmensone MN E mn ee 1 Except FX2N 8AD uonejeisu Bui jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 95 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure 8 3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure Examine the installation location of PLC in consideration of the environmental conditions generic specifications 8 3
216. aintenance and Periodic Inspection 2 Lamp load Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 3 Capacitive load Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters About the maximum load specifications of the resistance load refer to the specification for each model gt For specifications on the main unit refer to Subsection 4 4 1 gt For specifications on the input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 gt For specifications on the input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 For specifications on the terminal block refer to Chapter 20 188 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs When trouble occurs check the LEDs on the PLC to identify the problem with the PLC 14 5 1 POW LED on flashing off State of LED State of PLC Remedies On Power of the specified voltage is being correctly Miecowersusely ie nomal supplied to the power supply terminal
217. all frequency is restricted without regard to the operand of the instruction Consider this restriction when examining the system or creating programs and observe the specified overall frequency range When two or more high speed counters are used e When the HSCS HSCR HSZ PLSY PLSR DSZR TBL ZRN PLSV DRVI or DRVA instruction is used When the pulse width cycle measurement function is used Counter type C235 C236 C238 1 phase 1 C239 C241 Orale count input put C237 C240 C242 10kHz C243 C244 C245 C246 C248 OP 60kHz phase 248 C249 count input put AO 10kHz C251 C253 OP 30kHz 2 phase 2 C252 C253 C254 count input o Number of positioned axes Number of pulse width cycle measurement inputs x 40kHz Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction Response Frequency When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is used 200kHz 60kHz 1 1 Number of positioned axes x 5kHz Number of pulse width cycle measurement inputs x 20kHz 1 Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions PLSY FNC57 PLSR FNC59 DSZR FNC150 TBL FNC152 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 DRVI FNC158 DRVA FNC159 2 Calculation of overall frequency Obtain the overall frequency using the following expression Overall frequency Sum of used frequency of 1 phase counters Sum of used frequency of 2 phase counte
218. an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off vg D For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe ug 2 machinery operation in such a case S g amp DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION 15 uns 252 Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 2 D O 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line 3 Noise may cause malfunctions 3 zj Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors id Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 1 6 WIRING PRECAUTIONS D ANGER 525 5 E Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or S z M wiring work E Failure to do so may cause electric shock Do S lt N 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2
219. and 0 8 Nem 164 e Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions 166 Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product 203 The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual 224 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 and 0 25 Nem 327 Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires 336 Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed e Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem 4 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER AOS Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock Make sure to connect the battery for memory backup correctly Do not charge disassemble h
220. and FX1NC PLCs For supported models and device ranges refer to the FX 10DM USER S MANUAL Manual No JY992D86401 The following restriction applies when connected Contents of restrictions FX 10DU Netavailsible It is limited to the device range and function range supported by the highest class model FX1N or FX2N applicable in the product version For supported models and device ranges refer to the FX 10DU E FX 20DU E User s Manual Manual No JY992D54801 1 The F940GOT and ET 940 whose version is former than Ver 1 10 do not support the transparent 2 port function of the GX Developer SON JUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 61 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 6 Examination of System Configuration 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System The configuration of a whole system is shown below as an example Configuration of whole system Determination of number of Expansion board Special adapters Memory cassette 2 encon devices lo beconnected a Display module Connector conversion adapter Extension devices for FX2N FX3U Series Input extension Output Memory cassette Expansion board Display module MITSUBISHI H MITSUBISHI p FX3G 5DM
221. and check by GX Developer coooccccocccccccconccoconococononocononnnnnonnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononininnns 191 14 6 2 Operation and check on display module FX3G 5DM oocccccccocccncoconccononnoncnononononcnnnnrenononancnnnnns 192 14 6 5 Representalior OP elTO a oleo 193 14 6 4 Error Gode List arid ACOM x octo px Ioan anao x eo ur eser eoe btia teen en ve Une Sos pavba puta DU eee 194 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 1A o ETE 200 14 7 1 Output does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 200 14 7 2 24V DC input does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 200 14 7 3 Cautions in registering keyword sse nennen nennen nennen nnne nnne nnn 201 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units 202 A TTE 204 18 14 Product CONQUE cda 204 IR A O ecc 204 19 2 Power supply SpecilCallOliSucG doe adi A A EA 205 15 2 1 Weight accessories GIC 1i ode renda 205 ES A o UA PP A 206 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 4AGER ES UL 0 co tir rcc oce e a cac a cba cea a e Ro 208 15 9 1 iPiGduct speclficalloris auum iei A e e a 208 15 3 2 External dimensions esssssssssssssssssesseseeeeee nennen nennen rn snn rsen ansa asse rns nn anne rne nns 210 19 30 32 Terminal NAV OUI o UUM 210 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL 5 eer rk n ri 211 1524 1
222. ansparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series When monitoring circuits device registration etc in an FX3G PLC from GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later using the transparent 2 port function in the GOT F900 Series make sure to execute the following setting If the following setting is not provided monitoring cannot be executed normally GX Developer Ver 8 12N or earlier GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later Select RS 232C on PC side I F Serial setting dialog box and execute setting shown below When using transparent function in GOT F900 Setting shown below is not required Series Setting shown below is not required Select RS 232C on PC side I F Select RS 232C on PC side I F Serial setting dialog box and set Serial setting dialog box and set COM port and Transmission COM port and Transmission speed speed When directly Set COM port and Transmission connecting GX Developer speed on PC side I F Serial to PLC setting dialog box Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 22Y or later 1 Select Online gt Transfer setup to open the Transfer Setup dialog box 2 Double click PLC module in PLC side I F to open the PLC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module dialog box 3 Puta check mark to the check box via GOT F900 transparent mode as shown below Transfer Set
223. are Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS DAN G E R Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock e Make sure to connect the battery for memory backup correctly Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit or expose the battery to fire Doing so may rupture or ignite it Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor Turn off
224. are Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 5 Program example3 when monitoring non consecutive timers using operation keys Oz In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to BS timer T The operation keys and in the display module are available to scroll device numbers T1 T5 E T10 and T20 during monitoring In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 1 2 2 M Me System information system No 1 is Set at D50 o DSA Initial pulse l l System information system No 2 is D8301 Stat MBO to M64 Sets the device type to Timer Resets the index register a 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA DEL Transfers the timer device numbers E 5 oD D102 to D100 to D103 B35 90 e BEEN a Specified device 1 5 monitor screen button ON displayed mus aoe M56 M55 M59 252 Specified device The timer number is scrolled using S monitor screen the or button while the 6 button ON displayed specified device monitor screen is M55 M56 M59 displayed 1 NS 90 UOISU9 X3 indinomdu C Tu Ta The device number is specified within the allowable range xa 20 The device number to be Mov ptooze D51 displayed is specified END N RUN monitor yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o
225. ation and return to the top screen time display press ESC 2 Use the buttons to adjust the contrast To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press Contrast ESC Button Operation Description ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the menu screen Lowers the contrast decreases the numeric value The value can be decreased to 5 Increases the contrast increases the numeric value The value can be increased to 10 OK Registers the selected setting and returns to the menu screen 3 Press the OK button to register the selected setting and return to the menu screen 299 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum mamo N 10 Bum OO Ses snoueA I JE oD Dn es Sy XL EN 090 2 337 oo 2 0 5 Q mM US Aog O c gt Oo 2 oO Oak 2 3 s S a e uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 10 Clock Menu Current Time Setting 19 10 Clock Menu Current Time Setting The ClockMenu menu consists of current time and the clock setting items The current time should be set before operating the system 19 10 1 Clock setting procedure 300 1 5 6 At the menu screen use
226. ation number setting Refresh range setting Retry count setting Comms time out setting Not used Value of Z1 register Value of V1 register Value of Z2 register Value of V2 register Value of Z3 register Value of V3 register Value of Z4 register Value of V4 register Value of Z5 register Value of V5 register Value of Z6 register Value of V6 register Value of Z7 register Value of V7 register Not used Not used Current link scan time Maximum link scan time Number of communication error at master station Number of communication error at slave station No 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 2 Number of communication error at slave station No 3 Number of communication error at slave station No 4 Number of communication error at slave station No 5 Number of communication error at slave station No 6 Number of communication error at slave station No 7 Correspond ing special device M8038 M8183 to M8191 T Number and R Correspond do 3 name Content of register ing special q device D 8211 Code of communication error at master station D 8212 Code of communication error at 22 slave station No 1 CD Code of communication error at DITS slave station No 2 lt D 8214 Code of communication error at slave station No 3 Code of communication error at Me D 8215 M8191 slave station No 4 D 8216 Code of communication error at E slave station No 5 S Oo Code of commu
227. available connectors Use 20 pin 1 key sockets conforming to MIL C 83503 Go l i D In advance make sure that no interference is caused with peripheral parts such as the connector cover 38 co 2 Input output cables our options 2 Input output cables with attached connectors are available z Modei names Length Shape 4 Single wire Wire color red FX 16E 500CAB S 5m 10 4 General purpose input output cable PLC side A 20 pin connector M O FX 16E 150CAB 1 5m 4 11 2 Flat cables with tube 2 e A 20 pin connector at both ends m o For the connection with FX Series terminal block FX 16E 150CAB R 1 5m 411 refer to the following chapter Eras e A 20 pin connector at both ends al FX 16E 300CAB 3m 9 10 Cables for connecting FX Series terminal block FX 16E 300CAB R 3m 9 10 gt 20 Terminal Block FX 16E 500CAB and input output connector 10 FX 16E 500CAB R 5m 10 4 prs FX A32E 150CAB 1 5m 411 Flat cables with tube 29 3 FX A32E 300CAB 3m 9 10 s PLC side Two 20 pin connectors in 16 ES SD Cables for connecting A Series Model AGTBXY36 point units a connector terminal block conversion unit and Terminal block side A dedicated FX A32E 500CAB 5m 10 4 input output connector type connector One common terminal covers 32 input 6 output terminals Ow mE S 3 Connectors for making input output cables by users our options e a The users sh
228. b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepte
229. ble Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 14 2 1 Methods of running and stopping FX3G PLCs can be started or stopped by any of the following three methods Two of the methods can be combined The RUN STOP switch is located under the peripheral device connector cover 1 Operation with built in RUN STOP switch Operate the RUN STOP switch on the front panel of the main unit to start and RUN STOP switch stop the PLC refer to the right figure pde L Turn the switch to RUN and the PLC will start Turn it to STOP and the PLC will stop RUN VR1 AS 2 Running and stopping with general purpose input RUN terminal Operation with one switch RUN One of the input terminals X000 to X017 of the main unit can be used as a RUN input terminal bya parameter setting refer to the figure below When the specified input terminal is turned on the PLC starts When it is turned off the PLC is started or stopped depending on the state of the built in RUN STOP switch 1 X000 to X007 in 14 point type main units and X000 to X015 in 24 point type main units For details refer to Kinds of Parameters and Settings in Programming Manual General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter S S xooo xoo1 xoo2 Operation
230. ceeds the setting YOO2 turns on and when the current value becomes lower than the setting YOO2 turns off I 098 Co e Y003 turns on down count or off up count according to the A phase input B phase input counting direction Main unit For C254 X011 ee EIEE e C254 starts counting immediately when the input terminal abeto RST C254 X006 is turned on while X012 is on v The count input terminals are X000 A phase and X001 X012 B phase DO D1 X e C254 is reset by X011 on the sequence and it is reset C254 o immediately when X002 is turned on The setting is D1 D0 e When the current value exceeds the setting D1 D0 YOOA M8254 operates and when the current value becomes lower than the setting YOO4 turns off B phase input External start input YOOS turns on down count or off up count according to A phase input External ree the counting direction inpu Main unit e A 2 phase encoder generates A phase output and B phase output between which there is a 90 phase difference The high speed counter automatically counts up or down according to the output as shown below Phase A ara MARS L1 1 1 1 Phase B O MM EAEN Up counting Down counting The down count up count operations of C251 to C255 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8251 to M8255 ON Down counting OFF Up counting FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hard
231. cessories Label for indication of input output number 23 S The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 28 z 3 Input specifications Common to both sink and source inputs a Item FX2N 8ER ES UL 1 9 Input points 4 points A 93 Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws 2 3 O Input form sink source pa E Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 z Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3kQ ON input Input ON current 3 5mA or more at 24V DC sensitivity current Inout OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms Sink input No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input signal form Source input No voltage contact input PNP open collector transistor 4 7 Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input E OD QD Sink input wiring Source input wiring e O Main unit Main unit nae 00 Input circuit diagram suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 227 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 2 FX2N 8ER ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input Relay Output 4 Output specifications Relay output type Item FX2N 8ER ES UL Output Points 4 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output type Relay 30V DC or less External power supply 240V AC or less 2
232. ch0 M18330 to M8397 Notused Meo M 8338 PLSV FNC157 instruction i M 8371 2 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Send wait flag Acceleration deceleration operation M 8372 RS2 FNC 87 ch0 Send request D8372 iMi6339 i RS2 FNC 87 chO M8340 Y000 Pulse output monitor M 8373 s MEL 3 D8373 ON BUSY OFF READY m Y000 Clear signal output function PORTO IM m M 8341 enable Saa RS2 FNC 87 chO j EET Time out check flag YOOO Zero return direction M 8342 specification High Speed Counter Function M 8343 Y000 Forward limit M 8380 to M 8387 M 8344 Y000 Reverse limit M 8388 Contact for high speed counter i function change M 8345 1 Y000 DOG signal logic reverse Y000 Z int signal logi M 8346 Mee i D T Function changeover device for C248 and C253 m MES 3 YOOO Positioning instruction 6346 DE Functi h i M 8349 Y000 Pulse output stop command M 8395 me Le d YOO1 Pulse output monitor MI8396 YOO1 Clear signal output function 1 M 8351 enable Ring Counter Y001 Zero return direction M 8398 Ring counter operation D8398 OSE specification in units of 1ms 32 bits D8399 M 8353 Y001 Forward limit M 8399 E M 8354 Y001 Reverse limit 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when M 8355 1 Y001 DOG signal logic reverse RS2 instruction ch0 is OFF 0011 Z Soe PERT 3 1ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 ero point signal logic t ON reverse Dg RS2 FNC 87 e M 8358
233. cifications wiring 09R521 op volume Sf this manual installation and maintenance D MW Programming Al S o y instructions and various devices Edition al FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series Senarai tH C E Details of sequence programming for FX3G Series p g 9 JY997D16601 including explanation for basic instructions applied 09R517 volume Basic amp Applied Instruction WFX Series terminal block prs Supplied FX INPUT AND sos V with OUTPUT TERMINAL JY992D50401 Procedures for handling FX Series terminal block j SD product BLOCKS USER S GUIDE o Manuals for communication control MW Common 6 S nardle FX Series User s Manual Details of simple link between PCs parallel link ae MM Data Communication JY997D16901 computer link and no protocol communication RS 09R715 SS Edition instructions FX2N 232IF e 2 IIRS 232C RS 422 RS 485 communication When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 232C cnn FX3G 232 BD JY997D32001 communication expansion board i 7 Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual product nent x A5 Data Communication Edition QU m Procedures for handling the RS 232C o PP FX3U 232ADP MB communication special adapter Ic with JY997D26401 zu E Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual O product die e t Data Communication Ed
234. closure The PLC components can be laid out in one stage or in two stages upper and lower The connecting procedures in each case are explained below 8 2 1 1 stage layout Connector Input output powered extension units blocks Special i Special function block coat conversion pecial function blocks aegis V4 adapter A T To e a a a MERC 5 Y H ug t output 1 4 i u T DEFI So 20 detec a 1 go go 1 main unit og tf og i 2 POWered d Og Og f To l rgo extension units 5 1 Ug i 2 i 5 H i 5 i 5 For the dimensions of each product refer to the external dimensions jl 2 90mm 1 977 94 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Layout in Enclosure 8 2 2 2 stage layout UONINPOJJU In the case of a 2 stage layout connect the first stage and the second stage with the extension cable When an extension block is connected at the top of the second stage FX2N CNV BC connector conversion adapter is necessary N 1 When an input output powered extension unit is connected at the top of the 2nd stage U TI u 0 Input output powered extension a2 Special Connector E apio conversion units blocks l D X Y adapter Special function blocks Dw Dp a yp ep pf ef he iw Ge e HoH o m i m ESSENT co 7 20 d O5 1 O35 3 main unit Qo t Qa O i O 2 al uU roS Pom eee g amp co For the dimensions of e
235. ction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEF instruction the execution result of the MEF instruction turns OFF nonconducting state regardless of the operation result ON or OFF up to the MEF instruction When the operation result up to the MEF instruction is set to ON once and then set to OFF the execution result of the MEF instruction turns ON conducting state Operation result up to MEP MEF instruction MEP instruction MEF instruction OFF nonconduct OFF nonconduct OFF o e ON ON conducting id i edd e When writing during RUN with GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later the program is as follows When the number of program steps is reduced by deletion of contacts coils and applied instructions the program capacity becomes smaller by as many as the reduced number of steps 57 uononpoJu N SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Go uononpoJu jonpoud suoneooods I 0p lt 27 Lo uoneinByuoy j SON JUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 3 Precautions on Use of Built in USB Programming Port 5 3 Precautions on Use of Built in USB Programming Port Make sure to set the contents described in this section when executing circuit monitor device registration monitor progra
236. ction cannot be used E in CALL instruction as P63 is for jumping to END This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the instruction program or check the contents of the operands used in the 2 6702 CALL instruction nesting level is 6 or more applied instructions EE Even if the syntax or circuit design is correct an operation 6703 Interrupt nesting level is 3 or more error may still occur 1 3 6704 FOR NEXT instruction nesting level is 6 or more For example lt lt 6705 Operand of applied instruction is inapplicable device T5002 itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the timer T600 would attempt to be accessed This would cause cda 6706 Device number range or data value for operand of applied an operation error since there is no T600 device available je instruction exceeds limit D 6707 File register is accessed without parameter setting of file register This error occurs in the execution of the operation e Review the program or check the contents of the OD Dn operands used in the applied instructions c3 md 6708 FROM TO instruction error Check whether the specified buffer memories exist in the 23 S equipment o a Check whether the extension cables are correctly 3 connected Continues This error occurs in the execution of operation Review the 1 5 operation program or check the contents of the operands used in the Tm applied instructions AQ 3 Even if the syntax or circuit de
237. ction flag i RS2 FNC 87 ch2 oaan Data set ready DSR flag SD M 8426 Computer link ch2 Global ON S O o D U M 8427 Computer link ch2 25 On demand send processing 2 zi O OOO Computer link ch2 D8427 L On demand error flag D8428 B Computer link ch2 osos D M 8429 On demand Word Byte changeover o RS2 FNC 87 ch2 Time out check flag o 1 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or when A RS2 instruction ch2 is OFF Error Detection M 8430 to M 8437 Not used Ne MEGSSIMENS Gus E neas E MISC MSS Nou E Positioning DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 instructions YOOO Clear signal device specification function enabled DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 instructions Y001 M 8464 D8464 M 8465 D8465 Clear signal device specification function enabled DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 instructions YOO2 Clear signal device specification function enabled DEA 2 Cleared when PLC power supply from OFF to ON M 8466 D8466 369 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and Correspond Number and Cottespands ae Content of register ing special ae Content of register ing special device device PLC Status Clock Default value is 200ms D 8010 Accumulated instruction execution in ims
238. d MA A ON Both monitoring and testing of Both monitoring and testing of Only monitoring of specified Q5 specified device are enabled specified device are enabled device is enabled ej 9 o 5 a Transition to another screen Transition to another screen 319 00 UOISUS X3 JOUIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function 19 16 7 Pointers for using the display screen protect function The display screen protect function settings should be specified in a sequence program The protect function is enabled by using the display module s monitor test function to change the system information s system signal 1 DO O 3 current value to 1 or 2 Once the setting is made it cannot be canceled from the display module To cancel the setting use the programming tool to change the system information s system signal 1 DO 0O 3 current value to a value other than 1 and 2 If the system information s system signal 1 DO O 3 is set in a general purpose data register however the display screen protect function can be canceled by turning the power off then on again 320 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 17 Operation Button ON OFF Information 19 17 Operation Button ON OFF
239. d Therefore it is impossible to use C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C252 and C254 input interruption pointer 1000 pulse catch contact M8170 and SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions at the same time FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 10 5 Pulse Catch M8170 to M8175 UONINPOJJU The PLC main unit is provided with a pulse catch function and has 6 pulse catch input points For details on programming refer to the programming manual N 10 5 1 Allocation of special memories to input numbers ON duration of input signals Input number Contact on sequence program ON duration of input signal X000 M8170 10us or more X001 M8171 X002 M8172 50us or more S WEN Hed pue sanjea OO 10us or more so x004 10 5 2 Cautions for pulse catch 1 Non overlap of input numbers A The input terminals X000 to X005 can be used for high speed counter input interruption pulse catch speed detection SPD instructions and general purpose input Take care not to overlap the input numbers Example When the C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C252 and C254 is used X000 is occupied Therefore it is impossible to use pulse catch input contact M8170 al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO uoneJn6ijuo jndinoandu i SON HUN SON uonejessu OO e gt O ES o QS eo E O O zel lt
240. d Optional Units 8 External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement O 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks z 18 1 1 FX2N 2AD 13 ss External Dimensions Terminal Layout Sa O 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 9 S 14 a FX2n 2AD z 0 358 ID O cso POWER 2 c or EU Oo B35 SE E 2 O O 15 AE TE e MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs x o e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product 1 6 om5 e Terminal block M3 screws See The extension cable is already connected to the extension block E 18 1 2 FX2N 2DA 17 External Dimensions Terminal Layout SOR 0 5 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches OS 3 lt T g isi FX n 2DA moO Do See POWER cC OO 2 5 e 352 SE 22m 00 E o a O e E S i wn p jab lt lt MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44Ibs A D e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product 20 Terminal block M3 screws al The extension cable is already connected to the extension block zi UJ ex 265 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 3 FX3Uu 4AD External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Uni
241. d by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power pla
242. d connector conversion adapter is not used together 350 21 3 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 351 211 O A in de net dd 353 21 4 1 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are not used together 353 21 4 2 Removal when the expansion board connector conversion adapter are used together 354 21 5 Saved Dala Cont dd dd ds nate 355 2116 PROTECT SWIC Me wm 356 21 9 1 PROTEGTS Witch SOTIING od de li ies 356 21 6 2 PROTECT switch operation cccoocccccoccnccocnnccccnnnnnonnnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnninnns 356 21 6 3 Precautions when setting and using the SWwitCh oooocccconccccococcccnncnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnos 356 21 7 Memory Cassette lt gt PLC EEPROM Memory Transfers by Loader Function 357 21421 WO Wis O21 PEG cea cess er seer cas scenic node se eer once ee TA E ciet aste ot codd 357 P Reading RD gt 32L PEG si noise loas 358 21 0 ODSrauonm T recalls ted e o e e be edad 358 22 Battery 359 22 1 TS ALLS IY Fe OS Cassar ch area ete td is 359 ZZ ZS OIC INS dd lar i elds 359 Pi eee er er eee ee ere meee eae eee ee 360 22331 AUACHING Me Date Sicccctactiursccieds ctvevaleruratnaniavicsablacs DR RR TUE O d A Dd beta beats id 360 22 3 2 Setting the battery mode GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later cococoooncccccococcncccnoconnonnnanonnnos 360 22 4 Battery TTahndl
243. d to the FX3u 1PSU 5V 2 A maximum of 8 special function blocks are connectable including the main unit and extension power 1 0 supply unit 3 77 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit 78 Determine whether FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA can be added Determine the number of analog special function blocks FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA to be con nected to the input output powered extension unit by the following method e When connecting to FX2N 32EL Total current Analog special function block FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA 50mA x 65mA xf units units When connecting to FX2N A8ET Total current Analog special function block FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA 50mA x 85mA x a lt 300mA Determine whether the devices can be added to the input output powered extension unit 190mA I lA mA lA Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected Calculate the current consumption of the built in 24V DC power supply 24V DC service power supply The value obtained by this calculation when the value is positive indicates the remaining capacity of 24V DC service power supply and the capacity can be used for external loads cA Current consumption Calculation result Input output powered Total of current consumed by extension unit extension devices 3 HCE _ Calculate th
244. data to a connected memory cassette Cassette gt PLC Copies data from a connected memory cassette to the internal program memory EEPROM Caution When a memory cassette is connected with a display module perform the data transfer procedure in the display module The memory cassette cannot be used for the data transfer procedure 19 12 1 Transfer from internal EEPROM to memory cassette Cassette lt PLC 306 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette item then press OK to display the memory cassette transfer screen c4 e 81 4 qoi To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display RP Cassette PLC press ESC Cassette PLC Memory Cassette i 7 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette PLC item then press OK to display the screen shown to the right To cancel the operation and return to the memory cassette transfer screen press ESC Cassette PLC OK 5 Excute ESC 5 Cansel 3 Press OK to begin the transfer Or press ESC to cancel the operation Cassette PLC Button Operation Description Cancels the operation and returns to the memory cassette ESE transfer screen Please wait Disabled Disabled OK Executes the transfer Caution Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being transferred by a memory cassette transfer menu opera
245. dication Current error No Detail Erormessage Enorstep Year No error 2 ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisua Example No error yoojg euw CO 191 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 2 Operation and check on display module FX3G 5DM 1 Move the cursor to ErrorCheck pressing the or button on the menu screen shown right For the menu structure refer to Section 19 5 gt gt Monitor Test Vr Gg og dd E ggg 0g 4 Pd ErrorCheck The buttons on the menu screen work as stated below Button Operation Description rid ESC The screen returns to the top screen time display LANGUAGE The cursor moves upward When the button is held for Contrast 1 second or more the cursor moves quickly When the cursor is in the uppermost position the button is ineffective ClockMenu Keyword for 1 second or more the cursor moves quickly When the cursor is in the lowermost position the button is ineffective Ej A al l l l l l The cursor moves downward When the button is held l Cassette l l OK The flashing item at the cursor is selected 2 When the OK button is pressed an error check is performed The results are displayed on the error display screen shown to Wenne erosa dcum the right Pressing the ESC button on
246. dify the program while the PLC is running Built in clock function The PLC has a clock function to control the time Programming tool Use a version of GX Developer applicable to FX3G Refer to 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability in this manual For peripheral devices not applicable to FX3G Series specify FX1N Series for model selection and you can program the sequence In this case use instructions and devices within the ranges common to FX3G Series and the selected model of PLC Remote debugging of program Use of programming software enables you to remotely transfer the program and monitor the PLC operation through a modem connected to the RS 232C expansion board and RS 232C communication special adapter Input output high speed processing functions of main unit High speed counter function Input terminals of main unit Input of open collector transistor output 1 phase 60kHz x 4points 10kHz x 2points 2 phase 30kHz x 2 points 5kHz x 1 points Refer to 11 Use of High speed Counters in this manual and Programming Manual Pulse catch function Signals with short ON width or OFF width can be captured without a complicated program Refer to 10 Input Wiring Procedures in this manual and Programming Manual Input terminal X000 X001 X003 X004 X002 X005 Signal ON OFF width 10us 50us Input interruption function The PLC can process interruption
247. ding Tool F JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD JST FV1 25 B3A UL Listed YA 1 JST EE PE eo 3 zs P 5 o ye a D o 117 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures In the case of M3 5 terminal screw FX Series terminal block FX2N 20PSU FX2N 8AD e When one wire is connected to one terminal b 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 or less b 3 7 0 15 or less e When two wires are connected to one terminal 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 GTI or less 18 6 0mm 0 24 or more 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 or less E 6 0mm 0 24 or more 118 Terminal Crimp screw terminal Terminal Terminal Crimp screw terminal Terminal FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures mada 9 2 2 Input output connectors FX2N input output extension blocks The input output connectors of FX2N Series input output extension blocks connector type conform to MIL C 83503 Prepare the input output cables referring to the following tables uononpoJu N 1 Applicable products Classification Model names Input output extension blocks FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 16EYT C SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee 2 Preparation of input output connectors 1 Compliant connectors commercially
248. e Programming connector MINI USB B type 5pin male MINI USB B type 5pin female 180 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 11 14 1 4 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped oz Turn on the PLC power Make sure that the RUN STOP switch of the PLC is set to STOP and turn the power on 12 O Check the program E z Check for circuit errors and grammatical errors with the program check function of the program a ming tool 13 Transfer the sequence program sz Write the program to the PLC with the programming tool dal PROTECT switch P When the memory cassette is used Make sure to set the PROTECT switch of the memory cassette to OFF shown right For details on handling of the memory cassette refer to Chapter 21 3 Verify the sequence program 15 Verify that the program has been correctly written to the PLC 293 Execute PLC diagnosis zB Check for errors in the PLC main body with the PLC diagnostic function of the programming tool For details on the PLC diagnosis with the display module or GX Developer refer to Section 14 6 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 181 FX3G Series Programma
249. e Fit the extension connector cover A in the right figure FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe
250. e 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less less e 8 output points common terminal 1 6A or less Max load 12W 24V DC 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value Inductive load terminal should be the following value 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or less 24V DC less 24V DC 8 output points common terminal 38 4W or less 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1mA 30V DC Min load j OFF ON 0 2ms or less 200mA at 24V DC Response time ON OFF 0 2ms or less 200mA at 24V DC Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the of V FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 4 FX2N 32ET ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL 15 4 2 External dimensions oz io FX2N 32ET ESS UL 2 44 5 mounting holes 3 12 pu RSS 83 183 83 83 83 83 83 83 KES 837 OS 83 X Q X ISETU DO LIOS IO D ERE S MITSUBISHI 85683886 z m E INOO6O0000 01 23 4 58 7 SONR 2 5 elo E MELSECRXa 32ET 005682800 SB Hla an 219 9 9 9 910 9 co E O WOLYL LYE E E E E Y O UUUUUUUUUUU 13 SSI 83 KES LES 83 LES KES ESD KES KES 8S
251. e conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air CI2 H2S SO2 or NO2 1 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Terminal block DIN rail only Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block and FX2N FX3U Series E DIN rail or direct mounting special extension block special adapter Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors Buum mano N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA dh I Loose connections may cause malfunctions zu Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices o gt D Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions P Ez Periph
252. e 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input For some high speed counters external reset input terminals or external start input terminals start of counting can be selected Types and input signal forms The types and input signals waveforms of high speed counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phase 2 count input and 2 phase 2 count input are shown below Counter type Input signal form 1 phase 1 count input Counting direction Down count or up count is specified by turning on or off M8235 to M8245 ON Down counting OFF Up counting UP Down LT LE LIL Up count or down count The counting direction can be checked with M8246 to M8250 ON Down counting OFF Up counting 1 phase 2 count input Automatic up count or down count according to change in input status of phase A B The counting direction can be checked with M8251 to M8255 ON Down counting OFF Up counting Phase A ER 1 1 1 1 Phase B l uU 2 phase 2 count input Up counting Down counting 11 2 2 High speed counter device notations The input terminal assignments for FX3G PLC high speed counters can be switched when used in combination with a special auxiliary relay This section classifies these high speed counter devices under the following notations Note that an OP input cannot be programmed Standard Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers C248 C248 OP C253 C253 OP C254 C254 OP 11 2 3 Cautions in con
253. e For input output powered extension units 8 point type input output Ze extension blocks and special function blocks this operation is ol NNI T 22 unnecessary Sg zz uonejeisu BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 101 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws The product can be installed directly in the enclosure with screws Point Position the holes so that there is a gap of 1 to 2 mm 0 04 to 0 08 between the products 8 5 1 Hole pitches for direct mounting The product mounting hole pitches are shown below For the pitch that varies depending on the product refer to the table 1 Main unit A Unit mm inches 4 0 16 W 4 0 16 Mounting hole pitch W IT ae ee a y FX3G 14MR ES L FX3G 14MT ES Q ig FX3G 14MT ESS i I 10 82 3 23 ol SEA FX3G 24MR ES eio FX3G 24MT ES vY MEER A FX3G 24MT ESS o o st 122041 197658 FX3G 60MT ESS 2 Special adapter B Unit mm inches FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP m FX3U 4AD PTW ADP Refer to the figure shown Y FX3U 4AD PNK ADP left Ta FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX3U 232ADP MB O On y Oo E Ox o gt UJ FX3U 485ADP MB 98 3 86 102 FX3G Series Programmable Contro
254. e Supports of the pulse width measurement function Ver 1 10 S October 2008 93 UONINPOJJU N SOWeN ed pue sanjea OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneooods I CD lt 27 D E uoneJn6ijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO Bui jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 1 Applicable versions of programming tool 1 GX Developer GX Developer is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following version Model name Applicable FX3G PLC version Media model name is PP f Description GX Developer version shown below Ver 1 00 a later GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later Model selection FX3G From first version SWUOD5C F GPPW J Ver 1 10 or later e SWOD5C F GPPW E Ver 8 78G or later Supports FX3G PLCs Ver 1 10 or later 2 FX 30P FX 30P is applicable to FX3G PLCs from the following version Applicable ES FX3G PLC version FX 30P version Description Ver 1 00 or later Model selection Not selected Online mode From first version Model selection FX3G Offline mode FX 30P From first version supports FX3G PLCs Ver 1 10 or later FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later Ver 1 10 or later 5 2 2 In the case of programming tool version not applicable Inapp
255. e as those for the main unit gt Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications sink input Item FX2N 32ES Input points 16 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3 kO Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Input signal form Sink input wiring Input circuit diagram 220 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 7 FX2N 32ES 11 3 Output specifications triac output type OF 37 item FX2N 32ES oo Output Points 16 points a Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Triac output SSR 1 2 External power supply 85 to 242V AC O Output circuit insulation Photo thyristor insulation 3 Indication of output operation Activation of the photo thyristor will
256. e current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply Med Sins Current consumption Calculation result Input output powered Total of current consumed by extension unit extension devices 2 HCE _ E If the calculation results for the current consumption of the 24V DC power supply and 5V DC power supply are negative values the current consumption exceeds the capacity of the built in power supply Reconfigure the system adding input output powered extension units or extension power supply units FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V UONINPOJJU If the selected devices in Section 6 5 are not connectable due to the built in 5V DC power shortage add an extension power supply unit N Enter the current supply specification of the extension power supply unit The output current of the extension power supply unit is proportional to the ambient temperature as shown by the derating curve below Enter the output current value based on this derating curve Also verify that the number of occupied input output points from input output extension block s connected to the extension power supply unit is less than 32 SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Go Derating curve Output current A 2 y O 0 8 L E ej 0 3 0 2 4 40 55 B
257. e left and right screws and the upper part of the terminal block can be removed gt For anchoring of the terminal block refer to Subsection 9 1 2 Wire switches and sensors to the terminals Wire loads contactors solenoid valves etc to be driven to the terminals A protective terminal cover refer to the following drawing is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block The cover prevents fingers from touching terminals thereby improving safety PA AT FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts mundo 2 2 2 Sides 5 a o a c 2 o 2 SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO 5 39 oo 11 Connector Ma ed These holes are designed to secure the connector conversion adapter with screws si connecting screw holes1 2 places 2 Nameplate The product model name control number and power supply specifications are shown j For details on the manufacturer s serial number refer to Subsection 5 1 2 4 3 DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35 mm 1 38 wide Y 2 F D al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis O uoneJn6ijuo SON Iluf SON jndinondu uonejeisu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 31 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edit
258. e main unit s built in power supply is insufficient for the current consumption demands of the extension blocks 15 1 1 Product configuration There are various types of input output powered extension units They differ in supply voltage number of input output points input form output form and connection type Input output powered extension units Power supply Number of points Input form Output form Connection type 100 to 240V AC 24V DC Terminal block sink source 48 MU VARO riac sink Transistor sink 100V AC Transistor source 15 1 2 Product list 204 Each model of input output powered extension unit has a sink and source type and a sink type If you intend to add input output powered extension units we recommend you to add the same types of units as the main unit or the sink and source type Sink common Source common Samos Model Number Common wiring Number Common wiring t Type d Type E ype of points system of points system AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source input Relay 24V DC lock Transistor AC power supply only for 24V DC sink input Relay Terminal Transistor AC power supply only for 100V AC FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Power supply specifications 15 2 Power supply specifications SF F 3 o D FX2N 32ER iem FX2N 32ER ES UL EXON ES FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48E
259. e minus side of the load power supply The COMU terminals are not connected internally Sink output type Bun 1ndjno 10 Bum OO Ses SNOLIBA dh I EE Source output E Load current flows out of the output Y terminals o B Connect each VL1 number terminal to the plus side of the 2 2 load power supply ER The VU terminals are not connected internally 1 5 MPE FE Bao 16 MEI 2 External power supply TE For driving the load use a smoothing power supply of 5 to 30V DC that can output current two or more times 58 the rated current of the fuse connected to the load circuit 3 Insulation of circuit The internal circuit of the PLC and the output transistor are insulated with a photocoupler N C Um The common blocks are separated from one another 225 S m m No 4 Display of operation E S lt Operation indicator LEDs are built into the main unit and output extension blocks and turn ON when photocouplers are actuated 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 157 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source 158 5 Response time The time from when the PLC drives or shuts down the photocoupler until the transistor is turned on or off is shown in the following table Classification Load current time 5 to 24V DC Wh
260. e the cursor to the device which is C to be monitored R 16bit To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press y ER 16bit DER 32bit l X l Y I I S 3 Press OK to display the monitor screen for the device which was selected for monitoring To cancel the operation and return to the device selection screen press ESC After the power is turned on the number of the device to be displayed is shown as follows a The first time the power is turned on the display begins with device No 1 b At subsequent power ONs the device which was being monitored at the previous operation is displayed they are saved in memory for each device type 4 Use the and buttons to move the cursor or the screen to the until the device to be monitored is displayed Refer to Subsection 19 6 3 for status display Selected Device Type Operation Description All devices ESC Returns to the device selection screen Data registers D DD Extended registers Scrolls upward Press for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling If pressed again at the beginning of the device No list the display jumps to the end of R DR the device No list Extended file registers ER DER Scrolls downward Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling Timer T If pressed again at the end of the device No list the display jumps to the beginning of Scrolls the display screen upward Hold f
261. e the memory cassette However attachment of the side cover is not necessary when using only the loader function and not always connecting the memory cassette Attachment of the side cover is not necessary when installing the memory cassette under the top cover S of a 40 60 point type main unit Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever C Attach the memory cassette Install the memory cassette to the main unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 3 Installation The memory cassette E in the right figure can be fixed with provided M3 tapping screws D in the right figure to the main unit This work is not required when fixation is not necessary e Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem AJowsy 9jesse2 Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3 x 8 shorter screws Do not use M3 x 16 longer screws because they may damage the main unit N apeg IN 21 3 2 Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is used together 0008a 0008W sr uononJjsu WwW seoi eq jeroeds The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit and the expansion board is used together in this example Attach the expansion board connector conversion adapter to the main unit For the attachment method refer to Chapter 8 Caution Make sure to attach the expansion b
262. e zero return is detected Disables the all output reset function when the operation mode is changed ON when M8047 is ON and either of SO to S899 or S1000 to S4095 is active M8047 D8040 to D8047 are enabled when M8047 is ON ON when M8049 is ON and either i of S900 to S999 is ON D8040 to D8047 D8049 M8048 D8049 is enabled when M8049 is ON 2 Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 3 Executed at END instruction 364 Correspond Number and Operation and function ing special name device Interrupt Disable M8050 Input interrupt 1000 disable M8051 Input interrupt 1100 disable M8052 If an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a special auxiliary relay for that interrupt M8050 M8058 is ON the interrupt will not operate Input interrupt For example turning M8050 ON 1200 disable 4 disables the 1000 interrupt hence the interrupt routine is M8053 not processed even in an Input interrupt allowable program area 1300 disable M8054 Input interrupt 1400 disable If an input interrupt or timer interrupt occurs while a special auxiliary relay for that interrupt M8050 M8058 is OFF M8055 a The interrupt will be Input interrupt accepted 1500 disable 4 b The interrupt routine will be M8056 processed promptly if it is permitted by the El FNC 04 instruction However if the DI FNC 05 instruction disables interrupts
263. eat short circuit or expose the battery to fire Doing so may rupture or ignite it Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program CAUTION mm Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor us Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable 349 Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions 359 Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette GUI S2fety Precautions AO Read these precau
264. ed on the upstream side 62 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 1 Configuration of a Whole System 6 1 1 Expansion board connector conversion adapter memory cassette display module configuration UONINPOJJU The connection positions and number of expansion boards connector conversion adapter and memory cassette configuration vary depending on the number of points in main units For details refer to the description below N Inthe case of the main units 40 60 point type Main unit 2nd position 2nd position 2nd position SOWeN ed pue sanjea BD1 BD2 BD1 BD2 1st position 1st position 1st position 1st position OO Main unit 3 Se ec Front panel Side T S Available connection position Model name BD1 1st position BD1 2nd position BD2 1st position BD2 2nd position 4 pp IO AO O EN 5 O o Display module yore Connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP 2 al 1 When the memory cassette and display module are used together the transfer function of the memory cassette is not available Use the display module to transfer data stored in the memory cassette seone JeJeudueg pue uoISJ9A 2 Can be connected in any position however only one device can be connected at one time 3 The memory cassette cannot be connected when the display module is connected to the BD2 1st
265. ed together is used together d 2 7 5 Trimmer Layout Label of Expansion Board FX3G 8AV BD 6 OW The trimmer layout label is packed together with the FX3G 8AV BD 28 Adhere it in a position where it can be seen easily for quick reference as shown in the figure below si FX3G 8AV BD VOLUME LABEL Y818D63201A FX3G 8AV BD 01234567 0090900000 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 00000000 MITSUBISHI C 20 21 22 5s 24 25 27 T jndinondu SON HUN SON 01234567 OO O OO OOO 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 00000000 uonejeisu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 89 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 90 Installation In Enclosure DESIGN PRECAUTIONS DESIGN PRECAUTIONS 1 2 3 4 DANGER Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits
266. ed when PLC switches from STOP to RUN 4 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Advanced Function D 8160 D 8161 D 8162 D 8163 D 8164 Not used D 8165 D 8166 D 8167 D 8168 D 8169 Access restriction status 5 Access restriction status value Read Write ing change H 00 7 2nd keyword is not set rl ae E H 107 Write protection sele NM T H 11 Read write protection ai eh a y 49497 All online operation protection H 20 7 Keyword cancel E 6 Accesses are restricted by the keyword setting status 7 indicates areas used by the system Access restriction status Present value FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Number and name Content of register N N Network setting D 8170 D 8171 D 8172 D 8173 D 8174 D 8175 D 8176 D 8177 D 8178 D 8179 D 8180 D 8181 Index Register Z1 to Z7 and V1 to V7 D 8182 D 8183 D 8184 D 8185 D 8186 D 8187 D 8188 D 8189 D 8190 D 8191 D 8192 D 8193 D 8194 D 8195 D 8196 D 8197 D 8198 D 8199 N N Network monitoring D 8200 D 8201 D 8202 D 8203 D 8204 D 8205 D 8206 D 8207 D 8208 D 8209 D 8210 Not used Station number Total number of slave stations Refresh range Station number setting Total slave st
267. edance 4 3kQ ON input Input ON current 3 5mA or more at 24V DC sensitivity current Inout OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Input signal form Sink input wiring Main unit Input circuit diagram 230 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 4 Output specifications Relay output type Oz gt Item FX2N 8ER 3 o D Output Points 4 points 2 Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output type Relay 4 2 External power suppl POV Or OSS P PP 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards O Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation E Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel amp 2A point Resistance load The total resistance load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less Max load PEE 1 3 80VA lt s Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 a For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 7 O Open circuit leakage current q 2 62 Min load 5V DC 2mA reference values OFF gt 0N Approx 10ms Resp
268. eeseeeecceuseeceseueeesseuseeeessaassesssauseeessennsnsetess 338 20 ME FA TOE ds AAA 339 20 77 MS A aaa tee Mete tiet 339 20 7 2 iria elle i RR A 340 20 7 3 Example of output external wiring ccccecccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeessaeeeeeeseseeesaaaeeeeessaaeeseeeees 340 20 7 4 External wiring DrecalllOFiS o cc cti ci Ad Vk da ia A paa EA eu ra Rd EN 341 20 7 5 Product life Of relay Contacts rua pi core reu X et cu arave secs 6 tO euet seas A Ai AAA 342 20 5 EXSIOEX TS IB EXSIDEYTSBISDB Le odi eco nna tree ege T 343 20O SS CCIN CAMO TT 343 AA o A 344 208 9 Example of output external WINING mi is 344 20 6 4 External WING DIrecaullOhS see orti esa Se eon bct bebe Dec Dae opu i ion 345 20 9 Cdozhtnl c e 346 20 97 SP it E Acus dandis 346 OA A N 347 20 9 3 Example of output external wiring oocccccocnncccccncccccnnnonononononnnononnnononnnnnnnnnnnnannnononnnonnnnanenoss 347 20 94 Externalwiring Precautions A AA A AA 348 21 Memory Cassette 349 A oe seca rece rte he sect as Ls te id utei bd xis 349 PAM e Yi CAO OPIO UI e neo A ce III T Meade ccudath an geadaiea oedee 349 21 2 1 Electrical SDecITCallOris A es dea pe ce 349 21 2 2 Part names and External IMENSIONS oocccocnccocnccocnncncnccncnnnncnnoncnonanonnnnnnnanonnnnnonanonannnnannnnnas 349 A A EL O A HET 350 21 3 1 Installation when the expansion boar
269. eference matrix when only input output devices are added 75 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption 17 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU DV ooooocccooccccococcnconoccnconononoononononnanonnos 79 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current CONSUMPRION cccocccccccnccccnnccncnnconcncnos 81 E oe B PA M STR E EIOS 81 6 8 2 B Input output powered extension units blocks oocccccoccococcconoconcnononcnccononcnnnncnonononononcncnnanos 82 6 6 3 C Special function Ce VICOS csi de oa dee tdt 83 6 9 4 D Extension Power Supply Unibet o E c de 83 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers 84 7 1 Assignment of Input Output Numbers X V ooocccccocccccococcnconoconconononoonononnononnnnonnncnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnos 84 FAT GONCEPLOr ASSIGMIN sd SAA 84 faz Example or assmnibio escote ist ii rial a 85 7 1 3 Application of I O number label uo iia 85 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function BlOCKS cccooccccoccncccccnnccncnccncnnnonononncnnnonnnonnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnncnnos 86 Pz GONCEPLOrassigninO eta escindida ile ia 86 22 2 Example or assigrnilTe so ste dot dd a oh ee 86 7 2 3 Application of unit number labels ccocooccnccoccnccoccnnccnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnn
270. en an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS Q DAN G R e Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 326 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition SJojunoo mm peads ybiH INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smok
271. en using an instruction related to pulse train output or Main unit YOOO Y001 Sus or less positioning make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100mA 10mA or more 14 24 point type 5 to 24V DC Y002 or more 24V DC 200 mA or more 1 When using an instruction related to pulse train output or Main unit YOOO to YOO2 5us or less AS n positioning make sure to set the load current to 10 to 100mA 40 60 point type 5 to 24V DC Y003 or more 0 2ms or less 24V DC 200mA or more Input output powered extension unit Output extension block 24V DC 200mA 1 The transistor OFF time is longer under lighter loads For example under a load of 24V DC 40m4A the response time is approx 0 3ms When response performance is required under light loads provide a dummy resistor as shown below to increase the load current Sink output type e Source output type Dummy resistance Dummy Fuse Load resistance Fuselll Load 6 Output current The maximum resistance loads for the input output powered extension units and output extension blocks are shown in the following table The ON voltage of the output transistor is approx 1 5V When driving a semiconductor element carefully check the input voltage characteristics of the applied element Model Output Limitation current FX3G 14MT ES FX3G 14MT ESS FX3G 24MT ES FX3G 24MT ESS Main units FX3G 40MT ES FX3G 40MT ESS The total load current of resistance loads per co
272. ening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 and 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem 114 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 1 Preparation for Wiring 9 1 Preparation for Wiring 9 1 1 Wiring procedures Before starting wiring work make sure that the main power is off Prepare the parts for wiring Prepare the solderless terminals and cables necessary for wiring
273. ent display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Input output powered extension unit FX2N 32ET ESS UL PLC segment display FX2N 48ET ESS UL N C Um Transistor output source 8 j cE a J2 Ja j 10 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO Use a 7 segment display with a latch and a built in BCD decoder ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 175 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions 13 4 2 When BCD instructions are used 176 This subsection gives examples of wiring for displaying the current value of D100 on the 2 digit 7 segment display 1 Main unit Example of program M8000 D100 K2Y010 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main unit 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ES Transistor output sink 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used main unit 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ESS PLC 7 segment display Transistor output source FX3G Series Programmable Con
274. eplate The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example FX3G 40MT ES manufacturer s serial number 8X0001 MITSUBISHI PON SOLLE FX3c 40MT ES SS xi x 7 xn xia I xs I x XH X8 X8 Xe N XG x2 Xa Xs xo xiz xis xis oe Xe M O D eo0000000 7 v uii Right side EL 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 00000000 MITSUBISHI wase PY LL y 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 37W OUT 5 30VDC 0 5A FX3G 40M SERIAL 8X0001 01234587 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 eoo000000 40MT ES LOTBX s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN EP D c nd le Tz Control number Month Example Oct 1 to 9 January to September X 7 October Y November Z December Year Example 2008 Last digit of year 2 Checking the front of the product The year and month of production of the product can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number LOT on the front at the bottom of the product Products manufactured in and after October 2008 and after S S X1 X3 X5 X7 X11 X13 X15 X17 X21 X23 X25 X27 viei e xe oa aaa e Dos e xe DX 00000000 v V 0932329387 10 11 12 13 14 1
275. er 10 for input wiring 1 Power supply specifications S Product type FX2N extension block lt lt Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit d 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later 9 FX2N 16EX ES UL 0 3kg 0 66lbs Item FX2N 8EX ES UL 0 2kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block MASS Weight I Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number 3 5 z The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation FE 25 3 Input specifications common to both sink and source inputs ge Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws A el 3 SOs Input form sink source 3282 Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 E Input signal current 5mA 24V DC 6 Input impedance 4 3kQ 3 5mA or more at 24V DC 1 5mA or less ON input Input ON current sensitivity current Input OFF current Input response time Approx 10ms Sink input No voltage contact input NPN open collector transistor Input signal form Source input No voltage contact input PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation 4 7 Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Sok s 2 Sink input wiring Source input wiring n E Main unit Main unit S E lt 00 Input circuit diagram suondo pue sun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue
276. er s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 5 Eu em Suppe FX2N 2DA Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog output P with JY992D74901 User s Guide special function block product 8 Analog input output mixed E When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed zi je Supplied a y with RRA JY997D11401 Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input and 1 09R616 si User s Manual ch analog output special function block product Manuals for positioning control MW Common 9 FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series l AE l Suv Separate Users anual JY997D16801 Details of positioning functions of FX3G FX3U FX3UC 09R620 z E 3 volume LL Series eos Positioning Control Edition co Co Manuals for FX 30P 35 lt Supplied FX 30P Describes FX 30P specification extracted from the a with inerte duse JY997D34201 FX 30P Operation manual product For datails refer to FX 30P Operation manual 1 0 Separate FX 30P JY997D34401 Describes Handy Programming Panel FX 30P 09R924 E volume Operation Manual datails El 23 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals Model name code When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Other manuals MW Variable analog potentiometers Procedures for handling the 8 ch variable analog Supplied potentiometers expansion b
277. er s Manual Hardware Edition 15 2 Power supply specifications When the terminal block covers are open 10 Input X terminals 11 Terminal block fitting screws 9 Power supply terminal i i A 12 Terminal names 13 Terminal block covers a as 12 Terminal names o SESTO ESTIS EER 14 Output Y terminals 11 Terminal block mounting screws 15 Protective terminal covers 9 Power supply terminal Connect the power supply to the input output powered extension unit at this terminal 10 Input X terminals Wire switches and sensors to these terminals 11 Terminal block mounting screws If the input output powered extension unit must be replaced loosen these screws to remove the upper part of the terminal block For anchoring the terminal block refer to Subsection 9 1 2 12 Terminal names The signal names for the power supply input terminals and output terminals are shown 13 Terminal block covers Protects the upper and lower stages of the terminal block 14 Output Y terminals Wire the intended loads contactors solenoid valves etc to these terminals 15 Protective terminal covers A protective terminal cover refer to the following drawing is fitted to the lower stage of each terminal block to prevent fingers from touching terminals thereby improving the safety FX2N ELI ES S UL UA1 UL 0000000000000 2 Side 1 Name
278. eral devices expansion boards and special adapters 83 Extension units blocks and the FX Series terminal block a Battery and memory cassette 4 5 uns E WIRING PRECAUTIONS D ANGER 382 c amp 2 Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual A If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out 1 6 Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product om5 Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or o si E wiring work 2 9 Failure to do so may cause electric shock zi 3 WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION cum 2 20 Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual 7 If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out og Do not wire vacant terminals externally S lt Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause elect
279. erminal transistor and 500V AC for 1min ground terminal Between output terminal triac and ground 1 5kV AC for 1min terminal Terminals of expansion board special adapter and special function block Only input output powered extension unit block suoneouioeds Since the expansion board and the main unit Between terminal of expansion board and CPU are not insulated it is not allowed to Not allowed Not allowed o ground terminal perform the dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test between them 5M Q or more al Between terminal of special adapter and 500V AC for 1min on 500V DC j o U lt ground terminal Megger gg D O o Refer to the manual for each special function P EE Special function block Each manual y D block 2 4 2 Power Supply Specifications 6 a E SL The specifications for the main unit power supply are explained below 2 For the power current consumed by the special function blocks refer to this manual or the special function S units blocks manual 9 Specifications Item T FX3G 14MO EO FX3G 24MO EO FX3G 40M0 EO FX3G 60MO EO Supply voltage 100 to 240V AC o8 3 E Allowable supply 85 to 264V AC co voltage range ET ZS Rated frequency 50 60Hz P Allowable instantaneous power Operation can be continued upon occurrence of instantaneous power failure for 10 ms or less 8 failure time Power fuse 250V 1A 250V 3 15A a Rush current 30A max 5ms or less 100V
280. ery mode setting method refer to Subsection 22 3 2 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection 14 4 3 Maintenance product life of relay contacts oz The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used Take care that loads BS generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life 1 Inductive load 12 O Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between contacts at shutdown which may cause E arcing At a fixed current consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller the arc energy gets larger E 1 Main units and Input output powered extension units and input output extension blocks gt For the applicable models refer to Chapter 3 1 3 The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 20VA SS The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test e ee 62 Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Y Load capacity Contact life 0 2A 100V AC 20VA 3 000 000 times 0 1A 200V AC 0 35A 100V AC S 35VA 1 000 000 times P 0 17A 200V AC a 0 8A 100V AC a 80VA 200 000 times 0 4A 200V
281. es integral with sensors or actuators these users should follow those manufacturers installation requirements Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used If NO other EMC protection is provided users may experience temporary loss or accuracy between 10 10 in very heavy industrial areas However Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed for the users complete control system Sensitive analog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling Where possible users should run analog cables separately Good cable shielding should be used When terminating the shield at Earth ensure that no earth loops are accidentally created When reading analog values EMC accuracy can be improved by averaging the readings This can be achieved either through functions on the analog special adapters boards blocks or through a user s program in the FX3G Series PLC main unit 17 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 Introduction This manual explains the procedures for selecting the system components main unit specifications and procedures for installing the main unit specifications for the input output powered extension units blocks and procedures for adding input output devices and procedures for operating the display module etc FX3G PLCs can make various kinds of con
282. evice monitor function and display screen protect 235 n O function 2 8 Q When the display screen protect function is used the generated function restriction has higher priority than 1 5 the specified device monitor function moni The table below shows the relationship between the specified device monitor function and the display screen 223 i 30S protect function 29 O M i Display screen protect function status S E Specified device e Tr EIA zi monitor function 1 Initial screen fixing function Tost tunc ti onprohibiton setting 4 6 e Initial screen Initial screen Initial screen Clock display eas Clock display Fixed to clock display Transition to another screen Qos Invalid e E NE Transition to another screen Transition to another screen Enabled oc Enabled Disabled Only monitoring of specified El device is enabled Initial screen Initial screen Valid Specified device monitor Initial screen Specified device monitor 1 T Only monitoring is Transition to another screen Specified device monitor Transition to another screen cum enabled Enabled Transition to another screen Enabled 22 MA A OFF Testing of specified device is Disabled Only monitoring of specified x 2 disabled device is enabled Ee O Initial screen Initial screen Initial screen lt Valid Specified device monitor Specified device monitor Specified device monitor Both monitoring and Transition to another screen testing are enabled Enabled Disabled Enable
283. f the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem 224 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 1 Outline 16 1 Outline 9g Connect input output extension blocks to the PLC to add more input output points 8 or 16 points can be 2 added by an input ou
284. fer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications sink input Item FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET Input points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Input form sink Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3 kO Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input Input signal form NPN open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Sink input wiring Input circuit diagram 217 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum mano N 10 Buum OO S9sf SNOEN bh I eoueua ure N uny 1S9 O c D 62 EN o o gt gt Q paJamod jndinogindu sun uoisuejx3 s sy ojg UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy ejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET 218 3 Output specifications transistor output type Item FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET Output Points 16 poi
285. finished PID operation is not started gt The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement lt Limit cycle method gt 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning measurement time ton gt t ton 0 t lt 0 198 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC operation at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 Error code Contents of error lt Limit cycle method gt 6757 Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP outside range from 0 to 32767 lt Limit cycle method gt 6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time TI outside range from 0 to 32767 lt Limit cycle method gt 6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time TD outside range from 0 to 32767 6760 ABS data read from servo sum check error Continues 6762 operation Port specified by inverter communication instruction is already used in another communication Input X specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is already 6763 used in another i
286. following rns sas specifications Fuse i Item Guide s Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage Forward current Load current or more syoojg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C Source output type Inductive load N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 3 Interlock For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc 00 bi l l Normal IIS where a hazardous condition could result if switched ON meer none POLES SEE simultaneously an external interlock should be provided rotation o sm for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to N Reverse the riaht Limit of reverse PLC output rotation gnt rotation element Normal Limit of normal rotation rotation m Reverse Limit of reverse PLC output rotation rotation element ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 159 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source 12 2 4 Example of external wiring 1 Transistor output Sink AC power supply 100 to 240V Breaker Power ON Main unit transistor output sink Emergency MC Output extension block transistor output sink zr t pA supply Hs i Input output powered extension unit transistor output sink O Power supply for load mw connected to PLC output 0 E EZ For details on eme
287. g tOOl ccccoocccccccoccnnccnncccnnnnoncnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnononcnnnnnnannnnos 55 5 2 4 Cautions on connecting peripheral equipment by way of expansion board or special adapter 55 5 2 9 Cautions On Wilke during SUD iot oiii deste obleas ut ioc dene 56 5 3 Precautions on Use of Built in USB Programming Polft ccccooccncccoccncccoccnnonoccnnonanononnanononnnancnnnos 58 5 3 1 Installation of USB driver GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later ooooooonccncccocconccnncnoncononcnnnononnnnnos 58 5 3 2 Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later nennen 58 5 4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series 59 5 5 Cautions on using transparent port 2 port function of GOT F900 Series 60 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability ooocccooccnncccnncconnnccocnnconcnononcnonononononononononononos 61 5 6 1 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability oooccccoccnccocncnnccnnnoconononanonocanononancnononononanncnnnos 61 6 Examination of System Configuration 62 6 1 Configuration of a Whole SySteM ccooonncnccconcncconcnnconononononnonconnononnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnanannns 62 6 1 1 Expansion board connector conversion adapter memory cassette display module configuration 63 6 2 Rules or System ConfIguratiort ire erecti pa foci ato 64 6 3 Number of Input Output Points and Maximum Number of Input Outp
288. gramming manual Abbreviation of FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instructions Data Communication Edition Abbreviation of FX Series User s Manual Data Communication Edition Analog Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition Positioning Control Edition Abbreviation of FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series User s Manual Positioning Control Edition FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Features and Part Names 2 1 Major Features Features and Part Names Major Features 1 Basic functions Up to 256 input output points The total number of inputs and outputs 128 points maximum directly connected to the PLC and remote inputs and outputs 128 points maximum of the CC Link can be extended to 256 points Program memory The PLC has a 32K step EEPROM memory Built in USB port The PLC has a built in USB port for the programming communication function to enable high speed communication at 12Mbps Built in RUN STOP switch The PLC can be started and stopped with the built in switch RUN and STOP commands can be given to the PLC through a general purpose input terminal or peripheral device Built in Variable analog potentiometers The PLC has two built in variable analog potentiometers available for adjusting the timer set time Writing during RUN The programming software for personal computer enables you to mo
289. grams as shown to PLC output rotation the right contact Reverse PLC output Limit of reverse rotation contact rotation 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 4 Example of external wiring oz 30 n D 2 AC power supply 100 to 240V Main unit relay output JEN Breaker Power ON BuutM 1ndino unc 10 Buum OO S9sf snoueA I Output extension block relay output ol O amp Sas qu e LEER o2 O d EN URE n c iio a ses c 2 zi Input output powered 1 6 om5 extension unit sks relay output SS oc 53 Z N C Um 50 gt 23 og Load E E Power supply for load 1 8 connected to PLC output 358 oU For details on emergency stop Y operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 4 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 represents vacant terminals ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION 2 e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 155 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Ou
290. grams between the memory cassette and the internal EEPROM 21 2 Specifications 21 2 1 Electrical specifications PROTECT Loader Compatible Model Name Max Memory Capacity Memory Type Nam VERUS Write 32000 steps EEPROM 1st article FX3G EEPROM 32L 2k 4k 8k 16k selectable 10 000 times Provided Ver 1 00 21 2 2 Part names and External dimensions FX3G EEPROM 32L 1IRD key Units mm inches Reading PLC memory cassette 2 RD LED 3 WR key writing memory cassette PLC 4WR LED 5 Memory cassette fixing holes 2 93 2 Mounting holes 6 PROTECT switch 7 Detachment lever 35 1 38 9 6 0 38 8 Main unit connector 4 3 2 1 349 KJOW N 9jesse2 N apeg IN 00080 00081 S17 uononJjsu W s n d jeloeds FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 3 Installation 21 3 Installation 21 3 1 Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the memory cassette Installation when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together 350 The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example Remove the top cover Remove the top cover A in the right figure as shown in the right figure Top cover S Attach the side cover Attach the side cover B in the right figure as shown in the right figure Caution Make sure to attach the side cover befor
291. h Pulse period measurement function MI80752 Pulse width Pulse period M 8075 measurement setting flag MI8076 2 X000 Pulse width Pulse period M measurement flag MI80772 X001 Pulse width Pulse period M measurement flag MI80782 X003 Pulse width Pulse period M measurement flag 29 X004 Pulse width Pulse period MISO measurement flag M 80802 X000 Pulse period measurement mode M 80812 X001 Pulse period measurement mode M 80822 X003 Pulse period measurement mode M 80832 X004 Pulse period measurement mode 2 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Flag M 8090 to M 8100 Memory Information Not used M 8101 M 8102 Not used M 8103 M 8104 M 8105 ON when writing to EEPROM memory 8706 DH E Output Refresh Error M 8109 Output refresh error M 8110 to M 8119 Not used Correspond ing special device D8074 to D8079 D8080 to D8085 D8086 to D8091 D8092 to D8097 D8074 to D8079 D8080 to D8085 D8086 to D8091 D8092 to D8097 D8109 Correspond Number and Operation and function ing special name device RS FNC 80 and Computer Link ch1 8120 3 RS FNC 80 instruction i Lil d Send wait flag 7 RS FNC 80 instruction 3 motes Send request ee RS FNC 80 instruction 3 Nota Receive complete flag pees RS FNC 80 instruction ee Carrier detection flag i miet M 8126 Computer link ch 1 Global ON Computer link ch1 eer On
292. h Remote O adapter and dedicated power supply for CC Link LT refer to the relevant product Power supply adapter manuals and related documents As for the CC Link remote I O station and remote device station refer to the relevant manuals and related documents Manuals for analog temperature control MW Common Sure FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series Details of analog special function block FX3U 4AD E User s Manual JY997D16701 FX3U 4DA FX3UC 4AD and analog special adapter 09R619 volume Analog Control Edition FX3U ADP E Analog input temperature input and temperature control When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input iin FX3G 2AD BD JY997D33501 expansion board i duel Installation Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series P User s Manual Analog Control Edition Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special Supplied with FX3U 4AD JY997D20701 function block i oda Installation Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series P User s Manual Analog Control Edition a ha FX2N 2AD Procedures for handling the 2 ch analog input special with JY992D74701 User s Guide function block product SUppiiga FX2N 4AD Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog input special with JY992D65201 User s Guide function block product Supplied FX2N 8A
293. h the number of connected analog special adapters Devices which cannot be written are shaded in Operation and function column gt For details refer to the Analog Control Edition Appendix A 4 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8299 Operation and function LES analog special adapter M 8288 Notused used Notused used Notused used Not used 2nd analog special adapter M 8297 Not used dl hold mode cancel Number FX3U 4AD TC ADP Not used Not used Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Operation and function FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 1st analog special adapter Number 9jlesse2 N JOUJOJN h M 8280 Temperature unit selection M 8281 Input sensor selection 22 M 8282 Not used w M 8283 Not used M 8284 Not used M 8285 Not used M 8286 Not used M 8287 Not used M 8288 Not used M 8289 Not used 2nd analog special adapter M 8290 M 8291 Input sensor selection M 8292 Not used M 8293 Not used M 8294 Not used M 8295 Not used M 8296 Not used M 8297 Not used M 8298 Not used M 8299 Not used Temperature unit selection 379 0008d 0008IN sr1 uononJjsu UJ seoi eq jeroeds FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M829
294. hen a Fatal error occurred message appears ccoocnccccncccccncncnconcnncncnnnncncnnnnnonnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnos 324 19 20 Menu Display Characters Japanese and English Display Character Correspondence i o C TM 325 20 Terminal Block 326 20 EO VT c da 328 20 1 1 JProduct CorgulatiOL teta euin npud Da ena lirio eto eek Redon tali gus ici lili 329 20 2 External Dimensions and Component Names occoccncccccnccccnccnccncnncncnonnnnnnnnnnonnnconnnnnonnnonnnnnnonnnos 330 RESI denaro ET 331 204 Installation WOK ctricos libido eoo tue CREE LLL C I C LOL Cs e pL UL dicas 333 20 IAS tala Oo 333 A a AA A A II cue rires o eeu Eu daos cie da 333 20 4 3 Input output cable ConneclO Du scies duco date aha o ug aec ore ud Ok Bac Dea o du Ee a da FE cS 333 20 4 4 Connection to terminal block ssesessseeee mmm nnn nnne nnne 334 20 5 FX IOE TB FA 92E TB ron etie basate a eel ia 335 20921 pic A eae ene a ene an E a ee ae eon ar eee 399 20 5 2 Example of input external WiriNQ cccccocccccconncoconncocononocononononnnonnnnnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonenaneness 336 20 50 35 OIPputexteinal WINING idas 336 11 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents FABER EP Cuomo 337 20 01 SPECI CANONS EON RO RE m T Tr 337 20 GZ isi igniciRo toilet rc 338 20 6 3 Example of input external WIritng cccccsssceccccesccecc
295. holes Unit mm inches UOISU9 X3 iddns Jamog POWERO 00 cm LO Y co or O 00 FXsu 1PSU 5V suondo mouning hole pitch pue sun 1X3 JEYIO 9 0 36 1 55 2 17 87 3 43 ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisua 2 yoojg euw CO 263 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 17 Extension Power Supply Unit User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution 17 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution 1 The power is supplied as follows when the input extension block including the FX2n 8ER ES UL and FX2n 8ER is used on the downstream side of the extension power supply unit e When the main unit is located on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit The power is supplied from the main unit For details refer to Chapter 6 When the input output powered extension unit is located on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit The power is supplied from the 24V DC service power supply of the input output powered extension unit gt For details refer to Chapter 6 2 Grounding and power cables should be positioned to exit the unit from above For details refer to Subsection 9 4 4 and Subsection 9 4 5 264 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 11 18 Other Extension Devices an
296. hould be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 and 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem 92 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 1 Installation location 8 1 Installation location Use the PLC under the environmental conditions complying with the generic specifications Chapter 4 Keep a space of 50 mm 1 97 away between the unit main body and other devices and structure Install the unit as far away as possible from high
297. hould be the following value Resistance gt For details on the common terminal for each model load refer to the Section 4 7 Terminal Layout Max load e 1 output point common terminal 2A or less 77 4 output points common terminal 8A or less E Inductive oe 3 load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 ej For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 4 o Min load 5V DC 2mA reference value al Open circuit leakage current DIE Response OFF gt 0N Approx 10ms ST z 2 time ON OFF Approx 10ms E SES Circuit insulation Mechanical inslation E DISP ay ohroutput LED on panel lights when power is applied to relay coil operation 6 On S 23 a E Output circuit L oad configuration i We 7 F COMO DE Fuse co se A common number applies to the Jof COM gc 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points 8 zA D m 537 338 oa 3S lt 2 a El 45 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications 4 4 2 Transistor output 46 Transistor output specifications FX3G 14MT ES S FX3G 24MT ES S FX3G 40MT ES S FX3G 60MT ES S Number of output points 6 points 8 10 points 16 24 points Connecting type Removable terminal block M3 screw Transistor sink output FX3G LIMT ES Item Output type form Transistor source output FX3G LIMT ESS E
298. hown As for the functions and program examples refer to the separate User s Manual LILILJEdition separate manual The manuals for FX3G Series will be available in or after September 2008 User s manual The procedures for wiring and installing specifications and functions are explained To use some products separate manuals may be necessary 20 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 3 List of manuals FX3G Series PLC main units supplied only with the hardware manual For the details of the hardware of FX3G Series refer to this manual For instructions for programming and hardware information on special function devices refer to the relevant manuals uononpou N Indispensable manuals v Manuals necessary for some purposes A Manuals with separate volumes for details Manuals for PLC main unit SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Model name code OO BIFX3G PLC main unit 5J Extractions of descriptions of input output 28 Supplied FX3G Series specifications wiring and installation of FX3G Series Q e E O with HARDWARE MANUAL JY997D33401 PLC main unit from FX3G Series User s Manual 5 product Hardware Edition For the detailed explanation refer to this manual Sevar FX3G Series User s Manual Details of hardware of FX3G Series PLC main unit 4 p Hardware Edition JY997D31301 including input output spe
299. ice power supply o A special function block is handled in the same way as 16 output points zu erm Example Number of gt added points o 3 uonejeisu OO 200 soo 200 100 o 0 8 16 24 32 gt Number of added points o Example When 8 input points and 8 output points are connected the current of the 24V DC service 2338 power supply becomes 150mA or less la 71 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 72 Confirm the current capacity of the 24V DC service power supply from the value shown in the quick reference matrix This remaining power supply capacity current can be used as power supply for external loads such as sensors by the user If it is not possible to connect input output extension blocks even using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit consider adding an input output powered extension unit to the system Refer to 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 6 5 2 Selection example 1 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit This subsection explains an example in which 8 input points and 16 output points are added to the following system configuration using the 24V DC service power supply of the main
300. ies Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product TE Terminal block M3 screws 33 The extension cable is already connected to the extension block amp 18 1 6 FX2N 4DA 9 mS Ofc TE External Dimensions Terminal Layout 9 2E c 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches zl uda 6 c o UJ ITI 5 a a OOc POWERO 0 EE J z M vo E LOO oc Y 33 So os E 3 E 17 E C Um 2 20 20 DO 5 30 mo Oo c lt e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product suondo pue shun 3X3 Jeujo Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 267 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 7 FX2N 4AD PT External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWERO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 4 0 16 9 0 36 55 2 17 87 3 43 e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screw
301. ies PLCs Sg FX3G PLCs or main units Abbreviation of FX3G Series PLC main units Y Expansion boards Special adapters Generic name for the following models FX3G 232 BD FX3G 422 BD FX3G 485 BD FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 8AV BD Generic name for communication special adapters and analog special adapters C9 ee a a gt 0 Communication special Generic name for the following models ag adapters FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB 2S O e Generic name for the following models o Analog special adapters FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 4DA ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Extension devices Generic name for FX3U Series special function blocks FX2N Series extension devices 4 Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N Series input output T FAAN SENES MESS extension blocks and FX2N Series special function blocks E Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N Series input output 3 Input output extension devices E to extension blocks o m o FX2N Series input output powered extension units FX2N Series input output Generic name for the following models FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ER FX2N 32bES FX2N 32bET ESS UL FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ER FX2N 48ER ES UL FX2N 48ET FX2N 48ET ESS UL FX2N 48ER UA1 UL Generic name for the following models al UU lt extension blocks FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8ER ES so EXON Series input extension Generic name for the fo
302. ifications external dimensions and terminal layout of the main units gt For the specifications for the input output powered extension units refer to Chapter 15 gt For the specifications for the input output extension blocks refer to Chapter 16 4 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating and 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Hz Acceleration m s Half amplitude mm ie ween installed on weet ss oe Sweep Count for M Int 5700100 49 XY Z 10 times sos Shock resistance 147m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise resistance By noise simulator at noise voltage of 1 000Vp p noise width of 1us rise time of 1ns and period of 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 1 5kV AC for one minute voltage 500V AC for one minute Between each terminals and ground terminal Insulation resistance 5MQGor more by 500V DC megger Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Groundin gt lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Working atmosphere Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dust Working altitude lt 2000m 1 For more information on the dielectric withstand voltage test and the insulation resistance test of the terminals of each product refe
303. iges eec aedis ae EEUU LAIT DM M ae eas ah Doe 361 22 4 1 Battery life and replacement guidelines c oooonncncccooccnncononccnnonnnnonnnononcnnnononnnnnonnnnnnnnonencnnnnss 361 22 4 2 Reading the date of manufacture ccccococnonocccoconncconnnncnonnnnnnnnnonccnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnrnnnnrnnnannnnss 361 22 4 3 Special battery low voltage device amp notification program example 361 22 9 e abis enactment i 362 22 5 Battery Related Precautions suoi pani Doer Decet Oeo edere also 362 12 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 suse Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 eee ceece sees seen eeees Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 Appendix A 3 1 Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8279 oooooccccococccccccoccncccnoncnnonanoconnnnos Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8B279 ooooooocccccccconcncccnncccncnnancnnnononcnnnnns Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 Appendix A 4 1 Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8299 oooooccccococcccocooccnconooncnnonononononnos Appendix A 4 2 Special data registers D8280 to D8B299 ooocoooccccccccoccccononcocnconanconnononcnnnnns Appendix B Instructi
304. imer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Make sure to cut off all phases o
305. imum specified resistance load Capacitive loads such as capacitors may be present in electronic circuit loads including inverters For the maximum specified resistance load refer to Subsection 20 7 1 342 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB os The FX 16EYT H TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor 2 Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output 1 2 e The applications shown below are not supported B Unsupported Applications E Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction pulse outputs absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV 1 3 instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction lt lt CON Time division inputs Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction Eu Time division output Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction cg D o 20 8 1 Specifications I T E Transistor output eza Item S02 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB us 2g SP 2 naaa Couper 7 a TP 2m SKO coupler ES 15 Input output AEST m Es circuitry E 2
306. in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 and 0 25 N m Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem 13 1 Notes about Examples of Wiring The examples of wiring are given under the following conditions For the example of positioning wiring refer to the Positioning Control Edition e The input output numbers are the actual numbers on the program They may differ from the numbers shown on the product terminals Product input output specifications Check the product input output specifications when using any example of wiring Products only for sink input and products both for sink
307. in the quick reference matrix 1 In the case of AC power supply DC input type The remaining power supply capacity current can be used as a power supply to loads sensors or the like When special adapters and special function units blocks are connected by external wiring it is necessary to consider whether they can be covered by the remaining power supply capacity 2 In the case of AC power supply AC input type 24V DC service power supply is not provided When the power supply capacity is insufficient connect another input output powered extension unit When two input output powered extension units or more are connected calculate the power supply capacities of the input output extension blocks and special function blocks connected to them and check the capacity 76 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption UONINPOJJU Select an input output powered extension unit For the data on the number of input output occupied points and current consumption of each type refer to Section 6 8 N Capacity of built in power supply EOwsUsuBUly NUT Number of input 24V DC E service classification Cass icahon connected units ys d Pp dais T power supply supply mA mA SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Go
308. inal Layout 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs Y g Installation DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in u width or screws 9 m Accessories Manual supplied with product oa 2 poles Terminal block European type ap eu E E 2 O E l 5 17 6 0 7 poles 18 2 2 FX3U 4DA ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout e MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in width or screws 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Installation e Accessories Manual supplied with product e Terminal block European type 18 2 3 FX3u 4AD PT W ADP External Dimensions Terminal Layout e MASS Weight 0 1kg 0 22lbs DIN rail of 35 mm 1 38 in 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches e Installation width or screws 10 e Accessories Manual supplied with product poles e Terminal block European type 5 2 92 0 62 17 6 0 7 poles 273 SJojunoo mm peedg uDi e Buum mano N dh 10 buum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 indinomdu C E U O wm d lt UOISU9 X3 suondo pue shun xg euo 1 ainpoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and
309. ing precautions 162 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type 12 3 2 External wiring precautions oz n D 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits a A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Bun 1ndjno 2 Micro current load The PLC s internal Triac output circuit is equipped with a turn off 13 C R absorber When connecting a very low current load of Mio curentlssd lt lt 0 4VA 100V AC or less or 1 6VA 200V AC or less please connect a surge absorber parallel to the load a Select the rated voltage of a surge absorber that is suitable for the D Surge load being used Refer to the table below for other specifications absorber Item Guide 1 4 Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF 3 ei 0 Resistance value Approx 100 to 2000 vg 2 GD 5 Reference 88 Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name ia Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 1 5 ngs 3 Interlock E For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where on E a hazardous condition could result if switched ON Inter Limit of ee Go S simultaneously an external interlock should be provided lt B lock rotation Normal for inter
310. input ma Keyword Incorrect I los kkk eS Keyword XK kk kkk k k syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C Make Keyword C Um mS valid S S 2m OK gt Execute EE ESC gt Cancel 00 suondo pue Sun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 62 pel D lt O 2 e D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 303 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Keyword 19 11 5 Canceling a keyword 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Keyword item then press OK to display the keyword input screen If a keyword has been registered one of the following screens is displayed Ifa 16 digit keyword is registered an 8 digit x 2 line screen shown at left below is displayed f an 8 digit keyword is registered an 8 digit x 1 line screen shown at right below is displayed 16 digit keyword 8 digit keyword Please input Please input Keyword Keyword Y KKK KKK EN 2nd keyword i k KKK X 0 Kk kK RK KK 2 Use the buttons to specify the first digit of the keyword then press OK to proceed to the next digit To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 16 digit keyword 8 digit keyword Please input Please input Keyword Keyword 6723B967 AF2C45BXX 01234567 Lowest order digit Lowest order digit final digit final digit Button Operation Description Cance
311. input and for source input are available e The examples of programming applied instructions are given based on the allocation of the input output numbers for wiring gt For the applied instructions refer to the Programming Manual 166 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN 11 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 gg 13 2 1 When DSW instructions are used Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 4 digit digital switch to the data register D100 are given below 1 1 Main unit O O S Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 10 BuutM 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main Ses snoueA unit 1 4 Digital 100 10 Sop switch of LD gt BCD S 8 0 1A 50V Fi A A A KR A A A KA A A N IN A A ni diode is Lec xcu MAE NE Grm memi S cms s A d 15 SIRE E us RR e mps 8 SEE O S S X010 X011 X012 X013 S Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ES 1 6 OV 24V COM4 Y010 YO11 YO12 YO13 mm Qo amp mE 520 oc 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used mundo j main unit Sok EE E 71 3 3 Digital 100 103
312. ion Mechanical zero return instruction with DOG DSZR search function Instruction to read the current value from our ABS servo amplifier with absolute position ABS detecting function Positioning relative positioning to specify the EU movement from the current position Positioning absolute positioning to specify DRVA the target position based on the current value 0 Instruction to change the pulse train output PLSV frequency Instruction for positioning based on batch TBL setting of positioning operation moving distance and speed 3 Display functions display module Supported in Ver 1 10 or later FX3G 5DM Display Module option can be incorporated in the PLC Monitor test function Devices can be monitored and tested by operating the buttons on the display module The button operations can be inhibited by the user program Other functions On the display module you can set the time adjust the contrast and display the PLC version and error codes Refer to 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM in this manual Communication and network functions The expansion board and special adapter for each communication function can be connected Kinds of communication functions e Programming communication through RS 232C RS 422 and USB Refer to Data Communication Edition e N N Network Refer to Data Communication Edition e Parallel link Refer to Data Communication Edition Compute
313. ion do not activate or write to the devices with brackets on the first letter such as M 8000 or D 8001 in the program 22 F 3 For detailed explanation refer to the Programming Manual eg CO D Oo a a a a S D Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 oF Sg IL CD Number and CoHespongs Number and OTT ponas B Operation and function ing special Operation and function ing special name name device device 7 PLC Status Clock 5 18000 poo RUN monitor RUN j M 8011 En NO contact input ON and OFF in 10ms cycle M8061 aia ON 5ms OFF 5ms i M 8001 pulse l i l RUN monitor Error occurrence i M 8012 NC contact ON and OFF in 100ms cycle 100ms clock M 8002 M8000 pulse ON 50ms OFF 50ms Initial pulse VIERTE ero Tra M8001 M an in 1sec cycle f ee meoot U 1sec clock pulse ON 500ms OFF 500ms M 8014 ON and OFF in 1mi M 8003 M8002 M an in 1min cycle l 1min clock pulse ON 30sec OFF 30sec Initial pulse M8003 NC contact M 8015 Clock stop and preset H lt 1 scan time For real time clock ON when either M8060 M8061 M 8016 M8064 M8065 M8066 or M8067 D8004 is ON M 8017 30 seconds correction M 8005 ON when battery voltage is below mnes For real time clock Battery voltage low the value set in D8006 MI8018 Installation detection Always ON i M 8006 It is set when battery voltage low is e For real time clock Battery error latch detected M 8019 Real ti
314. ion 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 Introduction of Products 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names The following system configuration is classified into product groups A to O in the product introduction sections given below Display module F Expansion boards A4 Battery E Memory cassettes FX3G 232 BD FX3G 2AD BD e FX3U 32BL FX3G EEPROM 32L FX3G 422 BD FX3G 1DA BD rae FX3G 485 BD FX3G 8AV BD 8 is 7e 7e a Special adapters Ej Connector q Maimunits e Input output extension blocks T input output Output 9 adapter p P FX3U AAD ADP FX3G 14MR ES FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX3U 4DA ADP FX3G CNV ADP FX36 24MR ES ES gt FX2N 8EX FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 40MT ES S e FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EYR FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3G GOMR ES FX3G 60MT ES S FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 8EYT e FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX2N 16EX FX2N 8EYT H FX3U 4AD TC ADP FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYR Communication Input output FX2N 16EYT FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 16EYT C EXSU ABSADPLM B FX2N 8ER FX2N 16EYS FX3U 485ADP MB FX Series terminal blocks can be connected to connector type units J Extension cables 35 Connector conversion adapter FXON 30EC FX2N CNV BC e FXON 65EC eee O MI
315. iring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Product type FX2N extension block FX2N connector type extension block Rated voltage 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later Item FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44Ibs 0 3kg 0 66lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transistor output type Item FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Output Points 16 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Connector terminal block Output unit type Transistor sink output External power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5A point The total load current per common should be Resistance load as follows 4 output points common 0 8A or less 0 3A point The total load current per common should be as follows Bauput ponis common 1 0Aor less 716 output points common 1 6A or less Max load 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common 7 2 W 24V DC termi
316. is counted as write to the EEPROM memory Be careful not to exceed the allowable number writes The allowable number of writes is 10 000 or less for the memory cassette EEPROM and 20 000 or less for the built in memory EEPROM 19 7 Error Check The main unit s error status displays at the ErrorCheck menu 1 At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the ErrorCheck item then press OK The error check result then displays at the error display screen ErrorCheck refer to fig at right To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC at the menu screen When no errors have occurred No errors 2 If multiple errors have occurred the keys can be used to switch between the error display pages Areni eroras cU Button Operation Description ErrorCheck ESC Returns to the menu screen 1 error or less Disabled 2 errors or more Displays the previous page s error screen 1 errororless Disabled 2 errors or more Displays the next page s error screen OK Returns to the menu screen Display Content Display Content 1 Active error flag 2 Error code 3 Number of concurrent errors displays only when multiple errors have occurred 3 To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC 296 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 8 LANGUAGE
317. ison and output the comparison results with the relevant high speed counting operation These instructions have limitations on the number of times of use as shown in the following table When the output relay Y has been designated for comparison results the ON OFF status of the output is affected directly until the END instruction output is refreshed When the PLC is a relay output type a mechanical delay in operation approx 10ms is caused Therefore it is best to use a transistor output type PLC Applied instruction Limitation on number of times of use of instruction HSCS HSCR HSZ Up to 6 times 1 The overall frequency changes when the HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is used For details on the overall frequency refer to Section 11 7 147 sjajuno pasds ybiH Buum mano N 10 Bum OO Ses SNOEN I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 paiemog indinoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 ma syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy ejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 Use of High speed Counters 11 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 11 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency 1 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency When any of the following functions instructions is used the over
318. it 1 5 D Programming 2 30 connector a RS 422 m m s syoojg UOISU9 X3 jd noandu C Positioning mark X Communication cable N Positioning mark yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 2 For continuous use of a peripheral device such as GOT Cut off the area shown in the left figure below of the peripheral device connector cover main unit using a nipper etc and connect the peripheral device as shown in the right figure below 00 Peripheral device connecting Connection example connector cover suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue Communication Cut off the dotted cable line area 2 yoojg euw CO 179 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 1 Preparation for Test Operation 3 For continuous use of a peripheral device such as GOT using the connector conversion adapter Cut off the area shown in the left figure below of the connector conversion adapter using a nipper etc and connect the peripheral device as shown in the right figure below Connection example Communication cable Cut off the dotted line area 14 1 3 Connection to built in programming connector USB Connect and disconnect the communication cable for the peripheral device personal computer At connection confirm the cable and connector shap
319. it FX3U 1PSU 5V 80 1 Input output occupied points by special function blocks are excluded 2 For the input extension block including the FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8ER it is not necessary to calculate the current consumption of the internal 24V DC Include the input extension block in calculation for the nearest main unit or input output powered extension unit located on the upstream side to the extension power supply unit When the main unit is on the upstream side refer to Subsection 6 5 1 and Subsection 6 5 2 When the input output powered extension unit is on the upstream side refer to Subsection 6 6 1 and Subsection 6 6 2 3 A maximum of 8 special function units blocks are connectable including the main unit and the input output powered extension unit Determine whether the devices can be added to the extension power supply unit Calculate the current to confirm whether the selected extension devices can be connected Calculate the current consumption of the built in 5V DC power supply os erae Current consumption Calculation result Extension power Total of current consumed supply unit by extension devices ui E 1 gt Calculate the available current supply from the internal 24V DC power supply Power supply capacity for internal Current consumption Calculation result 24V DC Extension power Total of current consumed supply unit by extension devices 2 a 2 _ A Calculate the availab
320. it Up to 8 units 64 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 2 Rules of System Configuration Connection restriction and calculation of current consumption UONINPOJJU The number of points and number of units connected are restricted by the number of extension blocks connected to the main unit The built in power supply of the input output powered extension unit and extension power supply unit supplies the power to a unit block board extended to the corresponding unit The built in power supply refers to the 24V DC service power supply 5V DC power supply and internal 24V DC power supply The consumed power varies depending on the type of extended unit block board N SOWeN ed pue sounjeo Input output Extension block Extension block Extension Extension block Risus dd Main unit some blocks can Larabie some blocks can power supply some blocks can P be connected T be connected unit be connected 3 ao Power supply Power supply Power supply from Power supply from S a from main unit from main unit input output powered extension power a extension unit j supply unit y e Refer to Section 6 4 Refer to Section 6 5 Refer to Section 6 6 Refer to Section 6 7 1 When connecting an input extension block on the downstream side of an extension power supply unit 4 supply the power to the input extension block from the nearest main unit
321. itching from ON to OFF and from OFF to ON Input impedance 3 Input sensitivity The input current and input sensitivity of these PLCs are shown in the following table Item Specifications Input voltage 100 to 120V AC 10 15 50 60Hz uc 6 2 mA 110V 60Hz Percentage of simultaneous power on 7096 or P 4 7 mA 100V 50Hz less ON 3 8mA 80V AC Input sensitivity oon OFF 1 7mA 30V AC 136 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 3 100V AC Input 10 3 3 Examples of external wiring 100V AC input UONINPOJJU Main unit Fuse E CD HHA O ie o o ref SOWeN ed NO pue sanjea me ESL I A 24 n om X001 OO 3 Sink wr a a 33 Sink wiring PERS f Input S 5v l0V 24V impedance 4 Input extension block T 2 2 ej Two wire proximity al IL terminal AA sensor 335 Input output powered extension unit E S FX2N 48ER UA1 UL NO NDE Class D 6 grounding S 25 a ES S 100V AC Ds r input type ES 5v 0v 24V co Input Ic terminal ge S D 3 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures E 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance E may be required 3 Do not take input signals from loads generating surge 4 The 24V and
322. ition l Procedures for handling the RS 232C 8 Supplied Nd with FX3U 232ADP JY997D13701 communication special adapter i odii Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual 2 P Data Communication Edition E Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 422 communication EI un FX3G 422 BD JY997D32101 expansion board i Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual product diga n Data Communication Edition 9 Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 485 communication PP FX3G 485 BD expansion board 0 with JY997D32201 l 20 Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual SSE product ae euo Data Communication Edition E o Sucwied Procedures for handling the RS 485 communication Se PP FX3U 485ADP MB special adapter a with JY997D26301 Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual product de at Data Communication Edition 1 0 3 a El 21 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals code Supplied Procedures for handling the RS 485 communication gt FX3U 485ADP JY997D13801 special adapter i Installation Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manual product mer m Data Communication Edition Supolicd Procedures for handling the RS 232C RS 485 in FX 485PC IF JVoo2pa1oo1 Conversion interface Hardware Manual When using refer also to FX Series User s Manua
323. k 7 Failure to do so may cause electric shock 53 PE co Em zc P uonejeisu BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 91 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque s
324. l product ie i Data Communication Edition BICC Link CC Link LT When using each product refer also to the User s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Supplied Procedures for handling the CC Link master special aa FX2N 16CCL M yy992D87801 function block Hardware Manual When using refer also to FX2N 16CCL M User s product Manual we Separe PRAN aah JY992D87901 Details of CC Link master special function block 09R710 volume User s Manual Supplied Procedures for handling the CC Link Intelligent an FX3U 64CCL JY997D29801 device station special function block i Installation Manual When using refer also to FX3U 64CCL User s product Manual y Separate Jide Mein JY997D30401 Details of the CC Link Intelligent device station 09R718 volume User s Manual special function block Supp ieg FX2N 32CCL Procedures for handling the CC Link remote device with JY992D71701 E 09R711 product User s Manual station special function block Supplied Remote lO station and with remote device station for product CC Link Supplied FX2N 64CL M c map P the CC Link LT master win ae Manual Rd When using refer also to FX2N 64CL M User s i product Hardware Volume Manual Details FX2N 64CL M l Separate Users Manual JY997D08501 Details of the CC Link LT master special function 09R706 volume block Detailed Volume Supplied Remote device As for the remote device station remote l O station power supply wit
325. l Word OR Logical Exclusive OR SFTR 35 SFTL 36 WSFR 37 WSFL 38 SFWR 39 SFRD Bit Shift Right Bit Shift Left Word Shift Right Word Shift Left Shift Write FIFO FILO Control Shift Read FIFO Control O R FNC No Function Data Operation 40 ZRST Zone Reset 41 DECO Decode 42 ENCO Encode 43 SUM Sum of Active Bits 44 Check Specified Bit Status 45 Mean 46 ANS Timed Annunciator Set 47 ANR Annunciator Reset MA 49 FLT Conversion to Floating Point High Speed Processing 50 REF Refresh 51 52 MTR 53 HSCS 54 HSCR Input Matrix High Speed Counter Set High Speed Counter Reset 55 HSZ High Speed Counter Zone Compare 56 SPD Speed Detection 57 PLSY Pulse Y Output 58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 59 Acceleration Deceleration Setup Handy Instruction 60 Initial State 61 SER Search a Data Stack 62 Absolute Drum Sequencer 63 Incremental Drum Sequencer apo spo 66 Alternate State 67 Ramp Variable Value spo NH External FX I O Device o f o n 72 Digital Switch Thumbwheel Input B 74 Seven Segment With Latch m m m gt 78 Read From A Special Function Block 79 Write To A Special Function Block 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN N fianeg IN gt sooo Jeloeds Co c ce e U Co o ce e sr1 uononJjsu 383 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B Instruction List Appendix B 3 Applied In
326. l circuit Photo y coupler L 9 4 to 39kO0 CSF r Photo 1 coupler Bub xy Photo 4 A coupler y 4 HT 3 3kO gt LL mmm LCN coupler ay OOO to 0017 Lower numbers A AO to AA7 Higher numbers poo 12 3 004 5 6 7 AMO 1 2 3 444 5 6 7 PLC output No poo 1 2 3 004 5 6 7 440 1 2 3 4445 6 7 Photo coupler power supply TTE For the FX 16EYT H TB the output transistor elements are as shown in the figure below 20 Terminal Block FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 8 FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 20 8 4 External wiring precautions SF Bo OQ D 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB 1 2 To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity E 2 Transistor protection circuit for inductive loads nducive The transistor output circuit in the terminal block is load 13 equipped with a Zener diode 50V for protection Fusell lt lt When an inductive load is connected however a diode should be connected parallel to the load when required as The diode must comply with the specifications shown D below Terminal block Reverse voltage 5 to 10 times of the load voltage dh I F
327. le input output occupied points excluding the occupied input output by special function blocks Connectable I O Number of I O occupied points occupied points Calculation result Extension power Total of I O occupied points supply unit by extension devices points points points If the calculation result for the 5V DC power supply is a negative value the current consumption exceeds the power supply capacity If the calculation result for the internal 24V DC is a negative value the current consumption exceeds the power supply capacity If the calculation result for the number of occupied input output points is a negative value the available number of input output points is exceeded Reconfigure the system with an input output powered extension unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption 6 8 Number of Input Output Occupied Points and Current Consumption UONINPOJJU The following tables show the number of input output points or the number of input output occupied points for each type of device along with the power supply type and current consumption values needed for selecting a product N e Number of input output points or input output occupied points on each type of device Output current of 24V DC service power supply of main units Output current of 5V DC power supply and
328. les mos Dc 2 O Place a flathead screwdriver against the DIN rail 2 mounting hook in the posture shown refer to Fig 1 at Q a nm SS 3 Move the flathead screwdriver in direction shown at NO TE right refer to Fig 2 to detach the DIN rail mounting SB hook from the DIN rail 2 Remove the product from the DIN rail 17 20 4 3 Input output cable connection E The terminal block s CN1 and CN2 connectors comply with the MIL 83503 standard 1 8 Refer to Subsection 9 2 2 for input output cable information suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO 1 D 5 un o z Q 77 D lt o ex e D Input output cable Terminal block yoo g jJeuiuJe 333 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 4 Installation Work 20 4 4 Connection to terminal block 1 Terminal Screw Size The product terminal screws are as shown in the table below Model Name Terminal Screw Size FX 16E TB FX 32E TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 2 Wire end treatment and tightening torque Use solderless terminals of the following size Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 Nem to 0 8 Nem e When 1 wire is connected to 1 terminal Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below and install it as shown in the lower right figure Terminal Crimp o 3 7 0 15 screw terminal 6 8mm 0 27 T Om or less b 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal or less Whe
329. leted equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt ab
330. licable programming tools can programmed by setting alternative model 1 Alternative model setting Model to be programmed Model to be set Priority High gt Low FX3G PLC FX3G FXAN FX2N FX2 1 FX2N is selected when the FX 10P E is used 2 Contents of restrictions e Programming is enabled only in the function ranges such as instructions device ranges and program sizes available in a PLC selected as the alternative model Use a programming tool that can select either FX3G to change parameters i e memory capacity file register capacity etc The built in USB port cannot be used for programming communication 54 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 2 Programming Tool Applicability 5 2 3 Program transfer speed and programming tool When either of the following interfaces is used for GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later writing and reading of programs and monitoring of devices can be executed at high speed 115 2 kbps in FX3G PLCs FX 30P can be executed at high speed 115 2kbps in FX3G PLCs UONINPOJJU N 1 Applicable interface e Standard built in port RS 422 or function extension board FX3G 422 BD for RS 422 When the RS 232C RS 422 converter FX 232AWC H is connected e Function extension board FX3G 232 BD for RS 232C e Special adapter FX3U 232ADP MB for RS 232C SOWeN ed pue seJnjee OO
331. llers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 3 Input output powered extension unit C or D Unit mm inches 2 e 5 5 Model name Mounting hole pitch W S 0 2 W 0 2 FX2N 32ER ES UL gt lt gt lt FX2N 32ET ESS UL Me C FX2N 32ER 140 5 52 2 ial FX2N 32ET m AN FX2N 32ES 28 C Len em FX2N 48ER ES UL F 13 e FX2N 48ET ESS UL po 1O O 78 e oi x D FX2N 48ER MEUM a demanda WW FX2N 48ET 5 5 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 210 8 27 3 0 2 W 0 2 5 U 5 Si 58 D ie de 4 D 4 Input output extension block E or F a D Unit mm inches S o TN Mounting hole pitch W 0 e gt FX2N 8ER ES UL 5 DEC FX2N 8ER io TF FX2N 8EX ES UL b lo fo FX2N 8EX eue iv UO FX2N 8EX UA1 UL Qo E QS E Fx2N SEYR ES UL eee 23 O S FX2N 8EYT ESS UL O FX2N 8EYR A FX2N 8EYT 6 20 20 FX2N 8EYT H oe Al FX2N 16EX ES UL os O AA FX2N 16EX as NO FX2N 16EX C si E to FX2N 16EXL C S E pv LO F FX2N 16EYR ES UL Refer to the figure shown 22 FX2N 16EYR left 2338 FX2N 16EYT ESS UL F o FX2N 16EYT AS FX2N 16EYT C 22 FX2N 16EYS co 358 2 P uonejeisu BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 103 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing Di
332. llowing models P a 2 bisce P FX2N 16EX ES UL FX2N 16EX FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 8EX UA1 UL FX2N 8EX SENTIT TEN Generic name for the following models block P FX2N 16EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYS 6 em FX2N 16EYT C FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYR FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H cS Special function blocks Generic name for FX3U Series special function blocks FX2N Series special function blocks 5 FX3U Series special function Generic name for the following models 5 3 blocks FX3U 64CCL FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA E FX2N Series special function Generic name for the following models niis P FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 64CL M FX2N 2AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD PT E FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC FX2N 2DA FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A 7 Generic name for the following models z5 E FX3G EEPROM 32L 2E Displavimodule Generic name for the following models S e FX3G 5DM ZE O Battery Abbreviation of model FX3U 32BL battery i Generic name for the following models 8 FX Series terminal blocks FX 16E TB FX 32bE TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYR TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB n nan Gables Generic name for the following models a FXON 30EC FXON 65EC Generic name for the following models B Input output cables FX 16E 500CAB S FX 16ELILILICAB FX 16E LILILICAB R FX A32bE LILIEICAB 150 300 or 500 is entered in OOD 9 Connectors dor mputiaUt ut Generic name for the following models did FX2C l O CON FX2C I
333. location and functions of input terminals 150 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 12 Output Wiring Procedures 151 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output TyYp oooccccccoccncccoccnnoconcnnononcnnonononnnnnncnnononnnnonnnrnnonanrnnnnnancnnss 153 12 11 Product ite or relay CONCISA uec deuda cbuc sedo uet ei 153 1212 Handling FOE relay OULD UU mm T r 153 121639 External Wing Ore CAULIOMINS cesa E A a ad 154 12 1 4 Example of external wiring o ccccoooccconcccnononoconncnnnononnonononnrnnnononcrnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncrnnennonnnnens 155 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type ccocooccccccoccocccoccocononcnnonononnonanenonnanonnos 156 12 2 1 Transistor Qutput Sink and Source o e e ee 156 12 2 2 Handling or transistor DUDA e ubi Der se ER Ee eset 157 12 2 9 External WIRING PFE CAUTIONS di a ic 159 12 2 4 Example of external wiring cccccccssceececessececceeecececeseeecceeescececeuseeesseseseesseceeeessaueeeessesssnseeess 160 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type ssri nsa A E ANa 162 1231 Handling or iiac Outputs si e ads 162 12 3 2 External wiring precautions savoir eco d eaae ait la atte Set ta CUR Vea UU n ud ea 163 12 33 Example or extermal WINING sc ii setae Dae euis ii 164 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses 165 1941 Notes about Examples OF VVIFITIg ua ut i
334. locking the PLC s internal programs as shown to m rotation 16 the right lt Reverse mz PLC E ioni Limit of reverse rotation 238 ODU rotation BAGS element oe d 4 In phase u PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner 1 T C Um 53O XK 3 8 D gt 5 es O OQO S O lt 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 163 12 Output Wiring Procedures FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 3 Example of external wiring AC power supply j j Main unit 100 to 240V relay output Breaker Power ON For the relay output wiring of the main unit refer to Subsection 12 1 4 Output extension block triac output O Power supply for load connected to PLC output Input output powered extension unit triac output For details on emergency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field EN 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 164 FX3G Series Programmable
335. ls the operation and returns to the menu screen if pressed when the keyword s left most digit highest order digit is blinking Cancels the input and moves leftward to the next digit higher order digit if pressed when a digit other than the left most digit is blinking ESC Reduces the value FE 21 0 Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value 0 gt 1 gt 2 E gt F Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase Highest order Registers the specified value and moves to the next digit input position digit to 2nd digit If OK is pressed at the lowest order digit and if the entered keyword is correct the Keyword is canceled An All operation is possible message appears and the Keyword is canceled Incorrect Keyword A Incorrect Keyword message appears 3 Ifthe OK button is pressed at the lowest order position the entered Keyword is registered and the message shown to the right appears If keyword is correct If the Incorrect Keyword message appears press ESC and return All to step 1 MS Lowest order Correct Keyword digit final digit operation is possible 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the menu screen If keyword is incorrect Incorrect Keyword 304 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Keyword 19 11 6 Enabling a keyword 1 Atthe menu screen use the
336. m OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod indinoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 suondo pue sun gt uoisuex3 sayo OO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 2 Timer T counter C 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device where the Monitor screen test function is to be used However when not using it in a program a setting value is displayed as Test function cannot be used Refer to Subsection 19 6 2 for monitor function operation 2 Press the OK button to display the cursor then select the test subject selection screen To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC 3 Use the buttons to select the test subject To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press ESC Test Subject Test Description 1 Contact forced ON OFF 2 Current value change 3 Setting value change 4 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to register the test subject selection and switch to the test mode To cancel the operation and return to the test subject selection screen press ESC Test Subject Status when OK is hold for 1 second or longer 1 No change 2 3
337. m configuration with FX3u 1PSU 5V refer to Chapter 6 gt For the mounting refer to Chapter 8 For the wiring refer to Chapter 9 262 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 17 Extension Power Supply Unit User s Manual Hardware Edition 17 2 Specifications 17 2 Specifications os 8 17 2 1 Generic Specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit 1 2 For the generic specifications refer to Section 4 1 O 17 2 2 Performance Specifications amp Items Specifications 1 3 Supply voltage 100 240V AC ae Allowable supply voltage range 85 264V AC Rated frequency 50 60Hz E The allowable momentary power failure time depends on the power supply used D e 100V AC power supply system Allowable instantaneous power failure time The operation is continued to the momentary power failure for 10 or less ms e 200V AC power supply system The operation is continued to the momentary power failure for 100 or less ms dh I Rush current 30A max 5ms or less 100V AC 65A max 5ms or less 200V AC E 2 P C atu Power consumption 20W Max P 5 2 Output current 24V DC 0 3A 1 88 Internal for 7 supply NES 1A 15 1 The output current depends on the ambient temperature as shown in the dirating curve below Vee Derating curve DZS Output current A o oy e Y c z 773 oms JE 209 l 40 55 oc Ambient temperature C E 17 2 3 External Dimensions 2 44 5 mounting
338. m reading writing etc in the FX3G PLC using the built in USB programming port and GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later For GX Developer is prior to Ver 8 72A communication using the built in USB programming port is not available 5 3 1 Installation of USB driver GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later It is necessary to install the USB driver to execute USB communication using the built in USB programming port For the USB driver installation method and procedure refer to the following manual gt GX Developer Operating Manual Startup 5 3 2 Setting in GX Developer Ver 8 72A or later 1 Select Online gt Transfer setup to open the Transfer setup dialog box 2 Double click Serial in PC side I F to open the PC side I F Serial setting dialog box 3 Select USB Built in port Transfer Setup CC IE Cont HET II CC Link Ethernet NET 10 H board board board board board net board Double click it cc E NH G4 Bus module PC side I F Serial setting RS 232C t AS 232 include FX USB AM 2 FxSU USB BD include Fx USB AW 7 FX3U USB BD Cancel Cancel C USB GOT transparent mode LISB GOT transparent mode USB Builtin port COM port COM 1 Transmission speed 115 2Kbps v ii No specification Ot PLC direct coupled setti Time out Sec 110 Connection test CC IE Cont HE T II Ethernet MET 10 H CC Link
339. machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 113 seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A uononpoJu N SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug
340. me clock RTC error i M 8007 a J For real time clock ot use M 8008 ET Time read display is stopped M 8004 For real time clock Error occurrence ON when 24V DC power fails in M 8020 ON when the result of addition i M 8009 either input output powered Ea5n Zero subtraction is 0 24V DC down extension unit or extension power M 8021 ON when the result of subtraction is i supply unit Borrow less than the min negative number ON when carry occurs as a result cio of addition or when an overflow y occurs as a result of shift operation M8028 M 80241 BMOV direction specification f FNC 15 M 8025 to M 8027 Not used Interrupt permission during FROM M 8028 TO FNC 78 and 79 instruction execution Done ON when operation such as DSW Instruction FNC 72 is completed execution complete eT Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP 363 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 Number and name PLC Mode M 8030 Battery LED OFF M 8031 Non latch memory all clear M 8032 Latch memory all clear M 8033 Memory hold STOP M 8034 All outputs disable M 8035 Forced RUN mode M 8036 Forced RUN signal M 8037 Forced STOP signal M 8038 Parameter setting M 8039 Constant scan mode Correspond ing special
341. memory cassette may be connected to a FX3G main units EEPROM memory writing count 10 000 writing operations are permitted at the EEPROM memory Precaution for file register D usage Writing to the flash memory occurs at each PLC operation cycle if BMOV instructions are used in a continuous execution format with regard to a file register To prevent this be sure to use pulse execution format BMOVP instructions Precaution for extended file register ER usage Do not use continuous constant execution RWER instructions with regard to extended file registers Use the individual instructions only when required Loader function when the display module is used together When the display module is used together the loader function is enabled by performing the transfer procedure in the display module Data is not transferred even if the transfer procedure is performed in the memory cassette For the data transfer procedure in the display module refer to Chapter 20 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 22 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 1 Battery Purpose 22 Battery STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS DANGER e Make sure to connect the battery for memory backup correctly Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit or expose the battery to fire Doing so may rupture or ignite it STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the foll
342. mmon terminal should be the following value FX3G 60MT ES 1 point common 0 5A or less FX3G 60MT ESS 4 points common 0 8A or less FX2N 32ET ESS UL 0 5A point 8 points common 1 6A or less Input output powered FX2N 48ET ESS UL For FX2N 16EYT C extension units FX2N 32ET 16 points common 1 6A or less FX2N 48ET FX2N 16EYT ESS UL FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT FX2N 8EYT FX2N 8EYT H 1A point FX2N 16EYT C 0 3A point For FX2N 8EYT H 4 points common 2A or less Output extension block FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source 7 Open circuit leakage current OT eS 0 1mA or less TO ES 12 2 3 External wiring precautions 1 Protection circuit for load short circuits A short circuit at a load connected to an output terminal could cause burnout at the output element or the PCB To prevent this a protection fuse should be inserted at the output Use a load power supply capacity that is at least 2 times larger than the total rated fuse capacity Sink output type BuutM 1ndino 10 Buum OO Ses SNOEN I Bunoouse qnoi eoueua ure N uny 1S9 2 Contact protection circuit for inductive loads 1 5 When an inductive load is connected connect a diode mos for commutation in parallel with the load as necessary Sink output type SE The diode for commutation must comply with the
343. moved S S N SAR MEL Model name O Model name abbreviation T APA T 14 4 2 Periodic inspection battery life etc 1 Battery Part Life Model FX3U 32BL battery Standard life 5 years at ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F 186 Standard life of FX3U 32BL 5 years at ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F gt For details on the standard life and recommended replacement frequency refer to Subsection 22 4 1 Other devices When inspecting the battery check the following points Check that the temperature in the panel is not abnormally increased by other heat generating bodies or direct sunlight Check that dust or conductive dust has not entered the panel Check for loosening of wiring and other abnormalities Battery Replacement When the battery voltage drops while the PLC power is on the ALM LED on the panel is lit in red and M8005 and M8006 latch are turned on The memory can be retained for about one month after the lamps turn on However the operators may not immediately find the lamps to be on Prepare a new battery promptly and replace the battery with the new one For details on the specifications and functions of the battery refer to 22 Battery Caution Select the battery mode using a parameter when using the battery If the battery mode is not selected the data is not backed up and the ALM LED on the panel does not light For the batt
344. mpatible with the FX3G PLC e For an keyword 8 digit input only Processing is possible even with a peripheral device version that is not compatible with the FX3G PLC Number Peripheral Device Keyword Of Registration Method FX3G Not FX3G seats pattem Lor Keyword Description Digits Compatible Compatible Reading writing 46 digit hexadecimal value 16 diait By selecting the keyword prohibited A to F O to 9 ee registration level at the GX Writing prohibited Ex Developer s setting screen All online lir m FABO5C25DAECF293 Red AABCDEFF34509345 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with A AU Or 0 to 9 A Dto 9 first char ABCDEF2 AABCD345 By entering the level at the 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with 8 digit first character when entering v i B the keyword Ex B1234567 BABCDEF7 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with C ye rl Ex C8904567 CDEF567F 1 Customer keyword Permanent PLC lock included 19 11 2 Level specific restrictions screen list v Function enabled A Timer and counter setting values cannot be changed A Only monitor function is usable test function is not available Function disabled Keyword 8 digits Keyword 16 digits Label entered as the first Selected at GX Developer setting screen character at Keyword input All online oe Reading Writing a C operations rohibited writing prohibited p prohibited Function name Top screen time dis
345. n The screen shown at right is displayed for 1 5 seconds after the power is turned on Content f 1 1 Model name 2 Version 19 4 2 Top screen time display Following the title screen display the Current Time screen is then displayed 01 10 08 23 59 59 Wed The specified device monitor screen is displayed instead when the specified device monitor function is used Refer to Section 19 14 for details of the specified device monitor function Although the year displays in a 2 digit format 08 this can be changed to a 4 digit format 2008 by revising the program Refer to Subsection 19 10 3 for the 2 digit year to 4 digit year change procedure 19 4 3 Menu screen As shown in the figure at right the menu screen displays 4 lines of the total menu Press the button to scroll downward through the menu Mo n to r T e s t ErrorCheck Button operations at this menu screen are explained below LANGUAGE Contrast Button Operation Description ESC Returns to the top screen time display ClockMenu Scrolls upward through the menu Keyword Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the beginning of the menu l l l Cassette l l l Scrolls downward through the menu Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling This button is disabled when the cursor is located at the end of the menu OK Selects the
346. n 2 wires are connected to 1 terminal Use a crimp terminal of the size shown below and install it as shown in the lower right figure 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Terminal Crimp Or Gig screw _ terminal 6 0mm 0 24 x or more 3 7 0 15 6 8mm 0 27 Em Terminal or less Dal 6 0 Omm 0 24 or more 334 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB The FX 16E TB and FX 32E TB items must be connected using an FX2N series input output connector type extension block Input Connector Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EX C sink input FX2N 16EYT C sink output 20 5 1 Internal circuit OLO to LILI7 Lower Nos A AO to A A7 Higher Nos AA AA2 AMY AAG AA 443 AA5 AA7 Su coni DT COM A 7 18 8 007 AA6 17 7 006 ls reo ans 15 5 an A43 14 4 des E 2 10 aa 1 12 2 001 SENS ago O LIL10 to 0077 Lower Nos A A0 to A A7 Higher Nos 1 24 when connected to FX2N 16EX C 2 e when connected to FX2N 16EX C FX 32E TB FX 16E TB 335 SJojunoo mm peads ybiH Buum mano N 10 Bum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod indinoandu OQ spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C Pun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suond
347. n PLC switches from RUN to STOP Positioning D18130 1o D18135 PLSY FNC 57 PLSR FNC D 8136 Lower 59 instructions 7 Accumulated total number of D 8137 Upper pulses output to YOOO and YO001 D 8138 Not used D 8 139 Accumulated number of D 8140 Lower pulses output to YOOO for PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR FNC 59 instructions or D 8141 Upper current address of YOOO for positioning instruction Accumulated number of D 8142 Lower pulses output to YOO1 for PLSY FNC 57 and PLSR i FNC 59 instructions or D 8143 Upper current address of Y001 for positioning instruction D 8144 D 8145 5 D 8146 Not used D 8147 D 8148 D 8149 372 Correspond Number and 1 Content of register ing special name device Inverter Communication Function D 81504 Response wait time of inverter 90 communication ch1 Step number of instruction during D 8151 4 inverter communication ch1 M8151 Default 1 Hey Error code for inverter 3 4 DJe152 communication ch1 meee Inverter communication error step D 8153 4 number latched ch1 M8153 Default 1 DE D 8155 4 Response wait time of inverter 8155 communication ch2 Step number of instruction during D 8156 inverter communication ch2 M8156 Default 1 wox Error code for inverter 3 4 D 8157 communication ch2 MBAS Inverter communication error step D 8158 4 number latched ch2 M8158 Default 1 DUE 3 Clear
348. n also special extension devices are added calculate the current consumption to ensure that the total current to be consumed by the added extension devices can be supplied by the built in power supply Refer to 6 6 2 When special extension devices are also added calculation of current consumption al UU D CD Cx en oO to zs o v Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added pue uoISJ9A In the following quick reference matrix the value at the intersection of the number of input points to be added horizontal axis with the number of output points to be added vertical axis indicates the remaining power supply capacity Select the input output extension block number of points to be connected to the main unit Check that the number of input output points can be added When connecting the FX3u 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit to a system where the nearest T upstream unit to the FX3u 1PSU 5V is an input output powered extension unit include the current Ss consumption by the input extension blocks including FX2N 8ER ES UL and FX2N 8bER connected m to the FX3u 1PSU 5V when calculating the total current consumption of the input output powered Bg extension unit 2 AC power supply DC input type 1 FX2N 32ER FX2N 32ET FX2N 32ES FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 32ET ESS UL AC power supply Output DC input type 24 Example uonejesu OO ot FX2N 32EL E E 16 9 syp Z 8 S28 0 8 16 24 32 Emm En
349. n fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 e represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION 1 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product ainpoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 161 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type 12 3 External Wiring for Triac SSR Output Type This section explains the procedures for handling triac output and external wiring There are not triac output type of main units Select from the input output powered extension units blocks Forthe triac output specifications refer to the following For the specifications on the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on the input output extension block refer to Chapter 16 12 3 1 Handling of triac output 1 Output terminals On the triac output type units blocks one common terminal is used for 8 points Therefore the common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems for example 100V AC and 200V AC Example FX2N 16EYS 2 Circuit insulation The PLC internal circuit and the output element triac are insulated with a photo thyristor The commo
350. n procedure refer to Subsection 8 6 3 Subsection 8 6 4 Make mounting holes in the mounting surface Dp a m according to the external dimensions diagram F Fit the main unit A in the right figure based on the holes and secure it with M4 screws B in the right figure OO jonpoud The positions and number of screws depend on the product Refer to the external dimensions diagram For the external dimensions refer to Section 4 6 uononpoJu 4 Y 8 5 4 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function block 3 Make mounting holes in the mounting surface Rear panel Rear panel 9 according to the external dimensions diagram 323 Push in the DIN rail mounting hook A in the right d figure of the input output extension block If the DIN rail mounting hook is not pushed in the screw hole 6 is covered and the block cannot be mounted os For input output powered extension units 8 point type input output extension blocks and special function blocks this operation is unnecessary 7 Fit the input output extension block B in the 2 right figure based on the holes and secure it Se with M4 screws C in the right figure ZE The positions and number of screws depend on the product Refer to the external dimensions diagram gt For the external dimensions of the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 gt For the external dimensions of the in
351. n terminal blocks are separate from one another 3 Display of operation When the photo thyristor is driven the LED is lit and the output triac is turned on 4 Response time The time from when the photo thyristor is driven or shut down until the output triac is turned on and until it is turned off is 1ms or less and 10ms or less respectively 5 Output current The max current per output point is 0 3A However to restrict temperature rise the max current per one output from four points should be 0 8A average per point is 0 2A When a load with high rush current is turned on and off frequently the root mean square current should be 0 2A or less Example 0 4A 42 x 0 02 0 42 x 0 7 un Y 02A 0 02 0 7 10 0 02 0 7 10 sec sec sec 6 Open circuit leakage current A C R absorber is connected for turn off in parallel with the triac output terminal of this type of PLC Therefore when the circuit opens a leakage current will be 1mA at 100V AC and 2mA at 200V AC Since the triac output type devices leak current when the circuits are open small size relays and micro current loads having low rated operating current may keep operating even when the triac output is turned off Therefore use a load of 0 4VA or more at 100V AC or 1 6VA or more at 200V AC If the load is less than this value connect a surge absorber as stated below in parallel with the load For the connection of the surge absorber refer to 12 3 2 External wir
352. n the battery voltage drops ALM When the optional battery is used Red O Lights when a CPU error occurs When an output terminal YOOO or more is turned on the corresponding LED lights The model name of the main unit is indicated Check the nameplate on the right side for the model name The main unit can be installed on DINA6277 rail 35mm 1 38 wide The year and month of production of the main unit is indicated For details on the year and month of production refer to Subsection 5 1 2 29 mundo 5 a o a c S o 2 SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoud suoneooods I al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO uoneJn6ijuo N SON JUN SON jndinondu uonejeisu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 2 Features and Part Names User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts When the top covers are open 1 Peripheral device connecting connector USB 2 Peripheral device connecting connector RS 422 3 RUN STOP switch 4 Variable analog potentiometers 5 Optional equipment connector1 6 Optional equipment connector2 40points 60points type only 7 Battery connector 8 Battery holder 9 Optional equipment connecting screw holes2 2 places 40points 60points type only 10 Optional
353. n the following configuration For assignment of input output numbers refer to Section 7 1 1 Example of configuration Connector Input Special function Special adapter conversion Main unit extension p e FX3U 4AD ADP adapter FX3G 24MT ES block FX2N 16CCL M FX3G CNV ADP FX2N 8EX Input output Special powered function extension unit block FX2N 32ET FX3U 64CCL 2 Assignment of Unit No Unit numbers are assigned to the special function blocks in the above configuration as shown below Unit No Connector Input Special adapter conversion Main unit extension nai FX3U 4AD ADP adapter FX3G 24MT ES block FX3G CNV ADP FX2N 8EX Input output Special powered function extension unit block FX2N 32ET FX3U 64CCL FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 7 Assignment of Input Output Numbers and Unit Numbers User s Manual Hardware Edition 7 2 Unit Numbers of Special Function Blocks 7 2 3 Application of unit number labels The special function units blocks come with unit number labels Apply the unit number labels to spaces on the enclosure see the following figure so that the unit numbers can be identified AIL T OBS Y818D33101 FXa 16CCL M 87 UONnOnpoJjU N SOWeN ed pue sanjea OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneooods I al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO O o zh O jad o gt jndinondu SON JUN SON
354. n this case set the PLC to the STOP state then perform the step 3 operation described above The transfer is not executed if a Transfer failed message appears In this case turn the power off check the memory cassette connection then attempt the operation again from the first step A Transfer completed message appears when the transfer is completed When this message appears press OK or ESC to display the memory cassette transfer screen 5 Press ESC to display the menu screen 308 PLC is running Cassette PLC Transfer failed Cassette PLC Transfer completed FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 13 System Information Restrictions From PLC 19 13 System Information Restrictions From PLC Some of the display module functions require system information settings in order to enable program control of these functions Functions which require the use of system information are listed below e Specified device monitor function Operation button ON OFF information Refer to Section 19 14 for details Refer to Section 19 17 for details e Screen saver function Monitor test function Refer to Section 19 15 for details For hexadecimal display of current value Display screen protect function Refer to Section 19 18 for the setting Refer to Section 19 16 for details procedure 19 13 1 System information list
355. nal should be the following value The total of inductive loads per common Inductive load 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or terminal should be the following value less 24V DC 16 output points common terminal 38 4W e 8 output points common terminal 38 4W or or less 24V DC less 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1mA 30V DC Min load OFF ON 0 2ms or less for 200mA at 24V DC ON OFF 0 2ms or less for 200mA at 24V DC Response time DC power Output circuit configuration supply unit DC power supply unit supply unit 254 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output 16 11 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement oz FX2N 8EYT a With cover Without cover FXoN 8EYT O POWER O utput moss indicator 4567 0000 Rear line extension connector Buum ndno IN lamps LED lamps 1 3 ES ES CAS lt Else E cda cS wn D o 14 358 s25 o S 483 o2 e a FX2N 16EYT 15 When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers mpg and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers S S gas With cover Without cover 12 Output indicator 3 z i 8 lamps 3 66 O lt i LED lamps i N Rear line F extension Lower connector d numbers lt 1g Output
356. nccocnconccnconcncnnncnnoncnononcnonanenenonos 182 14 2 1 Methods of running and stopping cccccococnnccccnconoconoconcncnnnnnononncnnnononcnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnononnrannnnnanenss 182 14 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods cccccooocccccccccconccnncncnnnnnnncnnnonnnnonnnonnccnnonnnnrnnnnnnannannnnns 183 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running ccooccnccocnncnoccnncccnnnoncnnconcncnncnnnonononncnnnnnonos 184 1431 Selrdia gn os tie UM COM e E NC 184 14 3 2 TESTA CONS eso e duane 184 14 3 3 Program modification TUNCHION ii A A Re Se aa xe iere aus 184 14 3 4 Built in variable analog potentiometer fUNCHION oooocccncconnncnccnonncnncnnoncnnnonanncnnnnnanenononnncanonnos 185 14 4 Maintenance and Periodic Inspection occcoccccccncocnccccncnnnnnonnnoncncnnnnonnnonanonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanennnos 186 14 4 1 Procedures for checking model name oooocccccnccccnccconccnncnnnncnnonnnoncnnonnnnnnnonnnrnnnnnnnrnnnonnrrnnnnnnaninns 186 14 4 2 Periodic inspection battery life etc 186 14 4 3 Maintenance product life of relay contacts 187 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDS usi i FERRE tt AAA 189 14 5 4 POW LED on Tlashing Olt esos qose como reia ect 189 143 2 AEM LED TON OH its clean 189 1400 ERR LED on flashing O kr e need nado ee 190 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes ooocccccccccccnoccnconoccncononencnnnnonnos 191 14 6 1 Operation
357. nd M50 to M64 D8300 H System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse N_ mov Kso MOV D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 309 SJojunoo peads yBIH Buum nding IN 10 buum OO Ses SNOEN I ON es Sy XE E 090 2 5 oo S Q IU Agw O c 2 Dc 2 oO GGG 2 3 S E a op ma 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function 19 14 Specified Device Monitor Function The specified device monitor function can change the top screen to the monitor test screen for a device specified by the user For the specified device monitor function specify the device type to be displayed in DLJ O of the system information system signal 1 and specify the device number to be displayed in DO O 1 of the system information system signal 1 It is necessary to turn ON MA A to enable the test operation on the specified device monitor screen 19 14 1 System information specified device monitor function 1 System signal 1 System Information Description DOO Device type to be displayed DOO 1 Device No to be displayed 1 Maximum or minimum value of
358. necting mating device Encoders with the output forms in the following table can be connected to the input terminals The encoders may not function correctly depending on electrical compatibility Check the specifications in advance Voltage output type encoders and absolute encoders cannot be connected to the high speed counter input terminals Terminals for connecting Output form that can be directly connected Input terminals of main unit Open oollector transistor output form applicable to 24V DC 141 sjajuno peeds ybiy Buu ndno IN dh 10 buum OO Ses SNOEN I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 paiemog jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C mundo j yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions 11 3 List of Device Numbers and Functions For details on the counter number OP refer to Subsection 11 2 2 Response Frequency Data length kHz Device No External reset input External start terminal input terminal None None 32 bit bi directional counter id Counter type counter 1 phase 1 count input C246 C248 OP m 32 bit O E a bi directional counter Nong ME MEA C253 OP
359. nel lights when input Input circuit diagram 1 Input impedance 222 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 8 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL 3 Output specifications relay output type Oz c Item FX2N 48ER UA1 UL o D Output Points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Relay 1 2 External power suppl oe O P pey 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards s Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 3 2A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value Resistance load i aa 1 3 e 4 output points common terminal 8A or less Max load e 8 output points common terminal 8A or less sz 80VA S Inductive load gt For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 c S gt For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 2 D Open circuit leakage current Min load 5V DC 2mA reference value OFF gt ON Approx 10ms Response time bh I Jz ooo ON OFF Approx 10ms C zy t OS Z iSIS Aw 2 32 O 8 Output circuit configuration paJamod jndinogindu sun uoisuejx3 s A common number applies to the of COM sy ojg UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C 15 8 2 External dimensions
360. ng OFF the power confirm the safety of the 4 0 2 Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit or the input system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including extension block mE 7 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal S 3 In the case of the sink input type the S S terminal is used side as the 24 terminal For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 a 123 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring 9 4 Examples of External Wiring 9 4 3 Example of source input common wiring An example of source input common wiring is shown below Sink and source input type Secon AC power supply of di 100 to 240V Special adapter grounding 5V O0V 24V T E or Breaker ClassD Power supply ON MC Sink and re yin isa pas Emergency ns stop m 24V DC service Input extension power supply 5V 0V 24V output 3 Class D Special function grounaimg block Power supply for loads to be connected to PLC output terminals E ne zvoc a input o operation see DESIGN type u i PRECAUTIONS at Al PPly Safety Precautions field output Input extension block oV 0V 24V ES Class D l grounding Special function block 3 Some special function units blocks do not have the power Output extension block oV 0V 24V 1 C
361. ng and type Sy power cables l l l l Special function l block l l l l l l l l l Output extension block 5VIOV 24V ee ee When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension power supply units or earlier in extension power supply units than the main unit As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field Connect the OV terminal of the main unit to the S S terminal of the input extension block Some special function units blocks do not have the power supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit 2 3 126 4 5 including special extension equipment at the same time Some special function blocks do not have the power supply terminals When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the extension power supply unit or earlier than the extension power supply unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to
362. ng mode TBL instruction Pulse outputs l eX absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV 222 instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction x 2 o F A fc 5 us e Input matrix MTR instruction digital switch DSW instruction E Time division Seven segment with latch SEGL instruction output 00 4 A power supply for the input circuit is required when connected to the FX2N 16EX C suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO The current consumption is shown in the table below Power Supply Voltage Current Consumption FX2N 16EX C 24V DC 160mA D 5 e o 5 Q D pel e lt o a E D yoojg jJeuiuJe 329 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 2 External Dimensions and Component Names 20 2 External Dimensions and Component Names FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 150 5 91 150 5 91 J 1 2 5 LJ MITSUBISHI FX 16E 18 m F PIN arial 55 2 17 1 SS E 45 1 7 X 7 9 FX 16EYR TB FX 16EX A1 TB FX 16EYS TB FX 16EYT TB FX 16EYT H TB 150 5 91 150 5 91 1 3 T sem E d TUE D A AC 100V INPUT 66 bm Elo vI dyni oo bT c A TN LT A RII RN 99 9 9 LO
363. nge menu display language setting and memory cassette transfer All functions are enabled values 2 System signal 2 System signal 2 is unrelated to this function 19 16 2 Program example screen protect function setting In this program example the display screen protect function is set to level 2 Use this program as a reference when other level settings are specified In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 D8300 1 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse Lu D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 wis D53 Sets the display screen protect function to level 2 MOV 317 SJojunoo mm peads ybiH Buum mano N 10 Buum OO Ses SNOEN I oD 0 es Sy TL E 090 2 337 oo 2 0 5 Q mU gt Xx oo ozc 2 pc 2 oO Ooc 2 5 s a e uda syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function 19 16 3 Keyword and display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions If a keyword has been registered that keyword related restriction takes priority over the display screen protect f
364. nge M8388 18303 C248 OP e Reset input is not given KOOO M8388 18383 C253 OP Reset input is not given KOOO ME dida 8398 The input count 2 phase 2 count changes as follows Phase A Changes from X000 to X006 C254 OP Phase B Changes from X001 to X007 254 Resetinput is not given Start input is not given KOOO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 Output Wiring Procedures DESIGN PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 2 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the ab
365. nication error at Oo ea slave station No 6 S D 8218 Code of communication error at z slave station No 7 DBZ Analog Expansion Board Refer to Appendix A 3 for details D8260 to D8269 1st expansion board 2 D8270 to D8279 2nd expansion board Analog Special Adapter Refer to Appendix A 4 for details D 8280 to D 8289 1st special adapter 4 D 8290 to D 8299 2nd special adapter 4 1 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later sr1 uononujsu UJ seoi eq jeloeds 2 st expansion board becomes an expansion board connected to BD connector of main units 14 24 point type or BD1 connector of main units 40 60 point type 3 2nd expansion board becomes an expansion board connected to BD2 connector of main units 40 60 point type 4 Connected analog special adapters are counted from the main unit side Display module Control device module Default K 1 Control module Default K 1 Language display setting D 8302 1 2 Japanese KO e English Other than KO LCD contrast setting value Default KO 1 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 2 Latch device D for display device M for display 373 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Corres Sumpor ana Content of register ponding name special device Positioning D 8329 to D 8339 Not used
366. nncnncnononnnonanenenonos 264 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and Terminal Arrangement 265 18 1 Special FUNcuon UNS BOCAS dd caidas 265 E 421 527 N p E E E MR E E E eh ee 265 1o T A dB OREA EEE a Me LL PI A CRON MA LE E 265 dM NOCT Ip MET A 266 JS NI CUT A A 266 18 105 FAN AA D stc ar ira alias 267 TS Eoo ta ADA rta rte tilda 267 ANA ae ah TEE DEC ata are Net SM hati te 268 ARS E RE Cen Pe ee ER Cente DL EM REUS 268 alt Sa Po Mi E nD ee 269 AO isi Na rindo 269 sb PONOA D NN 270 A EE E DEREN E E E A A E A 270 2 5 ES o A A 271 Ss N EAE E CEE EEEN esters M Oe On OO Ene 271 OD DINOS E T pee ch E E EA E E 272 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 18 25 pecial Ad ADISS custodiado Pd de RR sre ue ducet 273 18 21 CL IDE p ot ERN 273 10 2 2 Te ee A ES encre scenes he cas genet a bri sup onse le deal a E aum tuse ut ace 273 18 23 FXXGUSAADSPTOWISADB at is t Ep toc pd 273 18 2 4 FX3U A4AD PNK ADP seeseeeesseseeene nennen nnne nnne n sese karen siiis sag annis ssa s as assi risa sna aane nra 274 19 2 9 FAJUAAD TADA EMI ME MEE de E ME di e E 274 192 07 EX93U 232 DIM sa bai 275 18 2A Bs Bi T 275 Od EXDahBSlolI BOSE 59 9935 5592559002 9 8020 96002 8 0002 5915000 290 90000005002 08 500 250040 0 200 89200805 256002 276 19 9 O EA AA gg eRe eee p eee one geen oe 276 9 02 p c sip C
367. nnnconcncconnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnncnncnnnoncnos 240 100 1 Products pecifica ton Ss sota 240 16 6 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent oocccooncnnnccnnccnncnnnccncnonncononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnns 241 16 5 3 EXte mal dimension Su A lides 241 16 6 4 Example DEMO a ta 241 16 7 EX2NSSEX DAT IUL 100V AG INPUT a da 243 16 7 1 Product Specification Sta id li ia d rae 243 16 7 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent oocccooncnnncconccnncnnncnnncnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnninnns 244 16 7 9 EAN oa 244 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output occccoccccoccncccccococccconcncnoncncnanonononos 245 16 81 Product specications sieer E E ds 245 16 8 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent ococcooncnnncnncccnncnnncnnnnonnconnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnncnnnononncnnns 246 16 86 93 EXtemalclimensiOAS s tai dio 247 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output occccocccccocccccoccncccnnnconcnonononos 248 16 94 PTOGUCUSDCCIICANON Ste credos e Sousse aos 248 16 9 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent occccoonccnnccnnccnncnnncnnncnnnconcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnos 249 16 9 5 ExXtemalIMCASIONS dai li uu odora 250 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output cococccccccnccccncccccccconcncconcnconcnnnonnnconcnononnncnncnenononos 251 16 10 T Product SDE CIN CALIOINS 2555 cocum e tio a utens aia e Ne O 251 16 10 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent o
368. nnnnes 142 11 4 Allocation of Device Numbers to Input Numbers cocccoccccccnconcncncnconcncncnconcnnonnnonononanonncnonanonnnnss 143 TAA AIO CATION ADIOS NE m T Tut 143 11 4 2 Restriction of redundant use of input NUMbETS cccccoccccccnccncccnnncononcncnononononcnnnonnnnnnnnnnonononononens 143 11 5 Handling of High speed Counters dius Sense testa lancea o unen orbes fa brote bte dex Dn bro dextata Sen dto bt Sa ire biz 144 11 5 1 1 phase 1 count input 1 lssseesseeeeseseeseseeee nennen nennen nnne nnne nnne nn nnne nnns nnn nnns 144 11 5 2 TsDhiase Z coumpID DUE isset e es e ed atn nae met nO 145 11 5 3 2 phase 2 count INPUt ocooocccnccncnncnncccnconcnnnncnnoncnnnncnnoncnnonrnnnnrnnonrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnrnnnrncnnnnnnns 146 11 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 147 11 6 1 Timing of updating of current value ccccoooccncccoonnnncnconnnnnononcnnononcnnnonconnnononannnnononnrnnennnanenns 147 11 6 2 Comparison of current value ccccoconcccconnnccononocononocononncnnnnocnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnancnnannnnnnnns 147 11 7 Response Frequency and Overall Frequency cooccccoccncccccnnconcncconncnncnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanenenonos 148 11 8 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures oocccccccoccnccoccnccconcnnnnoncnnononennnnonennnonnnons 149 IDA ROA ARCOS m Tc 149 11 8 2 Function switching switching of al
369. nnnnnnnononinencnnnnans 87 7 3 Assignment of Communication Channels ooocccccooccncccnccnnonoconnnnnncnnonanonnnnnnnnnononcnnonnnnnnnancnnnnnnncnnos 88 7 3 1 Assignment of communication channels oooccccccocnconoccnonncnnnononnnnnncnnnncnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnranenonnnnnss 88 7 4 Station No Label of Expansion Board FX3G 485 BD ooocccccooccccococcnconoccnconononnonanonnonanencnnanennos 89 7 5 Trimmer Layout Label of Expansion Board FX3G 8AV BD oooococcccoccccccoccncocooconononcnnononononnanonnos 89 8 Installation In Enclosure 90 9 1 MAS CA AOMMOC AVON saan dd ast dul Ro Eres id aic Nate 93 8 1 1 Installation location in ericloSUte 3 9 ee tad ad 93 9 1 2 Spaces N ei lOS UG ds uu c Ete ela tane 94 82 EAVOUUIN EFCIOSHFIB so ire mi vedo ad eat tastes iati a aa EA east rip agua ngiteeacbacnes 94 A O MP 94 EA A 95 8 3 Examination for Installing Method in Enclosure oocccconccconcnnccncnconcnnnnncnonncnnnnncncnncnnnnnrnnnnnenennncnss 96 Sac kM Menos A A A e 96 8 3 2 Cautions in examining installing method ococococonccnccccoccncconononnnononenononnncnnnnnnnnnnnononcnnnnnnannnnnnos 96 9 9 9 Examples oLiDStallgtlODi us oro tem pet odia ene ad aria 96 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rall oooccnccocccnncnoccnccnncncnnaconcnnoncnnnnnos 98 8 4 1 Preparation for installatiON occccccocnnccconnncconnnoconononononnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnenoninnnn
370. noncnnccnncnnnconancnnnononcnnnos 310 19 14 2 Differences between specified device monitor screen and monitor test screen 311 19 14 3 Program example1 when monitoring testing a tiMer ooccccccoonncnconoccnnnonoconnnnnnncnnnononcnnnnos 311 19 14 4 Program example2 when monitoring consecutive timers using operation keys 312 19 14 5 Program example3 when monitoring non consecutive timers using operation keys 313 19 14 6 Monitor operation on specified device monitor screen seessesseee 314 19 14 7 Specified device monitor screen for MONItOTINQ cccccocccnccnnnnnnccconcnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnncnnnononcnnnnns 314 19 14 8 Test operation on specified device monitor screen ooccconcnccoocnccncnccncncnncncononcnnnncnnnncnnoncononcnns 315 19 15 Screen saver TUNCHON oio dorso Fog basta teo eati eta Peso etd aet aro Pet odie ee us dan a uua 316 19 15 1 System information Screen saver fUNC ION ccccoooncnnccnncncncnnoncnnncnnncnnnonnnncnnonannnnnonnnrnnnnnnannnnos 316 1915 2 Screen saver display as 316 19 15 3 Program example screen saver time Setting ooooccccconnncoccconcnnnnnonnnnnonnncnnnnnncnonononnnnnnos 316 19 16 Display Screen Protect F riellODis sea e ede i E Dane Bunt ame 317 19 16 1 System information display screen protect function cccooonccnncccnccnncononcnnnonnnnnnnononenoncnnonenos 317 19 16 2 Program example screen
371. nosis a Click Diagnostics PLC diagnostics on the tool menu and the diagnosis of PLC will start MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project LD Edit mode MAIN 1 Step 10 Buu Q9 Project Edit Find Replace Convert View Online MEX Tools Window Help nsa aj selel e o aa Program i epe eet z usas Y E F5 sF5 F6 sF6 F F8 F9 sF9 cF9 cFI0 sF 3 Ses snoueA a Eje eet 515 alls Bale m a al RA es ez E s ee e lale le HEE ists 22 we Ale X O o D p o o 2 a Unset project 4 Program Device comment Parameter a PLC parameter El Device memory mM US aoe O c gt SS 2 oO oo c 2 5 c S o 3 Check the results of diagnosis s Display the following window to check the errors syoojg UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C Example one error occurs PLC diagnostics PLC panel Monitor start stop LED status m CRUN The LED status Stop monitor cw of FX PCL is dg 225 displayed MMB ProG E 25 iod PLC eror Open the help window of GX ae Error indication Developer to check the error details S lt Current error Detail Erormessage Emorstep 1 3 The error in PLC eee is displayed suondo pue syun 1X3 JOUIO PLC diagnostics PLC panel Monitor start stop LED status MA RUN m Stop monitor 1 _ PROG E Lao PLC error Error in
372. nput common Sink input means a DC input signal with current flow from the input X terminal OO 3 When a sensor with a transistor output is connected NPN open 38 collector transistor output can be used 6 2 O Y e Source input common si Source input means a DC input signal with current flow into the input o X terminal When a sensor with a transistor output is connected PNP open collector transistor output can be used al Sas 2 Method of switching between sink source input 6 To switch the input type to sink or source input wire the S S terminal to the OV or 24V terminal m Sink input 24V terminal and S S terminal are connected S Source input OV terminal and S S terminal are connected 57 Refer to Subsection 10 2 3 and Subsection 10 2 4 for wiring examples e 3 Instructions for using 7 Concurrent use of sink source input a It is possible to set all input terminals X of the main unit to the sink input mode or the source input mode 2g However sink and source input terminals cannot be used concurrently co The main unit and input output powered extension units are individually set to the sink or source input ZE mode P The input mode of an input output extension block is determined according to the selection of the sink or 8 source input mode on the powered extension unit power source z e Caution in selecting model g A type common to sink source input and a type only for sink input are b
373. nsion blocks 0 5 to 0 8Nem FX2N Series special function block FX Series terminal block M3 5 1 M3 5 screws may be used for terminals For details refer to the manual for each special extension device FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 3 Wire end treatment The solderless terminal size depends on the terminal screw size and wiring method Use solderless terminals of the following size Tighten the terminals to a torque of 0 5 Nem to 0 8 Nem UONINPOJJU N In the case of M3 terminal screw Main unit input output powered extension unit block and special function block e When one wire is connected to one terminal SOWeN ed pue seJnjee Terminal Crimp b 3 2 0 13 screw terminal 6 2mm 0 24 MO or less OO 5 U 3 2 0 13 dd 6 2mm 0 24 Terminal cS or less 2 Reference 4 Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification Pressure Bonding Tool Co FV1 25 B3A l E JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD JST UL Listed YA 1 JST o FV2 MS3 2 aj a e When two wires are connected to one terminal al b 3 2 0 13 6 2mm 0 24 s Terminal Crimp GH apiece AF screw terminal 338 6 3mm 0 25 um or more b 3 2 0 13 6 6 2mm 0 24 ES T Terminal om or less EE 2 6 3mm 0 25 EFi or more 5 S gt lt Reference gt Terminal Manufacturer Type No Certification Pressure Bon
374. nstruction 6764 Pulse output number is already used in a positioning instruction or pulse output instruction PLSY PWM etc 6765 Number of applied instruction exceeds limit 6770 EEPROM access error 6772 EEPROM memory cassette is protected against writing Special block error M8449 D8449 General data sum error 1021 General data message error coso Continues FROM TO error operation 1090 Peripheral equipment access error Action Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 PID operation is started The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is started The auto tuning time is longer than necessary Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement Check servo wiring and parameter setting Also check ABS instruction Check to make sure the port is not specified by another instruction Check to make sure the input X as specified by DSZR or ZRN instruction is not being used for the following purposes Input interrupt including the delay function High speed
375. ntrollers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit 6 6 6 6 1 1 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit UONINPOJJU When extension is not possible due to the main unit connection restrictions described in the preceding section and extension of input output is required select the input output powered extension unit Since input output powered extension units have built in input output terminals reexamine the input output devices connected to the main unit to ensure the required number of points N Range to be covered by main unit Range exceeding power supply capacity Input output Shag pecial Output extension Special ra function block block 16 points function block gt SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Input extension block 16 points Before selection OO ll 5 Input output Input output powered 38 After Special Special Qc Main unit extension extension unit SS LEX function block 32 points function block S Replaced with input output powered extension unit 4 Determine whether extension devices can be connected to the input output powered extension unit by the following method Q When only input output extension devices are added use the quick reference matrix 2 Refer to 6 6 1 Quick reference matrix when only input output devices are added ej e Whe
376. nts 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit type Transistor sink output External power supply 5 to 30V DC Output circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 5A point 0 5A point The total load current per common terminal The total load current per common terminal should be the following value Resistance load should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or e 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less less e 8 output points common terminal 1 6A or less Max load 12W 24V DC 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value Inductive load terminal should be the following value 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or 4 output point common terminal 19 2W or less 24V DC less 24V DC 8 output points common terminal 38 4W or less 24V DC Open circuit leakage current 0 1mA 30V DC Min load j OFF ON 0 2ms or less 200mA at 24V DC Response time ON OFF 0 2ms or less 200mA at 24V DC Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the of COMU 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET High Speed Counters 15 6 2 External dimensions FX2N 32ET q
377. nts and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Revised History Revised History 12 2008 i o Description First Edition The following products are added Main unit of relay output type FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 24MR ES FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 60MR ES Programming tool FX 30P The accessing path to the FX3G from CC Link Network are added Explanation corrections for manufacturer s serial number Section 2 2 and 5 1 EC directive CE Marking Compliance added Errors are corrected The following products are added Main unit of
378. o MITSUBISHI n 66S58086 0 07234567 A LO O BET Co 21234587 O E MELSEEFXa 32ER 10729999227 eO E comi yi l Ya cow Ys Y7 Too Yi Ya LCOM X Lyr 3 UUUUUUUUUUU 2GERGEGAREARAAEAE O e gt 3 23 ee 23 3 23 9 3 le 59 3 EE 140 5 52 mounting hole pitch 150 5 91 9 0 36 Unit mm inches FX2N 48ER 4 04 5 mounting holes 00000000000 MITSUBISHI 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 90 3 55 MELSEC FXan 48ER UUUUUUU0UUU 15 5 3 Terminal layout FX2N 32ER E pow xo peas x2 x4 X6 INT 24 x4 x3 x6 x7 x1 x3 Xe x7 Yo vz Ya ve vo va va ve gt cor 1T va oou vs v Joon Y 1 a pow vs v7 FX2N 48ER COM x0 x2 X4 X6 X0 X2 x4 X6 X0 X2 X4 X6 pL N 24 x1 x3 X5 x7 X1 X3 X5 X7 X1 X3 X5 XT FX2N 48ER Yo v2 Tva ve vo v2 va ve vo Y2 Ya Ye joo cows vt v3 poo v v7 Joona v v3 vs v7 Y1 Y3 YS YT 216 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET 15 6 FX2N 32ET FX2N 48ET 15 6 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit gt Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Re
379. o pue syun 1X3 JeuiO D D o gt Q wn o sad lt o o E D yoo g jJeuiuJe FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 5 FX 16E TB FX 32E TB 20 5 2 Example of input external wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AU TIO N Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 1 When connected to an FX2N 16EX C sink input input extension block LIL1O to 0077 Lower Nos A AO to AA7 Higher Nos Input numbers in the FX2N 16EX C 001 003 005 007 AM AA3 AAS AA 24 O00 002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG cala alla TES 24V DC 20 5 3 Output external wiring WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 1 When connected to an FX2N 16EYT C sink output output extension block OO O to LIL17 Lower Nos A AO to A A7 Higher Nos PLC s output No d 001 003 gos 007 AA 2443 AAS AA Vacant O00 002 004 006 AAO AA2 AA4 AAG terminal COM e eee ia A E enn MI 4 336 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 6 FX 16EX A1 TB 20 6 FX 16EX A1 TB Se The FX 16EX A1 TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series input extension block 24V DC 2 Input Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EX C sink input 1 2 e The applications shown below are not supported
380. oard with TAG sind E JY997D33701 When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series Installation Manual i product Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition E Connector conversion Supplied Procedures for handling the conversion function PP FX3G CNV ADP g with JY997D32301 expansion adapter for connectors for connecting Installation Manual vn product communication and analog special adapters E Battery maintenance option Supplied hr lee JY997D14101 Battery life and handling procedures f product Hardware Manual E Memorry cassette Supplies FX3G EEPROM 32L Specifications and operating procedures of the with i JY997D32401 product Installation Manual memory cassette i Display module Supplied with FX3G 5DM JY997D33801 Procedures for mounting and handling the display Installation Manual module product MExtension power supply unit Supplied FX3U 1PSU 5V Specifications and operating procedures of the with JY997D22501 product Installation Manual extension power supply unit 24 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals 1 2 Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals Abbreviation generic name Description uononpou PLCs 2 FX3G Series Generic name for FX3G Series PLCs es FX3U Series Generic name for FX3U Series PLCs am FX2N Series Generic name for FX2N Ser
381. oard connector conversion adapter before the memory cassette Tightening with tapping screws M3 x 8 is not necessary Remove the upper connector cover A in the right figure Remove the part B shown in the right figure Dres l using snipper etc Scl 6 o 32L PLC Caution O Removal of the part B is not necessary when the connector conversion adapter is used together Raise the memory cassette detachment lever Raise the memory cassette detachment lever C 351 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 3 Installation 352 Attach the memory cassette to the option connector of the expansion board connector conversion adapter Attach the memory cassette to the option connector E in the right figure of the expansion board connector conversion adapter Fix the memory cassette G in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws F in the right figure to the expansion board connector conversion adapter Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem Caution Two types of M3 tapping screws are provided Use M3 x 16 longer screws Fixation is not necessary when using only the loader function and not always connecting the memory cassette FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 4 Removal 21 4 Removal AJOws
382. ocks 111 8 6 7 Connecting method F connection of extension cable and FX2N CNV BC eeeeese 111 8 6 8 Connecting method G connection of input output powered extension unit 112 8 6 9 Connecting method H connection of extension block to input output powered extension unit 112 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 113 9 4 Preparation or VvifiDigsscsdiutcant aded tt a medie fon eese iet 115 9 35 1 WWIFIDd DFOCCOULES aa GR hes ia c RU c e Lau uote Pu 115 9 1 2 Removal and installation of quick release terminal block ooccccocccncocccncccnononononononononanenoss 115 9 2 Cable Connecting Proced resS isecen ta 116 9 2 1 Input output terminal block power supply and input output wiring seeesssse 116 9 2 2 Input output connectors FX2N input output extension blocks occcccocccccoccnncconnnconccncnonons 119 9 2 3 Terminal block for europe expansion board and special adapters 120 EA e A NUN 121 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents 9 4 Examples of External Wiring siciliana 122 9 4 1 Example of input output wiring with 24V DC service power SUPP Y occcccoccccccccnnccoccncconcnononoss 122 9 4 2 Example of sink input common WiTINQ
383. ocks 1 When four 32 point type remote I O stations are used the number of CC Link remote I O points reaches the maximum number The number of CC Link points is calculated by the formula 32 points x number of stations even when remote I O stations having less than 32 points are used For details refer to FX2N 16CCL M User s Manual 2 Procedures for calculating number of input output points based on example of system configuration For the main unit input output powered extension units blocks and CC Link remote I O stations the number of input output points and the total number of points are restricted X000 to X027 X030 to X047 X050 to X067 X070 to X107 A Epica Apu uL Special FX2N 16CCL M Main unit powered extension extension L function block extension unit block block Y000 to YO17 Y020 to YO37 24 16 40 16 16 32 16 0 16 8 0 8 points 8 points 8 points points points points CC Link network Remote I O Remote I O 32 points 32 points Remote I O 32 points Number of input output points occupied by special function blocks 16 points Number of 0 points Number of input output points malla 96 points Number of input output points excluding remote I O points on CC Link Number of input output occupied points Up to 129 points 3 sime Number of remaining NN pointsx3 units 96 points SS NN aN N OWN ON aN SN Number of CC Link input ou
384. of test mode operations depending on the device type The 3 operations are explained below Refer to Subsection 19 6 1 for test mode subject devices 1 Data registers D D 16 bit DD 32 bit extended registers R R 16 bit DR 32 bit extended file registers ER ER 16 bit DER 32 bit 1 Perform a monitor mode operation to display the device whose current value is to be changed D1200 Refer to Subsection 19 6 2 for monitor function operation D1201 D1202 D1203 2 Hold the OK button for 1 second or longer to switch to the test mode The current value begins blinking refer to fig at right D1200 L D1201 D1202 D1203 3 Use the buttons to change the value as desired To cancel the operation and return to the monitor screen press D1200 ESC L DTZ207 Button Operation Description D1202 ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the monitor screen D1203 Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase OK Registers the current value and returns to the monitor screen 4 Press OK to register the current value and return to the monitor screen File register D The display module s test function cannot be used to change the current value of the file register D which is stored in the program memory 293 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum mano N 10 Bu
385. ogrammable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a A12 1996 Equipment requirements and tests suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 A11 2000 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 EN61131 2 2003 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a Equipment requirements and tests suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 2 2003 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Caution for compliance with EC Directive 1 Installation in Enclosure Programmable logic controllers are open type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control boxes Please use the FX3G Series programmable logic controllers while installed in conductive shielded control boxes Please secure the control box lid to the control box for conduction Installation within a control box greatly affects the safety of the system and aids in shielding noise from the programmable logic controller 2 Caution for Analog Products in use The analog products have been found to be compliant to the European standards in the aforesaid manual and directive However for the very best performance from what are in fact delicate measuring and controlled output devices Mitsubishi Electric would like to make the following points As analog devices are sensitive by nature their use should be considered carefully For users of proprietary cabl
386. oks A in the right figure MITSUBISHI muse GS SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneooods I al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove C in the right figure onto the DIN rail wasis CO uoneJn amp ijuo N Lock the DIN rail mounting hooks D in the following figure while pressing the PLC against the DIN rail z5 a2 Gt co ZS O ZE O n 2 xa xe xe xz xeu Xe v oooooooo 01234567 12 xu v 10 1 3 900000000 MITSUBISHI mase AS MITSUBISHI MESE uonejeisu 5 wm BuulM ie A ddng Jamo ue uonesedaid ram Buum indu CO p 99 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 4 3 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function block 100 Push out the DIN rail mounting hook A in the right fig Fear panel Rear panel ure of the input output extension block e For input output powered extension units 8 point type input output extension blocks and special extension units blocks this operation is unnecessary Fit the upper edge of the DIN rail mounting groove B in the righ
387. ol may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions 17 1 Outline When the internal power supplied from the FX3G Series PLC is insufficient for powering output extension blocks or special function blocks the FX3u 1PSU 5V extension power supply unit is available Only one FX3u 1PSU 5V unit may be connected to a FX3G PLC system Connect extension equipment to the FX3u 1PSU 5V according to the configuration specification limits described in Subsection 17 2 2 For the syste
388. on List Appendix B 1 Basic InsStructiONS oocccocccconoconoconnnoncnnnnonanocanonanocnnnonnnonanonanonaninos Appendix B 2 Step Ladder Instructions oocooccoocncconoconnconcconncncnonanonanocanocaninanonos Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number Warranty d Revised HISTON sosa encode ena eee ete ett 13 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Standards Standards Compliance with EC directive CE Marking This note does not guarantee that an entire mechanical module produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with the following standards Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user manufacturer For more details please contact to the local Mitsubishi Electric sales site Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing of the identified standards below and design analysis through the creation of a technical construction file to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility 89 336 EEC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3G FX3U series manufactured from June 1st 2005 FX3U 232ADP FX3U 485ADP FX3U 4AD ADP FX3u 4DA ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX3U 485ADP MB FX3u 4AD PTW ADP
389. on of the output contact However when the counter s value increments from 2 147 483 647 it changes to 2 147 483 648 In the same manner when it decrements from 2 147 483 648 it changes to 2 147 483 647 This type of counter is called a ring counter When RST instruction is executed after the reset input X011 turns on the current counter s value resets to 0 and the output contact is restored The current value output contact operation and reset status of counters are backed up kept even if the power is turned off 11 5 2 1 phase 2 count input These counters are 32 bit up count down count binary counters The operations of the output contact according to the current value are the same as those of the above mentioned 1 phase 1 count input high speed counters pepe of program For C246 X011 While X012 is on C246 increments the value when the input s terminal X000 switches from OFF to ON and decrements the value when the input terminal X001 switches from OFF to ON A The down count up count operations of C246 to C250 can be monitored through the ON OFF operations of M8246 to M8250 D2 D3 The setting is D3 D2 Noam OFF Up counting Up counting Down counting input input Main unit 2 For C249 MOM peana While X012 is on C249 starts counting immediately when the RST C249 input terminal X006 turns on A E The up counting input terminal is X000 and the down X012 6249 K1234 counting
390. on the upstream side or from eo i r D an input output powered extension unit on the upstream side of the extension power supply unit 2 In the example above the input output powered extension unit supplies the power to extension z blocks For details refer to 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit For details refer to 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit gt For details refer to 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V al UU lt OOO lt 23 g 50 2 zo o 02 oo S Q Other restrictions Restrictions in the use of the FX3G 422 BD When connecting a device such as GOT which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of the RS 422 port built in the main unit and the FX3G 422 BD at the same time avoid continuous use of either device If both devices are used continuously their life may be shortened due to heat generation lt Configuration example 1 gt RS 422 port built in main unit GT1020LBL 5V DC type FX3G 422 BD GT1020LBL 5V DC type Avoid continuous use of two GT1020LBL 5V DC type units 7 z5 When connecting a device such as GOT which consumes an internal 5V DC to each of two FX3G 422 PE BD units connected to the 40 point 60 point type main unit avoid continuous use of either device If both devices are used continuously their life may be shortened due to heat generation gu Configuration example 2 When connecting the 40 point type main unit
391. onnect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100V AC system and 200V AC system Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension units or earlier in extension units than the main unit For the details refer to WIRING PRECAUTIONS in Safety Precautions As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 Connect the OV terminal of the main unit or extension unit to the S S terminal of the input extension block 124 4 6 supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the main unit or earlier than the main unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time Do not connect the 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply of the main unit and the input output extension unit with each other Connect the OV terminal Some special extension units blocks do not have power terminals When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the extension unit or earlier than the extension unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 FX3G
392. onnected to the extension block Other Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Triac output type Item FX2N 16EYS Output Points 16 points Connection type Vertical terminal block M3 screws Output type Triac output SSR External power supply 85 to 242V AC Output circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of output operation Activation of the photo thyristor will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 0 3A point Resistance load The total load current per common should be as follows Max load 8 output points common 0 8A or less 15VA 100V AC 30VA 200V AC Open circuit leakage current 1mA 100V AC 2mA 200V AC Min load 0 4VA 100V AC 1 6VA 200V AC OFF gt 0ON 1ms or less Response time ON OFF 10ms or less Output circuit configuration A common number applies to the L of COML 260 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Triac Output 16 Points 16 13 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement Oz When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers BS and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Without cover 1 2 ago Output indicator g E E lamps 3 13 amp LED lamps j e S A
393. onnection terminal block S E The access function description for the FX3G main unit eum USB A connector juss cable via another station QCPU Q mode is used SE female Refer to Subsection 3 2 2 E dieu 1 0 When FX 232AW or FX 232AWC is used the communication baud rate is 19 200 bps or less n S For details refer to Subsection 3 2 3 3 39 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2 Connector Types and Cables for Program 3 2 1 Programming tool The following programming tools support FX3G Series PLCs Model name Description Version 8 72A or later of SWOD5C GPPW J and SWLID5C GPPW E supports FX3G GX Developer Although the tool earlier than version 8 72A can be used for programming by selecting FX1N C restrictions will be made on programming FX 30P FX 30P From first version supports FX3G PLCs Ver 1 10 or later For more information refer to 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability 3 2 2 Communication cables Model name Description USB cable 3m USBA plug lt gt USB MINI B plug 1 PEE ODE 9 10 For connection between personal computer and FX3G programming port USB RS 232C cable 3m D SUB 9Pin lt gt D SUB 25Pin 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS 422 converter 3m D SUB 25Pin lt gt D SUB 25Pin PAARA 9 10 For connection between personal computer and RS 232C RS
394. ons Guide Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF Resistance value Approx 100 to 200 Reference Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 3 Interlock e Forward For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where Interlock limit a hazardous condition could result if switched ON Forward simultaneously an external interlock should be provided for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right Rasa BESSER A limit U PLC output element 4 In phase PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase manner 348 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 21 Memory Cassette User s Manual Hardware Edition 21 1 Outline 21 Memory Cassette STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the memory cassette If the memory cassette is attached or detached while the PLC s power is on the data in the memory may be destroyed or the memory cassette may be damaged Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor 21 1 Outline The memory cassette can be installed at the main unit and when installed the memory cassette s internal program is used in place of the internal EEPROM memory The loader function transfers reads and writes pro
395. onse time Output circuit configuration FX2N 32ER 16 points FX2N 48ER 24 points Removable terminal block M3 screw Relay 250V AC 30V DC or less Mechanical insulation When power is applied to relay coil LED is lit 2A point The total load current per common terminal should be the following value 4 output points common terminal 8A or less e 8 output points common terminal 8A or less 80VA gt For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 5V DC 2mA reference value Approx 10ms Approx 10ms A common number applies to theLlof COML 215 SJo unoo ml pasds ybiH Buum indno IN 10 Bum OO S9sf SNOEN bh I eoueua ure N uny 1S9 O c D 62 p o o gt gt Q peJewog jndinogindu sun uoisuejx3 s sy ojg UOISU9 X3 indinoandu C mundo j yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 5 FX2N 32ER FX2N 48ER 15 5 2 External dimensions FX2N 32ER 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 3 83 ES 183 83 KES 183 83 83 83 LES 93 eS 5 s OM X X2 X4 X X0 X2 X4 Xt gt AF XT XS X5 a FU o c
396. onse time ON OFF Approx 10ms I 558 cy 238 28 gt l DC power S Output circuit configuration supply unit a o8 232 zh T e E 16 3 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement a 7 Input numbers X are assigned to the upper four points and output numbers Y are assigned to the lower four points With cover Without cover 17 FX2N 8ER CD POWER U m Input indicator Rear line 2g lamps LED lamps extension Output indicator E connector mo lamps LED lamps 57 O LE lt dan E 1 8 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 231 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 3 FX2N 8ER 24V DC Sink Input Relay Output 16 3 3 External dimensions 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8ER CD POWER LO AE Z e c mounting hole pitch 232 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 4 FX2N 8EX ES UL FX2N 16EX ES UL 24V DC Sink Source Input OF 16 4 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapt
397. oojg jeuuue CO 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 1 Specifications User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 1 3 Part Names Liquid crystal screen Q 1 lt ESC button O button O button O OK button Cut off the part when using an expansion board at the same time MITSUBISHI FX3G 5DM Lana eee eee ee ee eee d Functions of operation buttons The display module has 4 operation buttons as shown in the following table Name of button Function of operation button ESC Use this button to cancel the operation and to return to the previous screen Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value Use this button to move the cursor or to set a numeric value OK Use this button to select an item or to determine the set numeric value 19 1 4 External Dimensions Unit mm inches MITSUBISHI FX3G 5DM 49 4 1 95 282 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 2 Installation and Removal 11 19 2 Installation and Removal 23 Be sure that the power is OFF when installing the display module F 19 2 1 Installation 12 when the expansion board connector conversion adapter is not used together The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example E Remove the top cover a Remove the top cover A in the figure on the right
398. ooonccnnccncncnccnnncnnnnnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnnnnannnnos 252 16 10 3 External dimensions A ee aa 253 16 11 FX2N 8EYT FX2N 16EYT FX2N 16EYT C Transistor Output ooccccooccccoccncconcnccocnnconcnnnonos 254 16 111 Product specifications e oc 254 16 11 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent oooonccnnccnnccnncnnncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanrnnnnnnanennss 255 16 11 9 External GIMENSION S epica a lia 256 10 12 EX2N80E11 E Transistor OUIDUL soos ce Meech o a iia 258 16 12 T PrOQUESPECIICAMONS a a DUE 258 16 12 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent cccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeeeeseaeeseeeas 259 16 12 5 External aiimielisioriS acis e toan serch Loreto di E 259 16 13 FX2N 16EYS Trac Output 16 POINTS 2 cot te ipae toto teet ae ricas 260 6 13 41 Product SDecificatiOls satio exstet da 260 16 13 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangeMent ooonccnnccnnncnncnnnccnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnonnannnnos 261 1619 5 EXT IMC ON tias 261 17 Extension Power Supply Unit 262 IE EeSU Tm PIECE 262 IA 3 PACA PR 263 17 2 1 GENETIC SDeciliGallOriS 95 ceseec susc oie Mastan eet asutat dites suse S eee maesec oe ees ae 263 17 2 2 Performance Specifications essa rial tor tic 263 1 23 EXC Mall DIMAS e do peck d ma a OS ed 263 17 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Related Precaution coccccccccncccccnconcncconnncno
399. or FX 32bE TB 32 output points or 16 input output points FX 16EX A1 TB ON 100V AC input FX 16EYR TB i 3 Relay output FX 16EYS TB MEER RENE Triac output FX 16EYT TB e UR Transistor output sink FX 16EYT H TB O EN Transistor output sink 2 Input output cables Model name Function FX 16E 500CAB S 5m 16 4 Bulk wire FX 16E 150CAB 1 5m 4 11 FX 16E 300CAB 3m 9 10 Flat cable with tube Both ends are provided with 20 pin connectors FX 16E 500CAB 5m 16 4 FX 16E 150CAB R 1 5m 4 11 FX 16E 300CAB R 3m 9 10 Round multicore cable Both ends are provided with 20 pin connectors FX 16E 500CAB R 5m 16 4 FX A32E 150CAB 1 9m 4117 Flat cable with tube The end on the PLC side is provided with two 20 pin connectors FX A32E 300CAB 3m 9 10 and the end on the terminal block side is provided with a exclusive connector 1 common FX A32E 500CAB 5m 16 4 terminal for 32 input output points 3 Input output connector Model name Function FX2C I O CON Input output connector for flat cable FX2C 1 0 CON S Input output connector for bulk wire for 0 3 mm AGW22 FX2C I O CON SA Input output connector for bulk wire for 0 5 mm AGW20 3 1 12 Remote I O N For the remote I O of CC Link and CC Link LT refer to the manual and catalog of each master 3 1 13 Power supply unit 38 Model name Description Driving power supply FX2N 20PSU 24V DC power supply 100 to 240V AC FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products
400. or 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling If pressed again at the beginning of the device No list the display jumps to the end of the device No list Input X Output Y Auxiliary relay M Scrolls the display screen downward Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed State S scrolling If pressed again at the end of the device No list the display jumps to the beginning of the device No list All devices except x OK Switches to the test mode when hold for 1 second or longer 290 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 19 6 3 Monitor screen and status display gt Refer to Section 19 18 for the procedure used to display the current values as hexadecimal values 1 Data register D 16 bit extended register R 16 bit extended file register ER 16 bit Display Content D1001 D1002 D1003 Device No 1 2 Current value 4 Display Content Device No 1 Upper 16 bit device No odd number Lower 16 bit device No even number 2 Current value File register D The file register D current value cannot be directly monitored at the display module 3 Timer T Display Content 1 Device No Contact image 4 2 loc m OFF Blank 5 Reset image 3 oN m OFF Blank 4 Current value 5 Setting value 1 When not using it in a program a
401. or corrective actions If no program error is active There may be a problem with the PLC s memory content Perform the following procedure 1 Use the programming tool to perform a program memory all clear 2 Rewrite the program 3 Stop the PLC turn the power ON display the Error Check screen and check to refer to if the Fatal error occurred message appears Ifthe Fatal error occurred message appears perform the corrective action described at item 2 below Ifthe Fatal error occurred message does not appear set the PLC to a RUN state then check again if the message appears If the message appears a watchdog timer error has probably occurred In this case the program should be re examined Refer to Subsection 14 5 3 for watchdog timer error corrective actions If the Fatal error occurred message still appears after performing the corrective actions described in item 1 above perform the following procedure to check for symptom changes Turn the power OFF and disconnect all extension devices extension connectors extension cables and expansion board connectors Turn the power ON again at the main unit display the Error Check screen again and check if the Fatal error occurred message appears 1 Ifthe Fatal error occurred message appears The main unit hardware may have failed Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor 2 Ifthe Fatal error occurred message does not appear Turn the powe
402. orced ON OFF subject cum selection 22 Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed scrolling x D o OK Highlights the contact ON OFF status 3 x 5 Press ESC to return to the monitor screen 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 295 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 7 Error Check 19 6 5 Test mode operation notes 1 When using multiple same number timers T and counters C Operation occurs as follows if multiple timers T and counters C are used in programs which contain CJ instructions and step ladders e When a setting change is performed after switching from the device monitor to the test function mode the setting change is applied to the timer T or counter C which is nearest to Step O When changing the setting values for same number timers T and counters C use the programming tool to change the program 2 When the set values of timers T and counters C are specified indirectly When the set values of timers T and counters C are specified indirectly in programs the values of indirectly specified devices change if the set values of timers T and counters C are changed in the display module 3 When changing the values of extension file registers ER and DER When the value of an extension file register ER or DER is changed such a change
403. orward current Load current or more EESTI 252 3 Interlock 228 LD For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where ERU 38 a hazardous condition could result if switched ON limit Interlock a simultaneously an external interlock should be provided f Forward 45 for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to the right a Reverse U ga Reverse PLC output 25S limit element S22 5 8 c a SKS aoe n ES 58 E N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO D ES un O gt Q 62 pel D lt O 2 e D yoojg jJeuiuJe 345 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 9 FX 16EYS TB 20 9 FX 16EYS TB The FX 16EYS TB is used by connecting it to the FX2N series output extension block transistor Output Connector Connectable models FX2N 16EYT C sink output The applications shown below are not supported Unsupported Applications Pulse Y output PLSY instruction acceleration deceleration setup PLSR instruction pulse width modulation PWM instruction DOG search zero return DSZR instruction batch data positioning mode TBL instruction absolute current value read ABS instruction zero return ZRN instruction variable speed pulse output PLSV instruction drive to increment DRVI instruction drive to absolute DRVA instruction Pulse outputs Time division inputs Input matrix
404. os 98 542 installation Or Main unita stots a aa 99 8 4 3 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function block 100 944 FRemoval0r mall UI se aeta aee rates eau o orb rer eee Re E RM E bx oet a ud ERE Ep idas 101 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 ScrewS ooooccncccoccncococcnnonononnonononnononnnnnnanoncnnanennos 102 8 5 1 Hole pitches for direct MoOUNtiNg o cccccocccnnnccconnnccncnnnnncnnnnconononnnnnnonnnonononnrrnnnnnnnnnenonnranenennnnnss 102 9 9 2 Example of MOUNTING hole pics e aM ub eu ut aM ala a 104 9 5 9 Installatiofof man MUTA So coe a d Eo ML he UELLE 105 8 5 4 Installation of input output powered extension unit block and special function block 105 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices cccoccccoccncccccnconcncnncncconcnonanenononos 106 8 6 1 Connection of exterision devices iso ai 106 8 6 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion board seeessseeeseeeeneneeeennn 107 8 6 3 Connecting method A connection of connector conversion adapter 108 8 6 4 Connecting method C connection of special adapter oocccccocncccocnnccocnnnconnnnnnnonoconcnnnnnanos 110 8 6 5 Connecting method D connection of powered extension units blocks to main unit 110 8 6 6 Connecting method E connection of powered extension units bl
405. oth available Select a proper type Differences from FX1N PLCs in input specifications reference FX1N PLCs only for sink input manuals in Japanese are supplied and those common to sink source input manuals in English are supplied have different model names 9 e n FX1N PLCs only for sink input the S S terminal and the 24V terminal are connected unlike in FX3G PLCs a ae o 2 S eo E O O zel lt 8 o e FX1N PLCs common to sink source input are switched to the sink or source input mode by external wiring like FX3G PLCs 129 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type This section explains handling of 24V DC inputs in the main unit precautions on input device connection and external wiring examples gt For the input specifications refer to Section 4 3 10 2 1 Handling of 24V DC input 130 1 Input terminals Sink input When a no voltage contact or NPN open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the OV terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the input display LED lights Source input When a no voltage contact or PNP open collector transistor output is connected between an input X terminal and the 24V terminal and the circuit is closed the input X turns on Then the input display L
406. ould prepare the electric wires and pressure bonding tool s o E Model name and composition of input output connector APPIICADIS GIGGING Wire UE I06 1 are recommended and tool Oar Modeinane Details of part E WII SIE Pressure bonding tool 7 made by DDK Ltd made by DDK Ltd z3 lolo 10 piece AWG28 0 1mm 357J 4674D Main body E FX2C I O CON for flat cable Solderless connector FRC2 A020 30S 1 27 pitch 20 core 357J 4664N Attachment O e P 5 piece Housing HU 200S2 001 2 FX2C 1 0 CON S for bulk wire Solderless contact HU 411S AWG22 0 3mm 357J 5538 5 piece Housing HU 200S2 001 2 FX2C 1 0 CON SA for bulk wire Sclderiesscontact HUATISA AWG20 0 5mm 357J 13963 4 Certified connectors commercially available connectors Connectors made by DDK Ltd shown in Item 3 described in the previous page and connectors made by Matsushita Electric Works Ltd shown in the following table Compliant electric wires UL 1061 is recommended AXW1204A AWG22 0 3mm AXW7221 AWG24 0 2mm AXW62001A 5 o ye a D o Pressure bonding tool Model name of connector Housing Contact AXY52000 Semi cover ue uoneJedald Buum indu CO p 119 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 3 Terminal block for europe expansion board and special adapters
407. ounding and E i power cables Se EA Ec sink and Input extension E i P source block l l input 8 type si zi l l D I I D Output extension S block 50M 24V A A 1 Connect the AC power supply to the L and N terminals in any case of 100V AC 5 system and 200V AC system Make sure that the power is turned ON at the same time in the main unit and extension power supply units or earlier in extension power supply units than the main unit As for the details see WIRING PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 2 Connect the 24V terminal of the main unit to the S S terminal of the input extension block 3 In the case of the sink input type the S S terminal is used as the 24 terminal 4 Some special function units blocks do not have the power supply terminal When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the 6 main unit or earlier than the main unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same time Some special function blocks do not have the power supply terminals When using an external power supply turn it ON at the same time with the extension power supply unit or earlier than the extension power supply unit When turning OFF the power confirm the safety of the system and then turn OFF the power of the PLC including special extension equipment at the same
408. out the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor Registration Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PREGAUTION Sunat a 1 o E 14 Compliance with EC directive CE Marking ccoooccccococnococonnnnconononcncannnnononnncononnnnononnnnonannnnonanenos 14 Requirement for Compliance with EMC directive ooccccoccnccoccncocnncconnncnnnnonononononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonenonos 14 Requirement for Compliance with LVD directive
409. ower line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 202 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 OQI SS WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION a 2 Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a 1 2 wire 2mm or thicker Oo Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 9 3 Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual S If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input outpu
410. ower or initiating operation after installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 151 ox O F epo N D D oa BuutM mamo dh 10 buum OO S9sf SNOLIBA dh I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 paiemog jdinoandu Q1 spun uoisuejx3 uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jnd noandu C N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunction
411. owing devices Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards and special adapters Extension units blocks and FX Series terminal blocks Battery and memory cassette TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION When transporting the FX3G Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable during transportation The battery is not incorporated in the PLC main unit at shipment from the factory Order it if necessary 22 1 Battery Purpose The battery backs up the following contents against power interruption Proper parameter setting is required to back up the device memory and current time For the parameter setting method refer to Section 22 3 Item Data Retained By Backup Battery Devi Auxiliary relay M1536 to M7679 state S1000 to 84095 data register D1100 to D7999 icu extended register RO to R23999 Current time Current time clock 1 The data is backed up by the large capacity capacitor built in the PLC at shipment from the factory For backup by the capacitor refer to Section 4 5 22 2 Specifications Item Specifications Remarks Nominal voltage Battery voltage can be monitored with PLC data register D8005 359
412. ox 10ms 57 Response time 2 ON gt 0FF Approx 10ms 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO Output circuit configuration supply unit A common number applies to the LI of COML ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisua 2 yoojg euw CO 245 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EYR ES UL With cover FX2N 8EYR ES CD POWER Output indicator lamps LED lamps ouro 1 2 3 OOOO FX2N 16EYR ES UL o We a Without cover Rear line extension connector When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Output indicator lamps LED lamps e oO o4 cono C 0000000 Output indicator lamps LED lamps mou cm so 00000000 246 A A TL HA m03 YA CA OA El in lt D lt i lt IO ES lt e gt lt ion lt Ni E E E E E ee E eje E Without cover 00000000 Rear line extension connector Lower numbers Higher numbers 4A SA A EA OA ZA 9A SA A LA NOO CWO SAL PALZAL TAL ZATOA FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Out
413. pecial adapter with i JY997D14801 a User s Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series D product i O User s Manual Analog Control Edition gt supped FX2N 4AD TC Procedures for handling the 4 ch thermocouple input S with JY992D65501 i 0 User s Guide special function block product Supplied FXON 2LC Procedures for handling the 2 ch temperature control 5 with User s Guide JY992D85601 special function block product When using refer to FX2N 2LC User s Manual g 9 me o Y Separate FAAN 2LC JY992D85801 Procedures for handling the 2 ch temperature control 09R607 Bo volume User s Manual special function block 2 H Analog output When using each product refer also to the Use s Manual Hardware Edition for the PLC main unit to be installed Procedures for handling the 1 ch analog output 6 supplied FX3G 1DA BD expansion board with JY997D33601 CXPAnsio OD Vm Installation Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series Sa diis User s Manual Analog Control Edition E Rt Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog output S With FX3U 4DA ADP JY997D14001 special adapter i odid User s Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series P User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Supplied Procedures for handling the 4 ch analog output ae FX3U 4DA JY997D20801 special function block i e 3 duel Installation Manual When using refer also to FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series P Us
414. pecified device monitor screen and monitor test screen The figure below shows differences between the specified device monitor screen and the monitor test screen gt Refer to Subsection 19 14 5 for a display example of the specified device monitor screen Refer to Subsection 19 6 3 for a display example of the monitor test screen Specified Device Monitor Screen Monitor Test Screen When D1000 is specified When D1000 is monitored D1000 D1001 D1000 32767 D1002 D1003 In the case of a specified device monitor screen specified is displayed 19 14 3 Program example1 when monitoring testing a timer In this program example the device type to be displayed on the specified device monitor screen is set to timer T Sets the device No to T10 For testing the timer T10 turn ON MO to enable the test operation In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 D8300 H System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse n ol e D8301 System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 Sets the device type to Timer ma MOV D50 Sets the device No to T10 Test operation enable command MO m50 When MO turns ON the test operation for T10 is enabled 311 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum mano N 10 Buum OO s sN snoueA dh I oD Dn es Sy X E 090 2 5 O O S o Q mM US OS O c 2opc 2 oO Ooc 2 3
415. plate 2 DIN rail mounting groove B 1 Nameplate The product model name control number and power supply specifications are shown 2 DIN rail mounting groove The unit can be installed on DIN46277 rail 35mm 1 38 wide 207 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum mano N 10 Bum OO S9sf SNOEN bh I eoueua ure N uny 1S9 O c D 62 p o o gt gt Q paJamod jndinogindu spun uoisuejx3 s sy ojg UOISU9 X3 jdnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy ejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL 15 3 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are the same as those for the main unit Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Refer to Chapter 9 for power supply wiring Refer to Chapter 10 for input wiring Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications For the power supply specifications refer to Section 15 2 2 Input specifications for sink input and source input Item FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL Input points 16 points 24 points Connection type Removable terminal block M3
416. play Top screen Specified device monitor DIR 3 1 Monitor Test ErrorCheck Menu display language setting Dr NIS SI S I SISIDIDPIS X Contrast adjustment loe OA Display lalo 1 Time Setting IAEA MS NEN Keyword cancel NE x ee Memory cassette transfer re ee AAA AAA 1 Customer keyword Permanent PLC lock included 3 X EN 302 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 11 Keyword 19 11 3 Keyword storage oz The system has no process for recovering registered keyword which are forgotten BS Therefore be sure to store the keywords in a secure location E 19 11 4 Screens requiring keyword for access 12 O At the menu screen use the buttons to move the cursor to the Keyword item then press OK to 3 display one of the 4 screens shown below the screen that displays depends on the keyword status If no keywords are registered press ESC to return to the menu screen 3 To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Menu screen gt Contrast 23 ClockMenu The Keyword g pm Keyword is not set Casstte 14 Keyword If keyword is correct al When switching to menu ao prohibited by keyword occurs Please input 2 2 Keyword All operation m is possible 15 ES Res 55 This operation SEE is protected Keyword 2nd keyword If keyword is incorrect J a by the Keyword Please
417. ples of external wiring sink input Sink and source input type Main unit Fuse 1 1 UONOnNpoJu N S WEN Hed pue sanjea OO AY E 5 2 DESIRE Input svlovi24V impedance 4 O O Input extension block si al Sink and source input type 2 Two wire DUU lt Qoo proximity so g Oo o Sensor o E Input output powered extension unit N E 6 Class D 9o grounding 23 EN 3 EN EJ Sa _ 7 Za F O B i EE 3 ZS P 24V 8 ay i S terminal 9 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the terminals of the extension units as well as the S S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit 4 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 IU I D d ms co Bi O O zol lt S o 133 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type Use of input output extension units blocks of sink input type Main unit Sink and source input type Two wire I i x proximity Sensor I E Class D Sink inp
418. point The total resistance load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 8A or less Resistance load Max load e 8 output points common 8A or less 80VA Inductive load For the product life refer to Subsection 14 4 3 For cautions on external wiring refer to Subsection 12 1 3 1 7 Open circuit leakage current com Min load 5V DC 2mA reference values 22 OFF gt 0ON Approx 10ms x 2 Response time eS ON OFF Approx 10ms 5 lt 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO Output circuit configuration supply A common number applies to the LI of COML ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 251 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 10 FX2N 8EYR FX2N 16EYR Relay Output 16 10 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement FX2N 8EYR With cover FX2n 8EYR Output indicator lamps LED lamps CD POWER ourd 1 2 3 0000 4567 0000 FX2N 16EYR Without cover EEr a Rear line extension connector When an output Y number is assigned 8 points on the upper side will be used for the lower output numbers and 8 points on the lower side will be used for the higher output numbers With cover Output indicator lamps LED lamps o 2 S ZONAL oo 000000 FXarl6EYR Output indicator lamps LED lamps noana Q0 82 O 00000000 2
419. pplies to the of COM to the J of V 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 5 Performance Specifications mada 4 5 Performance Specifications uononpou The main unit performance specifications are explained below Item Performance N Operation control system Stored program repetitive operation system with interruption function Batch processing system when END instruction is executed it E Input output refresh instruction and pulse catch function are provided Programming language Relay symbol system step ladder system SFC notation possible 32000 step EEPROM memory Max allowable write 20 000 times 32000 step EEPROM memory with loader function Max allowable write 10 000 times SOWeN ed pue seJnjee Max memory capacity type Go Memory cassette Option Program memory Writing function during Provided Program can be modified while the PLC is running running jonpoud 5 a o a Q E o 2 Keyword function With keyword Customer keyword function Built in Real time clock Clock function 1980 to 2079 with correction for leap year 2 or 4 digit year accuracy within 45 seconds month at 25 C Sequence instructions 29 ATES cU Step ladder instructions 2 si instructions O Applied instructions
420. protect function Setting ccooooncccccoocccnnconnconncononncnnonnnnncncnnnns 317 19 16 3 Keyword and display screen protect function levels and corresponding restrictions 318 19 16 4 Relationship between keyword and display screen protect function 318 19 1659 urere cse 319 19 16 6 Relationship between specified device monitor function and display screen protect function 319 19 16 7 Pointers for using the display screen protect function cccooccccccoccnccnonnnononnnnnocnnonncncnnncnnnnos 320 19 17 Operation Button ON OFF Information coooccccoccncoccnccncnccconnnconcncnnnnnnonnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnonenenonenos 321 1917 1 MAnoU Ss AD elleziie a E D ETT 321 19 17 2 System information operation button ON OFF information ooccccccccnccccnnccconnnonononcnononinnns 321 19 18 Specifying a Hexadecimal Current Value Display Format occcooccnccccccnccnoccnnononnnnnnncnnnnnanonnos 322 19 18 1 System information specifying a hexadecimal current value display format 322 19 18 2 Program example 1 specifying a hexadecimal data display format 322 19 18 3 Program example 2 specifying a decadal data display format sssss 322 19 19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective ACtIONS ooccccconncncococcnnononcncononononnanononnanencnnancnnos 323 19 19 1 W
421. put Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 3 External dimensions oz gt o D FX2N 8EYR ES UL 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 1 2 E O c E E FX2N 8EYR ES E e c O5 lo CD POWER E LO Q 6688 S oo pats 6666 o O 0 o 13 O E sz 23 cg dh I FX2N 16EYR ES UL PES S28 Sas 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches 256 p 8 3 ra 5 c 9 15 NES O Dg WE OD Q S 2 5 O e Sag 5 O O c amp E g 17 yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 247 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 9 EX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 FX2N 8EYT ESS UL FX2N 16EYT ESS UL Transistor Output 16 9 1 Product specifications 248 The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications gt Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications For external wiring refer to the following chapters Item Product type Rated voltage Item MASS Weight Other Item Output Points Connection type Output unit type External power supply Output circuit insulation Indication of output operation Resistance load Max load Inductive load Open circuit leakage current Min load OFFON
422. put output extension block refer to Chapter 16 gt For the external dimensions of the special function blocks refer to Chapter 18 uonejeisu OA BuulM jddns Jewog ue uoneJedaJg ram Buum indu CO p 105 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices This section explains the connecting methods for extension devices 8 6 1 Connection of extension devices The connecting method varies depending on the combination of the products e the main unit expansion board special adapters input output extension blocks and special function blocks The connecting methods are explained with the following configuration examples Example of configuration l Connector l FX2N FX3U Special conversion Expansion Series adapter adapter board extension blocks FX3G Series main unit Connecting method E Connecting Connecting method B method A Connecting method D Connecting method C m Bo RM FX2N Series input output de ie extension blocks powered extension unit extension blocks Extension cable FXON 65EC FXON 30EC FX2N Series Input output powered extension unit Ld Ld Ld Connecting Connecting Connecting method F method G method H 106 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclo
423. put output powered extension unit 170 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 25 This section gives examples of wiring for capturing the ON OFF status of 24 switches to M30 to M37 M40 to 2 M47 and M50 to M57 using MTR instructions 1 Main unit 12 2 Example of program 3 M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring sz When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used main ne unit a otasov 18 18 18 ye 18 18 18 ye diodeis s 14 necessary X021VX022WX023V X024 VX025VX026V X027 3530 E N n N Ed E YE P AS P jg YE J FE ZN 33 X021VX022VX023VX024VX025VvX026VX027 So ri m S ye ye 48 y SB ye B 15 AN ZN AN ZN LIN AN ZN mus ea 25 Sao g E Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ES 1 6 AD EE 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used 1 7 main unit ARU c dm uo ug qu 14828 a 3 debo gt OS diode is y y 5 5 ea X021VX022VX023VX024VX025VX026VX027 B 00 So e N co It TOA xt st xt x xt st st st y y y y y y y V X021VX022VX023VX024VX025VX026WX027 bo N eo lt T LO O N suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO Main unit Ex FX3G 40MT ESS ampoyy ejdsiq QO
424. quick reference matrix whether 16 input points and 8 output points whose exten sion is judged as impossible in step 2 can be added 7 Output 3 DE 6 35 iS 1o 100 0 150 ee 400 300 200 100 9 0 8 16 24 32 7 Number of added points After 16 input points and 8 output points are connected the remaining current of the 24V DC service power supply is 50mA or less Accordingly it is possible to add 16 input points and 8 output points The remaining power supply capacity 50mA can be used as power supply for external loads such as sensors by the user gt added points o uonejeisu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneJedald ram Buum indu CO p 73 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 6 5 3 Selection example 2 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit 74 This subsection explains an example in which FX2N 2AD and 8 output points are added to the following system configuration using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit lt Example of configuration gt Input extension Special function Output extension Special function Output extension Main unit block block block block block 8 points FX3U 64CCL 8 points FX2N 2AD 8 points Range extendible to main unit Extension blocks to be added Special function block 1unit Input output 16 points Special kde e
425. r Input impedance Input circuit diagram 243 SJojunoo mm peads yBIH Buum nding IN 10 Bum OO Ses snoueA I Bunoouse qnoi S9UBUAJUIE N uny 1S9 peJeMod indinoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 17 yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 7 FX2N 8EX UA1 UL 100V AC Input 16 7 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement With cover Without cover FX2N 8EX UA1 Rear line extension connector Ses Input b55 indicator WES lamps LED lamps Z 3 j SE E j x Vnum E Umm mu 16 7 3 External dimensions 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches FX2N 8EX UA1 O POWER 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 244 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 16 Input Output Extension Blocks User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output 16 8 FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 16EYR ES UL Relay Output OF 16 8 1 Product specifications The generic specifications are identical to the main unit specifications 1 2 Refer to Section 4 1 for generic specifications O For external wiring refer to the following chapters E Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring 1 Power supply specifications Item FX2N 8EYR ES UL FX2N 1
426. r OFF connect the extension devices then operate the system again to check for errors If the problem persists there may be main unit or extension device hardware failure Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 20 Menu Display Characters Japanese and English 19 20 Menu Display Characters Japanese and English Display Character OF Correspondence Table Menu Screen English EZS TAN Monitor Test 1 2 I fisy 7 ErrorCheck O LANGUAGE LANGUAGE E Menu l NAN Contrast y ty ClockMenu E i g NM Keyword XtUBty 7297 Cassette 1 3 I7 j19 7 ErrorCheck D ss 17 7y No errors ErrorCheck a I2 71 97 ErrorCheck c 3 1I5 1 N Error code a LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE Japanese Japanese 14 Engl ish English AZ Contrast TY NA Contrast S g 2 Oo wo F yy 4y 03 Current time ag y Way Clock setting ea ClockMenu y Way Clock setting 1 5 y yy 4y 197 Current time mos A X Oo tyr4375 is set 25S FE ae 7 Please input E 2191399799 1M Keyword z e eee kkkkkkkk Jeletelekekek kkkkkkkk 1 6 t g V 7 Make Keyword ama gt i d Mos Keyword HJ ind 600 OK y OK gt Execute SS ESCOtvvtll ESC gt Cancel S Voth All operation AJIT is possible 1 7 s cum PON 74 wF Incorrect Seu Keyword 7 M T XtUmty NT YO Memory Cassette i S d asina XtJf ty KPC Cassette PC transfer EV AY PO Cassette gt PC Wn Cassette lt PC X t ey PC
427. r PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or p
428. r a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse PLF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the device that is set as the operation condition It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for executing the instruction for falling edge pulse Instructions for rising edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse the instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the operation condition device is ON Target instructions for rising edge pulse LDP ANDP ORP and pulse operation type applied instructions such as MOVP Contact ON OFF status Instruction for Instruction for while write during RUN is executed rising edge pulse falling edge pulse OFF Not executed Not executed 1 The PLS instruction is not executed Writing in RUN mode to circuit blocks including the following instructions results in the following operation e MEP instruction Conversion of operation result to leading edge pulse instruction When completing Write during RUN to a circuit including the MEP instruction the execution result of the MEP instruction turns ON conducting state if the operation result up to the MEP instruction is ON MEF instruction Conversion of operation result to trailing edge pulse instru
429. r link Refer to Data Communication Edition Inverter communication Supported in Ver 1 10 or later Refer to Data Communication Edition Non protocol communication through built in RS 422 RS 232C RS 485 Refer to Data Communication Edition CC Link Master station FX2N 16CCL M Intelligent device station FX3U 64CCL Remote device station FX2N 32CCL Refer to the manual for each product CC Link LT Master station FX2N 64CL M Remote l O station Remote device station Refer to the manual for each product Analog functions The special adapter and special function block for each analog function are connected Refer to Analog Control Edition Kinds of analog functions Voltage current input Voltage current output Temperature sensor input thermocouple and platinum resistance thermometer sensor Temperature control FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 Features and Part Names 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 2 2 1 Front Panel Factory default configuration standard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 10 11 12 Peripheral device connecting connector cover Terminal names Top cover S 40points 60points type only Top cover Terminal
430. r more sensitivity current X010 or more EE 3 5mA or more OFF input sensitivity current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input Input signal form Sink input NPN open collector transistor Source input PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation Input operation display LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven Sink input wiring Source input wiring Input circuit configuration 1 Each value inside indicates the number of occupied points 2 Input impedance 3 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 44 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 4 Output Specifications mada 4 4 Output Specifications uononpoJu The main unit output specifications are explained below 4 4 1 Relay output N Transistor output specifications Item FX3G 14MR ES FX3G 24MR ES FX3G 40MR ES FX3G 60MR ES Number of output points 6 points 8 10 points 16 16 points 24 points SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Connecting type Removable terminal block M3 screw 3 Output type Relay 39 External power suppl lada 2 3 P Mp 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards S a O 2A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal s
431. r out of active ON state number 3 5 state ranging from SO to S899 and D 8043 S1000 to S4095 is stored in D8040 ON state number 4 land the second smallest state M8047 D 8044 number is stored in D8041 ON state numbers Active state numbers are then sequentially stored in registers up D 8045 to D8047 Max 8 points ON state number 6 D 8046 ON state number 7 D 8047 ON state number 8 pisos 4 When M8049 is ON the smallest D 8049 o number out of active annunciator M8049 On state minimum relay ranging from S900 to S999 is number stored in D8049 D8050 to D16050 1 Executed at END instruction Error Detection Refer to Subsection 14 6 3 for details If the unit or block corresponding to a programmed I O number is not actually loaded M8060 is set to ON and the first device number of the erroneous block is written to D8060 D18060 Example If X020 is unconnected M8060 D BCD converted 1 oj2 value T Device number 10 to 177 1 Input X 0 Output Y D 8061 Error code for PLC hardware error M8061 Error code for PC PP communication D 8062 error or serial communication error O M8062 chO 29 Error code for serial communication M8063 D 8063 error 1 ch1 D 8064 Error code for parameter error M8064 D 8065 Error code for syntax error M8065 D 8066 Error code for ladder error M8066 D 8067 3 Error code for operation error M8067 Number and name D 8069 2 Cl 3 Cl Parallel L D 8070 DE Pulse
432. r setting time in DO O 2 of the system information system signal 1 The screen saver function is set as 10 minutes as an initial value in D8300 when 1 or DODO 2 is 0 19 15 1 System information Screen saver function 1 System signal 10 System Information Description Screen saver setting time in units of min 1 or less Forced screen saver function to always display the dedicated screen DOO 2 0 10 minutes initial value 1 to 240 Can be set in units of minute within this range 241 or more 240 minutes 2 System signal 2 System Information Description MA A 2 Screen saver function invalid 19 15 2 Screen saver display When a key operation is not given within the specified screen saver setting time the dedicated screen shown below appears and scrolls from the right to the left and from the top to the bottom When a key operation is given while the dedicated screen is displayed the former screen appears The key operation given for the first time after the dedicated screen appeared resets the screen saver function and is invalid as a key operation The dedicated screen scrolls Display screen example The dedicated screen appears until a key operation is given W een saver n saver 01 10 08 gt Msc 23 59 59 Wen to The former screen appears after a key operation was given 19 15 3 Program example screen saver time setting In this program example the screen saver time is set to
433. r there is a parallel resistance or leakage current at the input contact wire the terminals in accordance with the following table gt For the instructions for connecting input devices refer to Subsection 10 2 2 Item X000 to X007 X010 to max input number of the main unit Input voltage 24V DC 10 Input sensitivity current Oe 1 5mA or less 1 5mA or less 10 2 2 Instructions for connecting input devices UONINPOJJU N SOWeN ed pue sanjea OO a2 o8 1 In the case of no voltage contact Sm The input current of this PLC is 7mA 24V DC 5mA 24V DC in X010 or later J Use input devices applicable to this minute current If no voltage contacts switches for large current are used contact failure may occur 4 Input number Input current 3 X000 to X007 7mA 24V DC X010 or more 5mA 24V DC S Example Products of OMRON al Type Model name Type Model name Microswitch Models Z V and D2RV Operation switch Model A3P 99 Zoo 6 Proximity switch Model TL Photoelectric switch Model E3S z S E 2 In the case of input device with built in series diode The voltage drop of the series diode should be approx 4V or less When lead switches with a series LED are used up to two switches can be connected in series 6 Also make sure that the input current is over the input sensing level while the switches are ON E S as SI E sink input source input Z3 CO 3S gt E P 1 In the case of a
434. r to the following gt Refer to Subsection 4 1 1 2 Ground the PLC independently or jointly Refer to Section 9 3 PLC Other Other Other equipment equipment equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed 3 The PLC cannot be used at a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure to avoid damage 42 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 2 Power Supply Specifications mada 4 1 1 Dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test Perform dielectric withstand voltage test and insulation resistance test at the following voltage between each terminals and the main unit ground terminal Insulation Between terminals Dielectric strength i Remarks resistance Terminals of main unit and input output powered extension unit block uononpou N Between power supply terminal AC power supply and ground terminal 1 5kV AC for 1min S WEN Hed pue seJnjee Between 24V DC service power supply connected to input terminal 24V DC and 500V AC for 1min ground terminal pe meen puree ORS rane 1 5kV AC for 1min 9M Q or more Only input output powered extension unit block ground terminal on 500V DC i Megger Between output terminal relay and ground 1 5kV AC for 1min 99 i terminal OO jonpoud 5 a o a Q E o 2 Between output t
435. railing edge pulse Master Control Instruction MC Denotes the start of a master control block MCR Other Instruction Denotes the end of a master control block NOP End Instruction END Program END I O refresh and Return to Step 0 No operation or null step Mnemonic STL RET Function Starts step ladder Completes step ladder FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix B Instruction List Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number Appendix B 3 Applied Instructions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Program Flow 00 CJ 01 CALL 02 SRET IRET 04 E Function Conditional Jump Call Subroutine Subroutine Return Interrupt Return Enable Interrupt Disable Interrupt 06 FEND 07 WDT 08 FOR NEXT Move and Compare 10 CMP 11 ZCP 12 MOV 13 SMOV e Co Main Routine Program End Watchdog Timer Refresh Start a FOR NEXT Loop End a FOR NEXT Loop O co Compare Zone Compare Move Shift Move 14 CML Complement 15 Block Move 16 Fill Move mo 18 Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal 19 BIN Conversion to Binary Arithmetic and Logical Operation 20 ADD Addition 21 SUB Subtraction 22 MUL Multiplication 23 DIV Division 24 INC Increment 25 DEC Decrement 26 WAND 27 WOR 28 WXOR 29 Rotation and Shift Operation 30 Rotation Right 31 ROL Rotation Left 32 Logical Word AND Logica
436. rammable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not supply power to the 24 and 24V terminals 24V DC service power supply on the main unit or extension units Doing so may cause damage to the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit and extension units with a wire 2 mm or thicker Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems refer to Section 9 3 Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Connect the DC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause elect
437. ramming tool to cancel the Internal Memory tyr V4 keyword in the internal EEPROM Mu 93 D gt OS _ NJ Oa ae TAI TA TING Transfer successful E Memory cassette transfer completed pi reading writin ae ee 2 7 l 9 2d TIYIYYN NY Check if the memory cassette is properly installed j 1 The setting value can also be changed when the PLC is in RUN mode 1 6 ADS EE gt E N yun jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 323 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions 19 19 1 When a Fatal error occurred message appears 324 Operation is possible with the Level C or Level B keyword function restrictions However the system is probably in one of the statuses described below Check these statuses in the order shown below and take the appropriate corrective action Perform an error check at the display module and if an error is active take the appropriate corrective action Refer to Section 19 7 for the error check procedure If a program error is active The fatal error was probably activated due to a program error Use the programming tool to correct the program Refer to Section 14 6 for error codes and corrective actions Refer to Subsection 14 5 3 for watchdog timer err
438. rcuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case NCAUTION terere 90 113 Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the 127 control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line 151 Noise may cause malfunctions 165 Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors 20
439. rectly with M4 Screws 5 Special function unit block G H or I Unit mm inches Mounting Role pitch 0 106 W 0 16 75 2 96 0 16 FX2N 2AD P 4 E S FX2N 2DA 39 1 54 O RC f RM Emm FX2N 64CL M LAA M VC FX2N 32CCL i LO LO MIE O 18 FX3U 4AD G OR H Boe FX3U 4DA i Qo G FX2N 4AD 6 O o DS FX2N 4DA Ll gt A NS Gee FX2N 4AD PT ou 4 FX2N 4AD TC un j FX2N 5A 0 16 W ree FXoN 2LC TE FX3U 64CCL iO x FX3U 1PSU 5V Bae H FX2N 16CCL M Refer to the figure shown co Y left E ___ FX2N 20PSU 52 2 05 JE FX2N 8AD 67 2 64 8 5 2 Example of mounting hole pitches 15 1 18 6 26 26 46 pois 122 4 81 ip M ti x2 172 6 78 Unit mm inches He UT s CERAMICA ERE T he al a d Sa Hood EE i Bist A HF ou Gi C ros O I I I ri EM i I o Dg llc pu iuc ucc O te 3e p 2 2 2 0 08 0 08 0 08 FX3U 232ADP FX3G 40MT ES FX2N 16EX FX2N 64CL M FX2N 48ER MB The gap between products is 2 mm 0 08 104 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 5 Procedures for Installing Directly with M4 Screws 8 5 3 Installation of main unit O Mount the special adapters and connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP on the main unit before S installing the unit in the enclosure For the connectio
440. red judge whether extension is possible using one of the following methods Using the 24V DC service power supply 400mA of the main unit Using an input output powered extension unit Using an extension power supply unit For details refer to the following Refer to 6 5 1 When adding input output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit Refer to 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit Refer to 6 7 Expansion of Extension Power Supply Unit FX3U 1PSU 5V FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 5 Expansion of Main Unit 6 5 1 When adding input output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit UONINPOJJU If extension is not allowed due to restrictions in connection to the main unit described in the preceding subsection extension blocks can be added using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit For adding extension blocks using the 24V DC service power supply it is necessary to examine again whether extension is possible for all of extension blocks selected in the preceding subsection and extension blocks to be selected in this subsection Note that only up to two network related special function blocks can be connected including extension to the main unit N SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main
441. reset the watchdog timer several times in one scan Change the setting of the watchdog timer Change the watchdog timer setting D8000 in the program so that the setting is larger than the maximum value of the scan time D8012 Remove the PLC and supply power to it from another power supply on a desk If the ERR LED goes off noise may have affected the PLC Take the following measures Check the ground wiring and reexamine the wiring route and installation location Fita noise filter onto the power supply line If the ERR LED does not go off even after the measures stated in 1 and 2 are taken consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer Perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool For the remedies refer to 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes If the operations of the PLC are abnormal perform PLC diagnosis and program check with the programming tool An I O error Comms error or Runtime error may have occurred FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes os Error codes can be checked with the programming tool and display module 2 14 6 1 Operation and check by GX Developer 12 2 1 Connect the personal computer and the PLC E 2 Execute the PLC diag
442. rgency stop operation refer to DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built in fuse Provide a fuse suitable to each load to prevent blowout of the wires on the circuit board caused by output element fracture due to load short circuiting 2 represents vacant terminals WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION e Do not wire the vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product 160 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source 2 Transistor output Source OL AC power supply co 100 to 240V Main unit ci transistor output source Breaker Power ON BuutM mamo unc Emergency I I I I I I I I I A o rm O O Jo Buum OO Ses SNOLIBA Output extension block transistor output um Bu supply Y7 i source 1 4 ZA E wn eo 2 32 O 8 EX 233 235 O oe 3 8 c amp A o Input output powered extension unit 1 6 transistor output om5 oxxo ES source QoS 6 00 S 55 3 Power supply for load A N connected PLC output 01 E S 9 u p UE For details on emergency stop 2s operation refer to DESIGN Load 3 PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field 00 1 The output circuit of this PLC does not have a built i
443. ric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO D 5 e o 5 Q D pel e lt o a E D yoojg jeuiuJe 327 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 1 Outline 20 1 Outline A terminal block is used to convert connector type input output terminals into a terminal block Moreover dedicated input and output terminal blocks built in element types can be used to receive AC input signals for conversion to relay transistor triac output types xi xu v MITSUBISHI MELSEC FX36 40M a 160 FXox 16EYT C Optional cable or user fabricated cable Terminal block Hh 328 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 1 Outline 20 1 1 Product configuration oz The connection destinations shown below are products which can be connected by connector lt gt connector E cables An individual wire type can also be used for wiring to the terminal blocks of PLC side input output products Number of Number of A Drive Power Output Connection Destination Input Points Supply Points Model Name Buum mano N FX 16E TB
444. ric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 and 0 25 N m Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem 128 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 1 Before Starting Input Wiring 10 1 Before Starting Input Wiring UONINPOJJU 10 1 1 Sink and source input N The input terminals X of the main unit are common to sink source input of 24V DC internal power FX2N Series input output powered extension units blocks have input terminals common to sink source input or only for sink input SOWeN ed pue sanjea 1 Differences between the sink input circuit and the source input circuit e Sink i
445. roperty rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition Outline Precautions This manual provides information for the use of the FX3G Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices 3 All operators of the comp
446. rpose RUN terminal are used without remote running stopping operation from the programming software 1 3 The RUN STOP status of the PLC is determined by the conditions shown in the following table SS zm ME Condition of general purpose input terminal 53 Condition of built in RUN STOP switch Status of PLC z 9 RUN STOP Use either built in RUN STOP switch or the general input specified as RUN terminal A When specifying the general purpose terminal as the RUN terminal always set the built in RUN STOP 8 switch to STOP a 2 When the remote running stopping operation from the programming software is performed 1 5 For this operation keep both the built in RUN STOP switch and the general purpose input RUN terminal in 293 the STOP position P g O If the stop command is given from the programming software after the PLC is started by either the built in 2 RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal the PLC will be restored to the running status z by giving the RUN command from the programming software This can also be accomplished by setting the built in RUN STOP switch or the general purpose input RUN terminal to STOP and then to RUN 1 3 O O O S syoo g UOISUS X3 mundo j yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 183 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting
447. rs 3 Example of calculation Example1 When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction YOOO and DRVA instruction YOO1 are used Overall frequency 200kHz 2 axes x 40kHz 120kHz Counter No C235 1 phase 1 count input C236 1 phase 1 count input ee a a a C237 1 phase 1 count input C253 2 phase 2 count input Total Example2 lt Contents of use gt SOKHZ is input SOKHZ is input 10kHz is input okHz is input 115kHz lt 120kHz Overall frequency When HSCS HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used and instructions related to positioning DRVI instruction YO000 are used Number of pulse width cycle measurement inputs X003 Overall frequency 200 kHz 1 axes 1 input x 40 kHz 120 kHz Counter No C235 1 phase 1 counting C236 1 phase 1 counting Total 148 Contents of use SOKHZ is input SOKHZ is input 100kHz lt 120kHz Overall frequency FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 11 Use of High speed Counters User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 8 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures 11 8 Related Devices and Function Switching Procedures sjajuno pasds ybiH 11 8 1 Related devices 1 For switching 1 phase 1 count input counter mode to up count or down count 1 phase 1 count input OFF ON Buum mano N 10 Bum OO Ses SNOEN I I gl C245 M824
448. ruction file to the European Directive for Low Voltage 2006 95 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Models MELSEC FX3G series manufactured from November 1st 2008 FX3G x xMT ES Where x x indicates 14 24 40 60 from December 1st 2008 FX3G Xx X MR ES Where xx indicates 14 24 40 60 from March 1st 2009 FX3G A HA MT ESS Where xx indicates 14 24 40 60 Standard Remark EN61131 2 2003 Programmable controllers The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a suitable Equipment requirements and tests enclosure which meets the requirements of EN61131 2 2003 Models MELSEC FX2N series manufactured from July 1st 1997 FX2N x ER ES UL FX2N X ET ESS UL Where x x indicates 32 48 FX2N 16EYR ES UL from August 1st 1998 FX2N 48ER UA1 UL from August 1st 2005 FX2N 8ER ES UL FX2N 8EYR ES UL For the products above PLCs manufactured before March 31st 2002 are compliant with IEC 1010 1 from April 1st 2002 to April 30th 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 1994 A11 1996 A12 2000 after May 1st 2006 are compliant with EN61131 2 2003 Standard Remark IEC1010 1 1990 Safety requirements for electrical The equipment has been assessed as a component for fitting in a A1 1992 equipment for measurement control THP p g suitable enclosure which meets the requirements of IEC 1010 and aporalory Use 1 1990 A1 1992 General requirements EN61131 2 1994 Pr
449. s PLC Error operation code at error occurrence Operation error M8067 D8067 Contents of error Action 6742 Variation of measured value exceeds limit APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV 6743 Deviation exceeds limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV 6744 Integral result exceeds limit lt PID operation is continued gt Outside range from 32768 to 32767 The operation is continued with each parameter set to the 6745 Derivative value exceeds limit due to derivative gain KD maximum or minimum value 6746 Derivative result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 6747 PID operation result exceeds limit Outside range from 32768 to 32767 PID output upper limit set value lt PID output lower limit set e stat is Een mE neon Seow 6748 Por value PID operation is continued Check whether the target setting contents are correct 6749 Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output Alarm output is not given gt PID operation is continued variation alarm set value Set value 0 Check whether the target setting contents are correct Auto tuning is finished gt PID operation is started The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less 6750 Step response method The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1 3 or more of the Improper auto tuning result deviation at start of auto tuning Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again Auto t
450. s 16bits 32 768 to 32 767 Decimal number K 32bits 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 16bits 0 to FFFF Constant Hexadecimal number H 32bits 0 to FFFFFFFF 128 126 126 128 Real number E 32bits 10x27 10 10x2 5 0 10x2 to 1 0x2 Decimal point and exponential notations are possible 1 The current time of the clock is backed up by the capacitor built in the PLC Supply the power to the PLC for 30 minutes or more to completely charge this large capacity capacitor The capacitor works for 10 days atmosphere 25 C The current time can be backed up by the battery when the optional battery is incorporated For details on the battery refer to Chapter 22 C246 to C250 Counting from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 C251 to C255 D1000 to D7999 points Extension file For EEPROM keep register 16 bits 2 These devices can be changed to the keep battery backup type using a parameter when the optional battery is used For the parameter setting method refer to Chapter 22 3 The standard mode is selected when the program capacity is set to 16000 steps or less using a parameter The extension mode is selected when the program capacity is set to 16001 steps or more using a parameter For parameter settings refer to the Programming Manual 4 Supported in Ver 1 10 or later 48 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 4 Specifications External Dimensions and Terminal User s Manual Hardware
451. s The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 18 1 8 FX2N 4AD TC External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWERO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 268 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 9 FX2N 5A oz 3d 0 D 2 External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 4 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches Buum nding N 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX2N 5A a 10 Buum OO Ses SNOLIBA e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws dh I 329 Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Manual supplied with product TE Terminal block M3 screws 33 The extension cable is already connected to the extension block amp 18 1 10 FX2N 2LC 9 res External Dimensions Terminal Layout o 2E es 2 44 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches zl uda POWER C2 syoolg UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole
452. s Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 22 and 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire to the FX Series terminal blocks in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem 152 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User
453. s D8000 to D8511 Appendix A For details refer to the programming manual al This chapter contains an explanation list of the basic instructions and applied List of instructions instructions Appendix B seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A For details refer to the programming manual ues C uoneJn6ijuo SON JUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 19 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction User s Manual Hardware Edition 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 2 Manual organization and position of this manual This manual describes detail on the hardware including the system configuration selection installation and wiring The instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are explained in separate manuals Refer to the manuals as needed ES Manual for each use separate volume Built in functions Refer to the manual for each purpose of use Main unit eSequence instructions eHigh speed counter User s Manual Hardware Edition ePositioning instructions JY997D31301 Model FX3G HW E ePID Details of hardware including input output specifications wiring FX3G installation and maintenance of PLC separate main unit Input output powered extension units blocks manual a F Eeee eee anui gs MEE Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instructions E JY997D1
454. s Manual Hardware Edition 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type 12 1 External Wiring for Relay Output Type Se This section explains relay outputs and external wiring d For the relay output specifications refer to the following gt For the specifications on the main unit refer to Subsection 4 4 1 For the specifications on the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on the input output extension block refer to Chapter 16 12 1 1 Product life of relay contacts Bun 1ndjno For product life of relay contacts refer to Subsection 14 4 3 unc 12 1 2 Handling of relay output 10 Buum OO s sN SNOLIBA 1 Output terminal One common terminal is used for 4 or 8 relay output points The common terminal blocks can drive loads of different circuit voltage systems for example 100V AC and 24V DC dh I EE S29 32 US 2 External power supply 2 5 O Use an external power supply of 30V DC or less or 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not E E comply with CE UL or cUL standards for loads zi 3 Circuit insulation 16 The PLC internal circuit and external load circuits are electrically insulated between the output relay coil and mms contact The common terminal blocks are separated from one another TE os 4 Display of operation amp When power is applied to the output relay coil the LED is lit and the output contact is turned on
455. s on whole system Up to 256 points l Input output Special Expansion board Main unit extension function CC Link LT CC Link master Special adapter unitblock block master CC Link LT Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station 2 Number of remote l O points Up to 128 points CC Link system Remote I O station Remote l O station Remote l O station Remote l O station att Number of connected special extension devices The figure below shows the number of connectable expansion boards special adapters extension power supply units and special function blocks The connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP is required as the expansion board when special adapters are connected gt For details refer to 6 4 Number of Connected Extension Devices Including Extension Cable Special function block Up to 2 units Upto 2 units Up to 2 units Up to 2 units Only 1 unit Up to 8 units Input output Extension Main unit powered power supply 14 24 point type extension unit unit e FX3G Main units 40 60 point type d Special adapter Expansion rales communication board Input output Extension Main unit powered power supply 40 60 point type extension unit unit e FX3G Main units 14 24 point type adapter Special adapter Expansion See communication board Special function block Only 1 unit Only 1 unit Only 1 unit Up to 2 units Only 1 un
456. safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off 2 For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe S machinery operation in such a case al Sas ri Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least aS 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure 6 WIRING PRECAUTIONS D ANGER 2a Rt 9 Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work 7 Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or 53 wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock 3S E P zi 2 v m O ae o 2 S oe O O zel lt 8 o 127 FX3G Series Prog
457. screw Input form sink source Input signal voltage 24V DC 10 Input signal current 5mA 24V DC Input impedance 4 3 KQ Input response Input ON current 3 5mA or more 24V DC time Input OFF current 1 5mA or less Input response time Approx 10ms No voltage contact input Input signal form Sink NPN open collector transistor Source PNP open collector transistor Input circuit insulation Photo coupler insulation Indication of input operation LED on panel lights when input Sink input wiring Source input wiring Input circuit diagram 208 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 3 FX2N 32ER ES UL FX2N 48ER ES UL 11 3 Output specifications relay output type OF gt d Connection type Removable terminal block M3 screw Output unit Relay 1 2 External power supply Ad ue eos O 240V AC or less 250V AC or less when the unit does not comply with CE UL or cUL standards Output circuit insulation Mechanical insulation Indication of output operation Supplying power to the relay coil will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 2 2A point The total load current per common terminal taa The total load current per common terminal should be the following value 4 3 should be the following value e 4 output points common terminal 8A or less Max load 4 output points common terminal 8A or less 8 output points common terminal 8A or less lt s 80
458. sence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to peripheral device connectors Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS q DANGER Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the p
459. sette PLC 288 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 19 6 Monitor Test Mode OF 19 6 1 Relevant devices Monitoring and testing can be performed from the Monitor Test menu for the devices listed below 1 2 Monitoring testing is not possible for the file register D and the index register V Z O v Possible A Possible under certain conditions B LI Not possible Item not supported by this device Current Device Operation Current Setting Forced Setting umm RET T ur Em xm mm 13 input X IE qoc oc boc boc jc 7 7 E ud De oo pc 17 AY gt dd Timer T i i i P N A da 0D 9 0 Q i mM US 2 30 1 A forced ON or OFF is executed for only one operation cycle and therefore has a considerable effect 38 on the SET RST and self retaining circuits when the PLC is running 2 Moreover a forced ON OFF result is retained for devices Y M S which are not being driven by an OUT instruction etc in the program 16 2 Setting values of timer and counter can be changed when the PLC status is as shown below oms MS Program Memory Type RUN STOP Status Setting Change Enabled Disabled BAO Suc RUN Enabled 8 Internal EEPROM 5s STOP Enabled RUN Disabled PROTECT switch ON STOP Disabled Memory cassette RUN N Enabled JaN PROTECT switch OFF E STOP Enabled m eg 3 The C200 to C255 32 bi
460. sign is correct an operation e S 6709 Other e g improper branching error may still occur S aS For example S T500Z itself is not an error But if Z had a value of 100 the o timer T600 would attempt to be accessed This would cause an operation error since there is no T600 device available 1 6 This error occurs when the same device is used within the om5 6710 Mismatch among parameters m ins O Xo source and destination in a shift instruction etc QOS wn 6730 Incorrect sampling time TS TS lt 0 E Incompatible input filter constant a es a lt 0 or 100 lt a T pls PID instruction is stopped 6733 Incompatible proportional gain KP KP 0 This error occurs in the parameter setting value or operation 1 7 6734 Incompatible integral time TI TI lt 0 data executing PID instruction E r Check the contents of the parameters c pu 6735 Incompatible derivative gain KD e KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD E 6736 Incompatible derivative time TD TD lt 0 3 lt Auto tuning is continued gt Mi 6740 Sampling time TS lt Scan time The operation is continued in the condition sampling time 00 TS cyclic time scan time suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 197 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Code
461. sion boards Analog special adapters Up to 2 input output powered extension units can be connected in one system 6 4 3 Extension Power Supply Unit Only one extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit 6 4 4 Special function blocks Up to 8 special function units blocks can be connected in one system When connecting the following products take into consideration the combination number of units blocks and connecting order Type Limitations FX3U 64CCL Only one FX3U 64CCL unit can be connected to a single PLC main unit FX2N 16CCL M When some units are used a remote l O station cannot be connected to the second and following master stations When any of these products is connected to a FX2N Series input output powered extension unit the current consumption is restricted The total current consumption of FX2N 2AD and FX2N 2DA must be the following value or less FX2N 32EbLI 190mA or less FX2N 48EQ 300mA or less FX2N 2AD FX2N 2DA 6 4 5 Extension cable One extension cable can be used in a system The FX2N CNV BC is required when the extension block is connected e FXoN 65EC 650mm 25 59 e FXoN 30EC 300mm 11 81 69 UONnOnpoJjU N SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneooods I al UU D CD Cx cn oO to zs o v pue uoISJ9A wajs s uonenByuos N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO
462. so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet from the PLC s ventilation port when installation work is completed 4 Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors s Loose connections may cause malfunctions 8 Connect the memory cassette and expansion board board securely to their designated connectors o o Loose connections may cause malfunctions Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion boards and special adapters al Extension units blocks and the FX Series terminal block 5 D S Battery and memory cassette sos no DS a WIRING PRECAUTIONS Q DANGER 6 32 Connect the AC power supply to the dedicated terminals specified in this manual m If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product Make sure to attach the terminal cover offered as an accessory before turning on the power or initiating operation after installation or wiring wor
463. sponsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design
464. steps Present scan time from O step D 8000 a from system ROM at power time 2 in units of 0 1ms Watchdog timer D 8011 a Value overwritten by program is Mnm niscai Minimum value of scan time valid after END or WDT instruction uu in units of 0 1ms i execution time Ee Maximum value of scan time PAP BCD converted Maximum scan a D 8001 2 6 1 0 0 value NU in units of 0 1ms PLC type and unes D8101 time System version Version 1 00 D 8013 0 to 59 seconds FX3G Series Second data for real time clock i e 2 2K steps D 8014 O to 59 minutes i e 4 4K steps Minute data for real time clock D 8002 e 8 8K steps M8002 D 8015 O to 23 hours Memory capacity e f 16K steps or more D8102 Hour data for real time clock K8 is written to D8002 and 16 or 32 is written to D8102 D 8016 1 to 31 days Day data for real time clock Stores the memory type built in D 8003 EEPROM or memory cassette and DOTT 10 12 montas Memory type the PROTECT switch ON OFF Month data for real time clock status of the memory cassette D 9018 2 digits of year data 0 to 99 Year data for real time clock felole BCD converted D 8019 ES A D 8004 value e Dav ofthew bk a stp en urday Error number M data 8060 to 8068 when M8004 is ON 2 Indicated value includes waiting time of constant scan operation when M8039 is activated ajo Input Filter D 8005 BCD converted value Battery voltage in units of 0 1V Moda D
465. structions in Ascending Order of FNC Number FNC No Function External FX Device 80 Serial Communication 81 Parallel Run Octal Mode 82 Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion 83 HEX ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion 84 Check Code 85 Volume read 86 Volume scale 87 RS2 Serial Communication 2 88 PD PID Control Loop A Floating Point 110 Floating Point Compare 112 Floating Point Move 113 to EN 119 120 Floating Point Addition 121 Floating Point Subtraction 122 Floating Point Multiplication 123 Floating Point Division 127 Floating Point Square Root 129 INT Floating Point to Integer Conversion Positioning Control 150 DOG Search Zero Return 152 TBL Batch Data Positioning Mode 155 ABS Absolute Current Value Read 156 ZRN Zero Return 157 Variable Speed Pulse Output 158 Drive to Increment 159 Drive to Absolute Real Time Clock Control 160 RTC Data Compare 161 RTC Data Zone Compare 162 RTC Data Addition 163 RTC Data Subtraction 166 Read RTC data 167 Set RTC data 169 Hour Meter 384 FNC No Mnemonic Function External Device 170 GRY Decimal to Gray Code Conversion 171 Gray Code to Decimal Conversion 176 Read from Dedicated Analog Block 177 Write to Dedicated Analog Block Data Comparison 220 to 223 224 LD Load Compare S1 S2 225 LD gt Load Compare S1 gt S2 226 LD lt Load Compare S1 lt S2 227 228 LD lt gt Load Compare S1 S2 229 LD lt Load Compare S1
466. suoneooods I al wasis CO uoneinByuoy jndingandu Jl SON HUN SON 5 n ye 2 D z O j FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures 9 2 Cable Connecting Procedures For cable connection a terminal block or a connector is used The cable connecting procedures are explained below 9 2 1 input output terminal block power supply and input output wiring For the main unit FX2N Series input output powered extension units blocks and FX2N FX3U Series special function blocks an M3 or M3 5 screw terminal block is used 1 Applicable products Product type Model name Main unit All models of FX3G Series main units Input output powered extension unit All models of FX2N Series input output powered extension units All models of FX2N Series input output extension blocks pot eUtpUbe tension poe except FX2N 16EX C FX2N 16EXL C and FX2N 16EYT C Extension power supply unit FX3U 1PSU 5V Special function block Refer to the manual for each special function block FX Series terminal block All models Power supply unit FX2N 20PSU 2 Terminal block screw size The size of the terminal screws for each product is shown below For the solderless terminals refer to the following page Main unit FX3U Series special function block FX2N Series input output powered extension units M3 FX2N Series input output exte
467. sure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 2 Connecting method A connection of expansion board o This subsection explains how to connect the expansion board to the main unit z The FX3G 40MT ES is used as the main unit in this example j Remove the top cover A in the right 2 figure from the front face of the main 3g unit Top cover S Sg 30 22 og 2 gS Attach the provided side cover B in the right 2 figure as shown in the right figure 3 Caution 5 Attachment of the side cover is not necessary when 99 connecting the expansion board only under the top cover S 83S of a 40 60 point type main unit 25 FX3G 8AV BD cannot attach in the top cover S side of a main unit 6 29 Connect the expansion board to the option 38 connector C in the right figure S 3 PE se 22 Fix the expansion board E in the right figure with provided M3 tapping screws D in the right figure to the main unit Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem uonejeisu Bui jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p 107 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 6 Connecting Methods for Main Unit and Extension Devices 8 6 3 Connecting method A connection of connector conversion adapter 1 This paragraph explains how to connect the connector conversion adapter to the main unit
468. t pene D 8384 o ae data DJ8385 RS n result DJ8386 is la result ois D 6389 Ring Counter D 8398 Up operation ring counter of 0 to 2 147 483 647 D 8399 in units of 1ms 32 bit 2 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 sis Communication format setting DEN D18402 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D Remaining points of transmit data D18403 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 D Monitoring receive data points pisaa D 8405 Communication parameter display ch1 D 8406 D 8407 Not used D 8408 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 ie Time out time setting RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Bene Header 1 and 2 lt Default STX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch1 ee Header 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Bisel Terminator 1 and 2 lt Default ETX gt RS2 FNC 87 ch1 pedis Terminator 3 and 4 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Pi Receive sum received data RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Pere Receive sum calculated result D 8416 RS2 FNC 87 ch1 Send sum per s gas D 8419 Operation mode display ch 1 ms Cleared when PLC switches from RUN to STOP Corres ponding special device M8398 M8402 M8403 2 ms ring counter D8399 D8398 will operate after M8398 turns ON FX3G User s Series Programmable Controllers Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A Special Device List Appendix A 2 Special Data Register D8000 to D8511 Correspond Number and i Content of register ing special name device RS2 FNC 87 ch2 and Computer Link ch2 D 84
469. t auo romagna du quos tus Los eaa et ota aeta kac x haeo ndehn e esed 166 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN Instructions FNC19 167 13 2 1 When DSW Instructions are Used dd 167 13 2 2 When BIN instructions are used sssssssssssseseeeeenenene nennen nennen nnne nnne 170 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 952 4 ii d osa a eh aet eet ec ee unes 171 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions FNC74 BCD Instructions FNC18 174 13 4 1 When SEGL instructions are used ccccccccseseeecceeseeeeceeeseeceseusceesceuseeecseauseeeseuseeessuanseeesaees 174 13 4 2 When BCD instructions are used ssesssesssssssesee eene nnne nnne nnn nnne nns 176 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 178 14 1 Preparation tor Test Operation sionis o eta etaed ad eed asusta ees 179 14 1 1 Preliminary inspection power OFF occcccoccncccccnnccccnncccnnnccnncnnnnonononononononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnns 179 14 1 2 Connection to built in programming connector RS 422 0ocooooocccnccccncccnccnoncnnnonononnnonancnnnonancnnnos 179 14 1 3 Connection to built in programming connector USB ooocccncccocccnccconccnnononocnnonnoncnnonnncnnncnnononos 180 14 1 4 Writing of program and program check power ON and PLC stopped 181 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON occcccccnccoccnncccc
470. t condition Good condition Not allowed 3 SY Extension devices of PLC except expansion board and special adapter SB S adapter C 4 Y L Independent grounding S Class D grounding e grounding resistance 1000 or less gt Use ground wires thicker than AWG14 2 mm Position the grounding point as close to the PLC as possible to decrease the length of the ground wire al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A ues C uoneJn6ijuo jndingandu Jl SON HUN SON 5 n ye 2 D z o gt 121 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring User s Manual Hardware Edition 9 4 Examples of External Wiring 94 Examples of External Wiring 9 4 1 Example of input output wiring with 24V DC service power supply 24V DC service power supply of the main unit can be used as a power supply for loads AC power supply of 100 to 240V AA Breaker Power ON P MC x a In the case of sink input wiring MC i 7 Emergency NER i stop Main unit 1 ES X grounding P MC MC ANTES I Power supply for loads Li bavt21 24V connected to sequencer Ma oe output terminals AN V 1 A ET As for the details of i emergency stop see AO X1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS at Safety Precautions field I i m PES pe In the case of source input wiring Input i impedance 1 1 Connect the AC power supply to the
471. t figure onto the DIN rail Push the product against the DIN rail e Keep a gap of 1 to 2 mm 0 04 to 0 08 between the products Connect the extension cable For the procedures on connecting the extension cable refer to Subsection 8 6 5 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 4 4 Removal of main unit zi Open the terminal block cover and remove the lower terminal block cover A in the right figure MITSUBISHI VESE SH Um Gradually loosen the left and right terminal block ag mounting screws B in the right figure and 3 remove the terminal blocks eo For anchoring of the terminal block refer to Subsection 9 1 2 zm Disconnect the extension cables and the con ge necting cables including expansion board and S special adapters Insert the tip of a flathead screwdriver into the 4 hole of the DIN rail mounting hook C in the right El figure 3 This step also applies for the DIN rail mounting hooks of the special adapters Move the flathead screwdriver as shown in the o right figure to draw out the DIN rail mounting FE hooks of all devices S5 Remove the product from the DIN rail D in the 6 right figure om Push in the DIN rail mounting hooks E in the ES right figure
472. t mm inches POWERO 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch 4 0 16 55 2 17 87 3 43 e MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 18 1 4 FX3U 4DA External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWERCO 90 3 55 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch FX3U 4DA 4 0 16 9 0 36 55 2 17 87 3 43 e MASS Weight 0 2kg 0 44lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws Accessories Label for indication of special unit block number Dust Proof sheet Manual supplied with product Terminal block M3 screws The extension cable is already connected to the extension block 266 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 18 Other Extension Devices and Optional Units External Dimensions and User s Manual Hardware Edition 18 1 Special Function Units Blocks 18 1 5 FX2N 4AD Oz 3d 0 D 2 External Dimensions Terminal Layout 2 04 5 mounting holes Unit mm inches POWERO Buum ndno IN 80 3 15 mounting hole pitch a 10 buum OO Ses SNOLIBA e MASS Weight 0 3kg 0 66lbs e Installation DIN rail of 35mm 1 38 in width or screws dh I 329 Accessor
473. t terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will burn out Do not wire vacant terminals externally 2 Doing so may damage the product When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions 1 3 Make sure to properly wire the FX2N FX3U Series extension equipment in accordance with the following precautions lt s Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product a The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual oo Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem q S o bh I S9UEUSJ UIe N uny 1S9 O c D 62 p o o gt gt Q peJewog jndinogindu sun uoisuejx3 s syoojg UOISU9 X3 indinoandu C mundo j yu jddns Jamog UOISU9 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 203 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units User s Manual Hardware Edition 15 1 Outline 15 1 Outline An input output powered extension unit is used to expand inputs outputs Power can be supplied to subsequent extension blocks from an input output powered extension unit with a built in 24V DC power supply An input output powered extension unit is required when the capacity of th
474. t up down counters and the high speed counters have counting directions 4 Extended file registers stored in the EEPROM in the main unit or extended file registers stored in the EEPROM inside the memory cassette when the memory cassette is attached 00 suondo pue syun UOISUS X3 J9SYIO Q 77 pel D lt O o c D 2 yoojg jeuuue CO 289 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 6 Monitor Test Mode 19 6 2 Monitor mode operation This section explains the procedure for monitoring the input X output Y auxiliary relay M state S timer T counter C data registers D DD extended registers R DR and the extended file registers ER DER The file register D and the index registers V Z cannot be monitored Refer to Subsection 19 6 3 for a monitor screen display example Refer to Section 19 14 for specified device monitor operation procedures Refer to Section 19 18 for the procedure used to display the timer counter and data register current values as hexadecimal values 1 At the menu screen use the and buttons to move the cursor to the Monitor Test item then press OK to display the device lt 16 bit E selection screen shown at right To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time dai eed display press ESC at the menu screen T 2 Use the and buttons to mov
475. t used Not used M 8273 Not used Not used M 8274 Not used Output hold mode M 8275 Not used Not used M 8276 Not used Not used M 8277 Not used Not used M 8278 Not used Not used M 8279 Not used Not used FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 3 Analog expansion boards M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279 Appendix A 3 2 Special data registers D8260 to D8279 Oz 23 os Operation and function Number Versions 1st analog expansion board D 8260 Input data Ch1 Output data D 8261 Input data Ch2 Not used D 8262 Not used Not used D 8263 Not used Not used 22 5 a D 8264 o s E Not used 2g NUT zu D 8265 usu n DEDE Not used E o D 8266 Not used Sy D 8267 Not used D 8268 Error status B D 8269 Model code 4 2nd analog expansion board S D 8270 Output data 3 D 8271 Not used 2 D 8272 Not used D 8273 Not used D 8274 Pra Ma Dore Not used pags Averaging tmeforCh2 Not usea D 8276 Not used D 8277 Not used D 8278 Error status D 8279 Model code 4 377 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 Appendix A 4 Analog special adapters M8280 to M8299 and D8280 to D8299 When analog special adapters are connected operations and functions are assigned to the devices shown in the tables below in accordance wit
476. tacts at shutdown which may cause arcing At a fixed current consumption as the power factor phase between current and voltage gets smaller the arc energy gets larger The standard life of contacts used for Inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid valves is 500 000 operations at 35VA The following table shows the approximate life of a relay based on the results of an operation life test Test condition 1 sec ON 1 sec OFF Load Capacity Contact Life 0 35A 100V AC 35VA 3 000 000 times 0 17A 200V AC 0 8A 100V AC l 80VA 1 000 000 times 0 4A 200V AC 1 2A 100V AC 120VA 200 000 times 0 6A 200V AC The product life of relay contacts becomes considerably shorter than the above conditions when the rush overcurrent is shut down For precautions on using inductive loads refer to Subsection 20 7 4 2 Some types of inductive loads generate rush current 5 to 15 times the stationary current at activation Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 2 Lamp load Lamp loads generally generate rush current 10 to 15 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the maximum specified resistance load 3 Capacitive load Capacitive loads can generate rush current 20 to 40 times the stationary current Make sure that the rush current does not exceed the current corresponding to the max
477. ter OFF ER 16 bit 32 bit 19 18 2 Program example 1 specifying a hexadecimal data display format The following program example specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values and setting values which display at the Monitor Test screen In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 D8300 1 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse SS mov eo osse MOV System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 M8000 Specifies a hexadecimal display format for current values which appear at the Monitor Test screen RUN monitor 19 18 3 Program example 2 specifying a decadal data display format The following program example specifies a decimal display format for current values and setting values which appear at the Monitor Test screen In this program example system information is assigned from D50 to D54 and from M50 to M64 MOV M8002 System information system No 1 is set at D50 to D54 Initial pulse System information system No 2 is set at M50 to M64 M8000 Specifies a decimal display format for current values which appear at the Monitor Test screen RUN monitor 322 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions 19 19 Operation Error Messages and Corrective Actions oF F
478. tery Refer to the window below FX parameter Memory capacity PLC name 1 0 assignment PLC system 1 PLC system 2 Positioning Battery mode Put a check mark to the TT check box Use Battery MODEM initialized None RUN terminal input None 360 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 22 Battery User s Manual Hardware Edition 22 4 Battery Handling 22 4 Battery Handling 9jlesse2 NO JOUJOJN When the battery voltage is low a ALM LED lights red while the power is ON and M8005 and M8006 are switches ON Although the battery will continue to function for approximately 1 month after the BATT LED switches ON a replacement battery should be ordered and installed as soon as possible 22 4 1 Battery life and replacement guidelines FX3U 32BL battery life Approx 5 years ambient temperature 25 C 77 F Guarantee period 1 year after delivery or 18 months after production Battery life vs temperature The life of the battery changes with respect to ambient temperature When planning for battery replacement please estimate the battery life according to the graph to the right and order the replacement batteries in advance co c o e g Co o ce e CD O D Di ar U D O D o z o a Q o 2 E o Lon Bttery Life years O gt N O A O1 ON O 10 20 30 40 50
479. that is PLC output J contact suitable for the load being used Refer to the table Surge oo absorber 1 6 below for other specifications Guide S uS S26 Static electricity capacity Approx 0 1uF En 2 0 Forward current Approx 100 to 2000 E Reference 1 7 Manufacturer Model name Manufacturer Model name CC Um Okaya Electric Industries Co Ltd CR 10201 Rubycon Corporation 250MCRA104100M B0325 222 23 O 3 Interlock z For loads such as forward reverse contactors etc where ara ES a hazardous condition could result if switched ON Interlock limit 00 simultaneously an external interlock should be provided Forward for interlocking the PLC s internal programs as shown to trote ak 952 the right Reverse 998 PLC output Reverse Ton contact limit E 4 In phase 19 PLC output contacts should be used in an in phase o manner l j Ej D Bad O D Good i yoojg euw 341 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 20 Terminal Block User s Manual Hardware Edition 20 7 FX 16EYR TB 20 7 5 Product life of relay contacts The product life of relay contacts varies considerably depending on the load type used Take care that loads generating reverse electromotive force or rush current may cause poor contact or deposition of contacts which may lead to considerable reduction of the contact product life 1 Inductive load Inductive loads generate large reverse electromotive force between con
480. the buttons to move the cursor to the ClockMenu item then press OK to display the selection screen shown at right To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display press ESC Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Clock setting item To cancel the operation and return to the menu screen press ESC Press the OK button to display the Clock setting screen To cancel the operation and return to the selection screen press ESC Use the buttons to change the blinking data as desired then press OK to register the change Settings are performed in the following sequence Year gt Month gt Day gt Hours gt Minutes gt Seconds After pressing OK to register the final seconds setting a Current time is set message is displayed completing the current time setting procedure Button Operation Description Returns to the previous setting item ESC Returns to the selection screen when at the Year item Year is blinking position Reduces the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed reduction Increases the value Hold for 1 second or longer for high speed increase Proceeds to the next setting item OK Current time is set message displays if pressed at the Seconds item Seconds is blinking Press OK or ESC to return to the selection screen Press ESC to return to the menu screen aM EOD LUE p E Log od ety
481. the input output powered extension unit is indicated When an input terminal X0 X1 etc is turned on the corresponding LED lamps are also turned on The input numbers change depending on input output allocation The input output powered extension unit 48 points type assigns input numbers in ascending order from A gt B gt C below A100000000 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 ke uH ke e e e e e e o o u u u u u u u u U U U M The covers can be opened about 90 for wiring Keep the covers closed while the PLC is running the unit power is on Connect the extension cable of input output powered extension unit block or special function unit block to the extension device connecting connector under this cover FX3U Series extension devices FX2N Series extension devices are compatible and can be connected gt For details on extension devices refer to Chapter 15 Chapter 16 and Section 18 1 The LED lamp is on green while the power supply terminal is on When an output terminal YO Y1 etc is turned on the corresponding LED lamps are also turned on The output numbers change depending on input output allocation The input output powered extension unit 48 points type assigns output numbers in ascending order from A gt B gt C below A100000000 101234567 ke e e e e e e e O u u u u u u u u U u U M ke e M ke e e e e e e o o u u u u u u u u U u M M FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 15 Input Output Powered Extension Units Us
482. the menu screen cancels the ErrorCheck operation and returns the screen to the top screen time No errors display 3 If some errors have occurred the pages can be switched with the or button Button Operation Description When 1 error has occurred The screen returns to the Menu screen ErrorCheck ESC Ineffective operation less 2 errors The previous page of the error display screen is or more displayed 1 error or Ineffecti ee less este When multiple errors have occurred T 2errors The following page of the error display screen is 3 or more displayed 11 2 1 2 OK The screen returns to the Menu screen Displayed data Display Content 1 Flag of occurred error 2 Error code 13 1 2 3 Number of simultaneously occurring errors displayed only when more than one error has occurred 4 Pressing the ESC button cancels the operation and returns the screen to the Menu screen 192 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes 14 6 3 Representation of errors QI T Errors are represented in this manual GX Developer as shown in the following table BS a GX Developer This manual English version Japanese version I O configuration error I O config err I O 5 15 1 2 PLC hardware error PLC H W error PC v W FOr PLI e
483. tion as these actions could destroy the program causing incorrect operation of the PLC 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the memory cassette transfer screen FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers e Result and measures to take oF The transfer is not executed if a PLC is running message 2 appears 8 In this case set the PLC to the STOP state then perform step 3 PLC is running described above O The transfer is not executed if a Transfer failed message El appears Cassette PLC In this case turn the power off check the memory cassette connection then attempt the operation again from the first step Transfer 13 failed lt The transfer is not executed if a Memory Cassette is write 23 protected message displays g In this case turn the power OFF set the memory cassette Memory Cassette PROTECT switch to OFF then attempt the operation again from the first step Is 14 write protected a A Transfer completed message appears when the transfer is Sg completed Cassette PLC E When this message appears press OK or ESC to display the 3 Cassette screen Transfer 15 completed moz 5 Press ESC to display the menu screen 28 S ME 19 12 2 Transfer from memory cassette to internal EEPROM Cassette gt PLC 1 Atthe menu screen use the buttons to move the c
484. tions before using al DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION teer Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling and disposal of 178 your device o TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION ees When transporting the FX3G Series PLC incorporating the optional battery turn on the PLC before shipment confirm that the battery mode is set using a parameter and the ALM LED is OFF and check the battery life If the PLC is transported with the ALM LED on or the battery exhausted the battery backed data may be unstable 178 during transportation 359 The PLC is a precision instrument During transportation avoid impacts larger than those specified in the general specifications Section 4 1 Failure to do so may cause failures in the PLC After transportation verify the operations of the PLC FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 2009 Foreword This manual contains text diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation safe use and operation of the FX3G Series Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit And store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial p
485. top cover When the expansion board connector conversion adaptor or memory cassette was removed in the step 2 attach it again Cation 1 After replacing the battery check whether the backup target devices keep devices and clock data are backed up correctly confirm safety and then run the PLC 2 If the backup target devices keep devices are not backed up correctly clear them and set their initial values and clock data again if necessary gt For the clear method of keeping devices refer to the programming manual 22 6 Battery Related Precautions 362 The FX3G series uses a different battery type than those used for the FX2N F2 40BL and FX2NC FX2NC 32BL series e Not for use with the FX3G series Make sure to select the battery mode using a parameter when using the battery FX3G Series Programmable Controllers Appendix A Special Device List User s Manual Hardware Edition Appendix A 1 Special Auxiliary Relay M8000 to M8511 9jlesse2 NO Alowa mm Appendix A Special Device List The device numbers and functions of the special auxiliary relays indicated as special M in tables and special data registers indicated as special D in tables are shown below Note that functions of certain devices vary depending on the series of the PLC Do not use the undefined blank special auxiliary relays and special data registers in the sequence program since they are occupied by the CPU In addit
486. tput Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source Type This section explains the procedures for handling transistor output and external wiring For the transistor output specifications refer to the following For the specifications on the main unit refer to Subsection 4 4 2 For the specifications on the input output powered extension unit refer to Chapter 15 For the specifications on the input output extension block refer to Chapter 16 12 2 4 Transistor Output Sink and Source FX3G Series main units FX2N Series input output extension units blocks of transistor sink output type and of transistor source output type are available 1 Differences in circuit e Sink output common Output to make load current flow into the output Y terminal is called sink output e Source output common Output to make load current flow out of the output Y terminal is called source output 156 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 12 Output Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 12 2 External Wiring of Transistor Output Sink Source 12 2 2 Handling of transistor output oz n D 1 Output terminals 2 One 4 or 8 transistor output points are covered by one common terminal Sink output Load current flows into the output Y terminals Connect each COMU number terminal to th
487. tput extension block Since the power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to prepare another power supply unit for each input output extension block 1 2 e 16 1 1 Product configuration There are various types of input output extension blocks Select optimum blocks considering the input type a output type and connection unit of your system Input output extension blocks 1 3 53 Power supply Number of points Input type Output type a ee D Power supply to 008 24V DC Terminal block inside of PLC Sink source 24V DC bh I Hs Source Se 5V DC B35 Transistor 88 100V AC system Sink a 16 1 2 Product list mus Oo ozc 2 30 SEE 1 For input output extension c E Sink common Source common Connection type Model Tone Number Common Tse Number Common yP of points system yP of points system Common to both sink and source inputs a DO ay CM NN Dedicated to sink input only syoo g UOISUS x3 mdinomdu Terminal block N FX2N 8ER 24AVDC 4 8 Sink Relay 4 8 WA Terminal block Sox 1 Fourinputs and four outputs are occupied as unused numbers o To mo LI c 2 For input extension 3 lt Sink common Source common 00 IE AS WS A eee Model A Number Common Number Common type yp of points system yp of points system Common to both sink and source inputs Dedicated to sink input only 100V AC input
488. tput extension units blocks for FX2N cables N 0 3m and special function blocks away from the main unit Connector conversion FX2N CNV BC Connector conversion adapter to connect input output extension blocks for FX2N and special function blocks with model FXON 30 65EC extension cable adapter This battery backs up the following data General devices Parameter setting is required M1536 to M7679 Battery FX3U 32BL 1000 to 4095 D1100 to D7999 RO to R23999 Time on clock Memory FX3G EEPROM 32L 32k step EEPROM memory with transfer switch cassettes 1 When the extension cable FXON 30EC or FXON 65EC is used use up to one cable for one system When an extension block is added use FX2N CNV BC in addition to the cable 37 muda uononpou N U TI a D Ze Zz DD 30 D v nD a jonpoud uononpoJu suoneooods I al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A ues C uoneJn6ijuo N SON HUN SON jndinondu uonejesu OO BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 11 FX Series terminal blocks cables and connectors 1 FX Series terminal blocks Number of Number of Model name Function input points output points 32 input points To be directly connected to the PLC input output connect
489. tput operation Resistance load Max load Inductive load Open circuit leakage current Min load OFF ON Response time Output circuit configuration ON OFF 1 Power supply specifications Refer to Chapter 12 for output wiring FX2N 8EYT H FX2N extension block 24V DC supplied from main unit and input output powered extension unit 2 Weight and Other specifications External dimensions are described later FX2N 8EYT H 0 2kg 0 44lbs The extension cable is already connected to the extension block Accessories Label for indication of input output number The DIN46277 rail width 35 mm 1 38 or direct installation 3 Output specifications Transistor output type FX2N 8EYT H 8 points Vertical terminal block M3 screws Transistor sink output 5 to 30V DC Photo coupler insulation Activation of the photo coupler will light the LED indicator lamp on panel 1A point The total load current per common should be as follows 4 output points common 2A or less 24W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value 4 output point common terminal 48W or less 24V DC 0 1mA 30V DC 0 2ms or less 1A 0 4ms or less 1A supply unit FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 16 Input Output Extension Blocks 16 12 FX2N 8EYT H Transistor Output 16 12 2 Parts identification and terminal arrangement With cover Without cover
490. tput points 128 points or less in total 256 points or less in total 68 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 6 Examination of System Configuration User s Manual Hardware Edition 6 4 Number of Connected Extension Devices Including Extension Cable 6 4 Number of Connected Extension Devices Including Extension Cable 6 4 1 Number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters The number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters varies depending on the number of points in the main unit The connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP is required to connect the special adapter gt For assignment of communication channels refer to Section 7 3 n the case of Main units 40 60 point type Number of connectable special adapters of each type Use of expansion board Communication Analog special adapters special adapters er Communication expansion board 2 units When expansion board is used Analog expansion board 1 unit Cannot be connected Cannot be connected 1 FX3G 8AV BD included 2 Only one FX3G 8AV BD can be connected to a single PLC main unit Number of connectable Inthe case of Main units 14 24 point type Number of connectable special adapters of each type Number of connectable Use of expansion board Communication special adapters When expansion board is used Cannot be connected Cannot be connected 6 4 2 Input output powered extension units expan
491. tputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit uda 490 UOISU9 X3 jd noandu C Digital 10 10 al adi HRIH ii BCD com IN VY N NW V Y WV V V Y N W V NV WV NW 2225 Ad AAA LE UU US EU p iode i o necessary EE THEE 18 e First input group Input output powered extension unit Transistor output source FX2N 32E T ESS UL FX2N 48ET ESS UL suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 169 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 2 Digital Switch DSW Instructions FNC72 BIN User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 2 2 When BIN instructions are used Examples of wiring for capturing values from a 2 digit digital switch to the data register D102 are given below Example of program M8000 K2X010 D102 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source in the used main unit or input output powered extension unit Main unit Input output powered extension unit 2 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only in the used input output powered extension unit Input output powered extension unit 3 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source in the used main unit or input output powered extension unit sis OV 24V ROTO ROT Xo 12x01 xo1a XO t5 XO 16DX017 Main unit In
492. transister output source type FX3G 14MT ESS FX3G 24MT ESS FX3G 40MT ESS FX3G 60MT ESS 387 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Editionl Revised History MEMO 388 USER S MANUAL Hardware Edition FX3G SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN MODEL CODE 09R521 JY997D31301C Effective March 2009 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
493. trol in combination with the main unit functions and many extension devices expansion board special adapters and special function blocks The detailed explanation of the sequence instructions communication control analog control and positioning control are given in separate manuals For information on manual organization refer to Subsection 1 1 2 1 1 Introduction of Manuals 1 1 1 Classification of major components in this manual 1 Main unit Chapter 1 to Chapter 14 This chapter contains explanations of the procedures for obtaining the manuals NA Chapter 1 and the abbreviations Featuiresand par names This chapter contains explanations of the product features and the names and Chapter 2 functions of the parts intraductidmoforoduet This chapter contains explanations of the structures for model names extension Chapter 3 products Specifications This chapter contains explanations of the specifications for power supply and Chapter 4 input output external dimensions and terminal block layout VU A This chapter contains explanation for upgrading of FX3G PLCs and information for Chapter 5 the application of programming tools Procedure for determining whether or not a system configuration is possible Introduction of manuals SyS em comi guration Extension device current consumption and configuration examples FORDISEO Input output No and unit No Input output assignment procedure for input output powered extension units
494. trollers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 4 Seven Segment with Latch SEGL Instructions 2 Input output powered extension unit Oz Example of program e M8000 D100 K2Y020 1 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When inputs are used for sink only and outputs are the transistor sink type in the used input output powered extension unit O O S 7 segment display to be used for sink wiring in the case of transistor output Input output powered extension unit E FX2N 32ET a Transistor output sink PJ Ja Je bh I 1 2 eoueua ure N uny 1S9 Bunoouse qnoy peJeMod jndnoandu Q1 2 In the case of source wiring When inputs are used for both sink and source and outputs are the transistor source type in the used extension unit sun uoisuejx3 s 7 segment display to be used for source wiring in the case of transistor output 90 UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C Input output powered extension unit l FX2N 32ET ESS UL PLC 7 segment display FX2N 48ET ESS UL Transistor output source _ N Y020 YO21 Y022 Y023 YO24 YO25 YO26 YO27 cum 1 Je EE og Jo O lt 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aedsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO 177 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardw
495. type only for sink input 8 connect the device to the COM terminal 5 a i El ae o 2 S oe O O zel lt 8 o 131 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 Input Wiring Procedures 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 132 RbS 15 R Bleeder resistance PLC sink input 1 In the case of a type only for sink input connect the device to the COM terminal In the case of 2 wire proximity switch 3 In the case of input device with built in parallel resistance Use a device having a parallel resistance Rp of 15kQ or more If the resistance is less than 15kQ connect a bleeder resistance Rb obtained by the following formula as shown in the following figure ARP co p Bleeder resistance 15kQ or more Use a two wire proximity switch whose leakage current Z is 1 5 mA or less when the switch is off When the current is 1 5mA or more connect a bleeder resistance Rb determined by the following formula as shown in the following figure 6 ROS kQ Bleeder resistance 2 wire Rb proximity Sensor PLC sink input 1 In the case of a type only for sink input connect the device to the COM terminal Bleeder resistance FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 10 2 3 Exam
496. uDi e Buum mano N a 10 Buum OO S E o 77 e o D 9 uny sa S9UBUAJUIE N Bunoouse qnoi pejewog adnoandu OQ sun uoisuejx3 s syoo g UOISU9 X3 dnoandu C N yu jddns Jamog UOISU3 X3 00 suondo pue syun 1X3 JeuiO ampoyy Aejdsiq QO uoisue 2 yoojg euw CO FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting 14 5 Troubleshooting with LEDs 14 5 3 ERR LED on flashing off State of LED State of PLC 1 On A watchdog timer error may have occurred or the hardware of the PLC may be damaged 2 3 One of the following errors has occurred in the PLC Flashing e Parameter error e Syntax error Ladder error Off No errors that stop the PLC have occurred 190 Remedies Stop the PLC and re apply power If ERR LED goes off a watchdog timer error may have occurred Take any of the following measures Review the program The maximum value D8012 of the scan time should not exceed the setting D8000 of the watchdog timer Check that the input used for input interruption or pulse catch is not being abnormally turned on and off in one scan Check that the frequency of the pulse duty of 5096 input to the high speed counter does not exceed the specified range Add the WDT instructions Add some WDT instructions to the program and
497. ulse catch speed detection SPD instructions and general purpose input Take care not to overlap the input numbers However overlap of input numbers is allowed for input interruptions Example When the pulse width period measurement flag M8076 is used X000 is occupied Therefore it is impossible to use C235 C241 C244 C246 C247 C249 C252 and C254 pulse catch contact M8170 SPD ZRN and DSZR instructions at the same time 2 When the pulse width period measurement function and high speed counters are used together the overall frequency of high speed counters is affected For more details refer to Section 11 7 3 Make sure that the total frequency of four input channels is 50kHz or less when using the pulse width period measurement function For details on programming refer to the programming manual 11 Use of High speed Counters 11 1 Outline FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 Use of High speed Counters 11 1 Outline High speed counters use input terminals X000 to X007 of the main unit for inputs and offer counting up to 60kHz 1 phase Input terminals not used for high speed counters are available for general purpose inputs gt For the input specifications for X000 to X007 of the main unit refer to Section 10 2 11 2 Types of Counting and Operations The main unit has built in 32 bit high speed bi directional counters 1 phase 1 count input 1 phas
498. unction v Usable A Timer and counter settings cannot be changed A Only monitor function is usable test function is not available L1 Unusable Display Screen Protect Function Name Keyword All online DE 4 ee Writing Reading writing SS Gia BO prohibited prohibited 2 T A All operations sc C Erroneous 8 digit keyword setting level gt e Incorrect write oe prohibited aaa write prohibited o medala v pecan Jg a 1 4 1 38 a iil A B a a v R aA EON e BH j v J v nj v Dn ECT Bn u u isplay screen protect functio s ee E A Bn v v pojpo A A B v v pojpo id v v v Time oy UN EEN 1 Customer keyword Permanent PLC lock included 2 The test function can be enabled or disabled by setting the specified device monitor 19 16 4 Relationship between keyword and display screen protect function 318 If the PLC s keyword registration function is used that keyword related restriction takes priority over the display module s display screen protect function The relationship between keywords and the display screen protect function is shown below ds Keyword Status ios a Function Restrictions registration Status Keyworde is being used is being used Keyword is not being used Keyword is being used Keyworde is canceled All functions are enabled no restrictions Keyworde is not being used is not being used Restriction of functions is according to the displa
499. uning is forcibly finished PID operation is not started The operation direction estimated from the measured value at Step response method the start of auto tuning was different from the actual operation Auto tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto tuning and the measured value and then execute auto tuning again Continues 6751 operation Auto tuning is finished gt PID operation is not started Because the set value was fluctuated during auto tuning auto 6752 Step response method tuning was not executed correctly Improper auto tuning result Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change Cycle or set a larger value for the input filter constant After changing the setting execute auto tuning again Limit cycle method 6753 i T Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not Limit cycle method started 6754 Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto tuning Check whether the target setting contents are correct SHPV lt 0 lt Limit cycle method gt Auto tuning is forcibly finished PID operation is not 6755 Abnormal auto tuning transfer status started gt Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Ensure that devices occupied by PID instruction are not overwritten overwritten in the program lt Auto tuning is forcibly
500. unit UONINPOJJU Example of configuration N Input extension Special function Output extension Output extension Input extension Main unit block block block block block 8 points FX3U 64CCL 8 points 16 points 8 points SOWeN Hed pue seJnjee Range extendible to main unit l Extension blocks to be added Special function block 1unit Input output 16 points Input 8 points Output 16 points OO Confirm the priority of all extension blocks to be connected to the main unit 23 The priority is determined by the extension block type without regard to the connection position S from the main unit as shown below Priority 4 Input extension Special function Output extension Output extension Input extension P Main unit block block block block block 3 8 points FX3U 64CCL 8 points 16 points 8 points S Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Judge whether extension to the main unit is possible DTE Judge the possibility of extension to the main unit for all extension blocks in turn starting from a o E block having the highest priority confirmed in step 1 In this example due to the restriction one special extension block and 16 points in input output extension block the only FX3U 64CCL priority 1 and 16 points of the output extension block pri ority 2 can be connected to the main unit Check whether extension from the 24V DC service power supply is possible Check using the
501. unt the special adapter or connector conversion adapter FX3G CNV ADP on the main unit before installing the main unit to the enclosure e Mount the input output powered extension units blocks and the special function blocks in the enclosure after installing the main unit in the enclosure The expansion boards memory cassette and the display module can be fitted to the main unit after it is installed The battery can be replaced while the main unit is installed in the enclosure However when the expansion board display module memory cassette or connector conversion adapter is attached remove the respective device gt For the replacement method refer to Chapter 22 2 Affixing The Dust Proof Sheet The dust proof sheet should be affixed to the ventilation port before beginning the installation and wiring work gt For the affixing procedure refer to the instructions on the dust proof sheet Be sure to remove the dust proof sheet when the installation and wiring work is completed FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 4 Procedures for Installing on and Detaching from DIN Rail 8 4 2 Installation of main unit UONINPOJJU The main unit must be installed before installing a special adapter or connector conversion adapter on the enclosure gt For the connection procedure refer to Subsection 8 6 3 and Subsection 8 6 4 N Push out all DIN rail mounting ho
502. uoisue NEN EN 2 yoojg euw CO 171 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 13 Examples of Wiring for Various Uses User s Manual Hardware Edition 13 3 Input Matrix MTR Instructions FNC 52 2 Main unit input output powered extension unit block Example of program M8000 Example of wiring 1 In the case of sink wiring When the main unit and a transistor output sink type input output powered extension unit block are used 0 1A 50V e qe QS ye ye ye ye ye diode is x necessary a X021VX022WX023VX024 V X025 VX026 V X027 EY 4 j J 3 Ji X021vX022VX023VX024 V X025 VX026 V X027 3 yE ye jE ye yE je i 2 JEE Input output powered extension unit block Main unit Transistor output sink A Ed 1 To use the input terminal X of the input output powered extension unit wire the terminal as shown by the dotted line 2 The terminals in the shaded areas are provided on input output powered extension units ex FX2N 32ET Output extension blocks do not have the terminals 2 In the case of source wiring When the main unit and a transistor output source type input output powered extension unit block are used 0 1A 50V SB Wo O O MD G B NB diodes gt mgl ls Js necessary Y X021WX022VX023VX024VX025VX026VX027 O N Co lt LO O t st Y t t Y st st V X021vX022VX023v X024v X025v X026v X027 o N co t LO Ze co co co C co C co Co 7
503. up E zuo J Serial NET 10 H NET I CC Link Ethernet PLC board board board board board ha C M1 Transmission speed 115 2Kbps ME rou us j Bus module MC side I F Detailed setting of PLC module EE Cancel P via MAC MTA transparent mode Connection channel list No specification PLC direct coupled setting Time out Sec onnectionte Put a check mark to the we check box via GOT F900 transparent mode C24 NET 10 H NET II CC Link X Ethemet System image Co existence m o E m ANEN TEL FXCPU network route C24 NET 10 H NET I CC Link Ethernet OK Accessing host station A display screen is the example of Ver 8 72A 4 Click the OK button to finish the setting 60 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 5 Version Information and Peripheral Equipment Connectability User s Manual Hardware Edition 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability mada 5 6 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability uononpou 5 6 1 Other Peripheral Equipment Applicability N Model name Applicability Remarks This series is compatible with the FX3G PLC when GT Designer2 Ver 2 85P or later is used GT15 and GT11 Standard monitor OS 03 14 or later Communication driver MELSEC FX 03 14 or later Option OS List editor for MELSEC FX 03 14 or later GT10 Standard monitor OS 01 10 or later Communication driver MELSEC FX 01 06 or later GOT10
504. ure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition mada INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in Section 4 1 of this manual Never use the product in areas with excessive dust oily smoke conductive dusts corrosive gas salt air CI2 H2S SO2 or NO2 flammable gas vibration or impacts or expose it to high temperature condensation or rain and wind Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly Doing so may cause device failures or malfunctions Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws Terminal block DIN rail only Main unit FX2N Series I O extension unit block and FX2N FX3U Series E DIN rail or direct mounting special extension block special adapter uononpou N S WEN Hed pue seJnjee Go Install the product on a flat surface If the mounting surface is rough undue force will be applied to the PC board thereby causing nonconformities 50 Make sure to affix the expansion board with tapping screws S a Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 N m 6 2 Loose connections may cause malfunctions o When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do
505. ursor to the 1 6 Cassette item then press OK to display the memory cassette Memory Cassette EE transfer screen Cassette PLC aes To cancel the operation and return to the top screen time display Mites Es BS Ss press ESC uil re N 2 Use the buttons to move the cursor to the Cassette PLC item then press OK to display the screen shown to the right Cassette gt PLC Sau To cancel the operation and return to the memory cassette transfer 7 screen press ESC 22 OK gt Excute S ESC gt Cansel 18 3 Press OK to begin the transfer Or press ESC to cancel the operation Cassette gt PLC ass o 0 Button Operation Description S T ESC Cancels the operation and returns to the memory cassette Please wait transfer screen e Disabled Disabled OK Executes the transfer a xe je H SS Caution e Do not turn the PLC power off or perform writing from the programming tool while a program is being transferred by a memory cassette transfer menu operation doing so may destroy the program and disorder the PLC 20 ey 4 Press OK or ESC to return to the memory cassette transfer screen gt D 9 o 307 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 12 Memory Cassette Transfers Result and measures to take The transfer is not executed if a PLC is running message appears I
506. ut Points 66 6 3 1 Calculation of number of input output points ccccoccccccccnnconnnnconcnnononnnncnnncncnnncnonancnnnnnnncnncnonnnnns 66 6 3 2 Maximum number of input output points when CC Link master is used 68 6 4 Number of Connected Extension Devices Including Extension Cable ssssse 69 6 4 1 Number of connectable expansion boards and special adapters coooocccccccncccononococnnnnonnnnnons 69 6 4 2 Input output powered extension UNIS occcoccncccocnnccononococonoconononnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnononnnononnnonannnnnnanininnns 69 6 4 3 Extension Power Supply Unit occccconcnccccconococonocononononcnnnoncnnonocnnononnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnannnonennnoninannnnnnos 69 6 44 Special function blO6KSsaand i d e UE eio hee ei Eoo aero dista a het Sume dete Reso Pede esu ee ROS ds 69 04 5 Extensionm iCable sraa S O UE o EIE EQUES 69 6 5 Expansiorrer Man Unit i 70 6 5 1 When adding input output extension blocks using the 24V DC service power cif eje of the main UNit sesiet iea dl a 71 6 5 2 Selection example 1 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit 73 6 5 3 Selection example 2 using the 24V DC service power supply of the main unit 14 6 6 Expansion of FX2N Series I O Powered Extension Unit oocccccoccccoccnccccnncconnnconcnonononcnncnnnononos 75 6 6 1 Quick r
507. ut and output terminals It can supply power to extension devices connected on the downstream side name Classification 1 None Not compliant with standard UL Compliant with standard Power supply Input output type Connection on terminal block R AC Power supply 24V DC sink input relay output S AC Power supply 24V DC sink input triac SSR output T AC Power supply 24V DC sink input transistor sink output R ES AC Power supply 24V DC sink source input relay output Total number of input Input output T ESS AC Power supply 24V DC sink source input transistor source output and output points extension R UA1 AC Power supply 100V AC input relay output Number of Number of input output points points Connection Model name Total number Number NEL ba Number of Input type Output type TE of points input points output points AC power supply common to 24V DC sink and source undis FX2N 48ET ESS UL ee 24V DC sink source Terminal block AC power supply only for 24V DC sink input FX2N 32ET Lx ICI E Transistor sink Terminal block FX2N 48ET E 24V DC sink Terminal block AC power supply common to 100V AC sink and source input ral ral a sa FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 3 Introduction of Products User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 1 List of Products and Interpretation of Model Names 3 1 3 Input output extension blocks The input output extension block has built in input or outp
508. ut terminals to add input or output terminals Connect the input output extension block to the main unit or input output powered extension unit FXz2N OO E LI LIZLJ UONnOnpoJjU N Classification 1 None Not compliant with standard do Series name UL Compliant with standard 25 Input output type Connection on terminal block or with connector zx ER 24V DC sink input relay output terminal block al ER ES 24V DC sink source input relay output terminal block X 24V DC sink input terminal block X C 24V DC sink input connector XL C 5V DC input connector ag X ES 24V DC sink source input terminal block 33 X UA1 100V AC input terminal block B YR Relay output terminal block gt YS Triac SSR output terminal block EXT Transistor sink output terminal block YT H Transistor sink output terminal block 4 Total number of input Input output YT C Transistor sink output connector e and output points extension YR ES Relay output terminal block D YT ESS Transistor source output terminal block 2 O Number of Number of input output points points i Connection Model name Total number Number NECEM Number of Input type Output type MA of points input points output points al Input Output extension type om Input extension type PON SEX 8 8 a pewwwa 6 Output extension type T peu n 0 8 ren remar g paene gt
509. ut type grounding 24V terminal 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or a two wire proximity switch a bleeder resistance may be required 3 In the case of sink input wiring short circuit the S S terminal and the 24V terminal of the main unit 4 The 24V and OV terminals are located on the output terminal side For details on the terminal layout refer to Section 4 7 134 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 10 Input Wiring Procedures User s Manual Hardware Edition 10 2 24V DC input Sink and source input type 10 2 4 Examples of external wiring source input Sink and source input type Main unit use id UONINPOJJU iT ENG o N o l Cn lt 97 L SOWEN Jed pue seunjee OO Lu U S ARY S 0 S Input Input BVIOVI24V impedance terminal 4 OV g o Input extension block 3 Two wire proximity al Sink and source input type seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A grounding ues C uoneJn6ijuo SON HUN SON jndinondu 24V uonejessu OO 5V 0V 24V Input terminal 1 Handle the power supply circuit correctly in accordance with Chapter 9 Preparation for Wiring and Power Supply Wiring Procedures 2 For an input device having a parallel resistance or
510. voltage lines high voltage devices and power equipment To prevent temperature rise do not install the PLC on a floor or a ceiling or in the vertical direction Install it horizontally on a wall as shown below Arrange the extension cable in such a way that the left connectors of the input output powered extension units blocks or special function units blocks are connected on the side closer to the main unit 8 1 1 Installation location in enclosure 93 mada uononpou N S WEN Hed pue seJnjee OO uononpoJu jonpoug suoneooods I al seone Jeyeudueg pue uoISJ9A wasis CO uoneJn6ijuo j jndinondu Z O 2 2 Z O m uonejeisu BULA jddns Jamog ue uoneledald ram Buum indu CO p FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 8 Installation In Enclosure User s Manual Hardware Edition 8 2 Layout in Enclosure 8 1 2 Spaces in enclosure Extension devices can be connected on the left and right sides of the main unit of the PLC If you intend to add extension devices keep necessary spaces on the left and right sides 1 Configuration without extension cable FX3G Series main unit FX2N 16EYT X LLI z x fh equipment FX3G Series main unit FX2N 16EYT F X3U AAD FX3G CNV Extension cable FXoN 65EC Input output TONES powered extension unit FX2N CNV BC FX2N 16EX Other equipment Other equipment gt 50mm 1 97 8 2 Layout in En
511. ware Edition 11 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 11 6 Timing of Updating of Current Value and Comparison of Current Value 11 6 1 Timing of updating of current value When pulses are input to an input terminal for a high speed counter the high speed counter executes up counting or down counting The current values of devices are updated when counting is input 11 6 2 Comparison of current value To compare and output the current value of a high speed counter the following two methods are available 1 Use of comparison instruction CMP band comparison instruction ZCP or contact comparison instruction Use the comparison instruction CMP band comparison instruction ZCP or contact comparison instruction if the comparison result is necessary at counting Use these instructions only when high speed processing is not required because these instructions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained Use the comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR and HSZ described below if it is necessary to execute comparison and change the output contact Y at the same time when the current values of high speed counters change 2 Use of Comparison instruction for high speed counters HSCS HSCR HSZ instruction Comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS HSCR and HSZ instructions perform compar
512. which cannot be written in RUN mode Circuit blocks which require attention on operation after write during RUN Others Caution Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output e DSZR FNC150 ZRN FNC156 PLSV FNC157 instruction with acceleration deceleration operation DRVI FNC 158 and or DRVA FNC159 instruction Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instruction during execution If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC immediately stops pulse output e PLSV FNC157 instruction without acceleration deceleration operation Avoid write during RUN to a circuit block including the following instructions during execution of communication If write during RUN is executed to such a circuit block the PLC may stop communication after that If the PLC stops communication set the PLC to the STOP mode once and then set it to the RUN mode again VCK FNC270 IVDR FNC271 IVRD FNC272 and or IVWR FNC273 instruction Instructions for falling edge pulse When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse LDF ANDF or ORF instruction the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON OFF status of the target device When write during RUN is completed fo
513. with two switches RUN and STOP The PLC can be started and stopped with individual RUN and STOP pushbutton switches For this operation a Sequence program using M8035 to M8037 is necessary For details refer to Operations of Special Devices in Programming Manual General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by RUN parameter S S xoo0 xoo1 xoo2 Main unit source input General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter S S Xoo0 xo01 X902 General purpose input terminal specified as RUN input by parameter S S x000 X001 X002 Main unit source input 182 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 2 Running and Stopping Procedures Power ON 3 Starting and stopping by remote control from programming software OI The programming software has a function to forcibly start and stop the PLC by remote control remote RUN 2 STOP function g 3 However when power is reapplied the remote RUN STOP function is disabled The RUN STOP status is then determined by the RUN STOP switch or RUN terminal For details on the start and stop procedures with remote control from programming software refer to 12 Paragraph 2 of Subsection 14 2 2 14 2 2 Use of several running stopping methods 1 When the built in RUN STOP switch and the general pu
514. wn below v Effective Ineffective Item In stopped status Batch writing of file registers D and extension file registers ER f 7 Partial modification of program ES Writing of program to PLC d Modification of whole program batch writing ae P Writing of parameters to PLC LR y Writing of comments to PLC MC y 1 Since the writing function is used during running the programming tool must be applicable to the writing function white running such as GX Developer FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 3 Operation and Test Power ON and PLC Running 14 3 4 Built in variable analog potentiometer function Oz The main unit has two built in variable analog potentiometers shown in the figure below BO The current value increases from 0 to 255 when a variable analog potentiometer is turned clockwise E Enlarged view 1 2 2 MITSUBISHI iss 3 ss 23 cg The current value of each variable analog potentiometer is stored in special data registers shown below Volume Data register to store current value VR1 variable analog potentiometer1 D8030 Integer from O to 255 VR2 variable analog potentiometer2 D8031 Integer from O to 255 O c D nN p o o gt ES Q 1 Use example 1 of variable analog potentiometer The current value of VR1 is used as the set value of a timer 4
515. xtension cables Stops operation Check user program 6105 The scan time exceeds the value stored in D8000 Watchdog timer error I O table creation error CPU error When turning the power ON to the main unit a 24V power failure occurs in a powered extension unit The error occurs if the 24V power is not supplied for 10 seconds or more after the main power is turned ON 6106 PLC PP communication error D8062 0000 E No error 6201 Parity overrun or framing error 6202 6203 6204 6205 Communication character error Check the cable connection between the programming panel PP programming device and the PLC This error may occur when a cable is disconnected and reconnected during PLC Data format error monitoring Continues PT Communication data sum check error operation Command error 194 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 6 Judgment by Error Codes and Representation of Error Codes PLC OT Error operation ST Contents of error Action m code at error ma occurrence 2 Serial communication error 1 M8063 D8063 000 eeror 12 6301 Parity overrun or framing error O 6302 Communication character error 6303 Communication data sum check error Inverter communication computer link and programming 6304 Communication data format error Ensure that the communication parameters are correctly
516. xternal power supply 5 to 30V DC 0 5A point The total load current of resistance loads per common terminal should be the following value Resistance For details on the common terminal for each model load refer to the Section 4 7 Terminal Layout e 1 output point common terminal 0 5A or less 4 output points common terminal 0 8A or less Max load 12W 24V DC The total of inductive loads per common terminal should be the following value Inductive For details on the common terminal for each model load refer to the Section 4 7 Terminal Layout e 1 output point common terminal 12W or less 24V DC 4 output points common terminal 19 2W or less 24V DC Open circuit leakage 0 1mA or less 30V DC current ON voltage 1 5 V or less Y 000 Y001 5us or less 10mA or more Y000 to YOO2 5us or less 10mA or more OFF gt 0N 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC Y002 or more 0 2ms or less 200mA or more Y003 or more 0 2ms or less 200mA or more Response at 24V DC at 24V DC time Y000 Y001 5us or less 10mA or more Y000 to YOO2 5us or less 10mA or more ON OFF 5 to 24V DC 5 to 24V DC Y002 or more 0 2ms or less 200mA or more Y003 or more 0 2ms or less 200mA or more at 24V DC at 24V DC Circuit insulation Photocoupler insulation HiS piay oi puipui LED on panel lights when photocoupler is driven operation Sink output wiring Source output wiring Output circuit configuration DC power supply A common number applies A common number a
517. y in the program Check that there are no duplicate coils in the program e When the output does not turn off The output circuit may be damaged Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric distributer 14 7 2 24V DC input does not operate main unit and input output extension blocks 1 Input does not turn on Disconnect the external wiring and connect the S S terminal and the OV terminal or the 24V terminal Short circuit the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S terminal and the input terminal then check the input display LED or a peripheral device to confirm that the input turns on Measures Check that the input device does not have a built in diode or parallel resistance When input turns on if So refer to Subsection 10 2 2 Measure the voltage between the OV terminal or 24V terminal not connected to the S S terminal and the input When input does not terminal with a tester to confirm that the voltage is 24V DC turn on Check the configuration of the external wiring and connected devices and the connection of the extension cables 2 Input does not turn off Check for leakage current from input devices If the leakage current is 1 5mA or more it is necessary to connect a bleeder resistance For details on the measures refer to Subsection 10 2 2 FX3G Series Programmable Controllers 14 Test Operation Adjustment Maintenance and Troubleshooting User s Manual Hardware Edition 14 7 Troubleshooting 14 7
518. y screen l l Keyword is being used Keyword is not registered protect function Keyword is not being used All functions are enabled no restrictions Keyword is not ELEME Restriction of functions is according to the keyword level Keyword is registered 19 Display Module FX3G 5DM 19 16 Display Screen Protect Function FX3G Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Hardware Edition 11 19 16 5 Keyword levels oz 1 For 8 Digit Keyword a 8 Digit Keyword Level Keyword Input Example Keyword Content es 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with A OABCDEF2 A All operations prohibited cid to 3 numeral AABCD345 1 2 T ner uy mon B1234567 s B Read Incorrect write protection 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with B BABCDEF7 T oe y new C8904567 EL C Erroneous write prohibited 8 digit hexadecimal value beginning with C CDEF567F i 2 For 16 Digit Keyword Customer keyword Permanent PLC lock included 13 16 Digit Keyworde Level Keyword Content Keyword Input Example S 7 OABCDEF262297529 23 All online operations prohibited A to F 0 to 9 16 digit value AABCDEBE34523724 cg D re i n B123456789012345 p Writing prohibited A to F O to 9 16 digit value 7ABCDEF73DAEB93A Y Y i Tw NE 2890445234817567 Reading writing prohibited A to F 0 to 9 16 digit value CDEF567FABDFEA46 1 4 q e52 i i oss i So A 19 16 6 Relationship between specified d

FX3G Users Manual - Hardware Edi

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents